IntroductionWelcome| 00:00 | (Music playing)
| | 00:04 | Hi, I am David Rivers and welcome
to Windows 7 Essential Training.
| | 00:08 | In this course, I'll show you with
everything you need to know to maximize your
| | 00:11 | experience in the new Windows 7 environment.
| | 00:15 | Now for those who are new to Windows
in general, I'll begin by showing you
| | 00:18 | some of the basics you'll need to know to
function efficiently in any Windows environment.
| | 00:24 | Then you'll learn everything you need
to know to make the switch to Windows 7,
| | 00:27 | beginning with an assessment of your hardware.
| | 00:29 | How to transfer your old files to your
new environment, and even how to your old
| | 00:34 | XP programs in Windows 7.
| | 00:36 | I will show you how to take advantage
of changes made to the user interface to
| | 00:40 | improve your overall efficiency.
| | 00:42 | We'll explore multitasking with the Taskbar,
and how to save time by using Jump Lists.
| | 00:47 | Window 7 includes several programs,
tools, and utilities for working with
| | 00:52 | photos, music, and video.
| | 00:54 | I'll show you how to use the Media
Center to simplify your experience when
| | 00:57 | working with these types of files.
| | 00:59 | You will learn all about the media
player for playing music, and video.
| | 01:03 | I will show you how to use the
Photo Gallery to share and organize your
| | 01:06 | photos, and you'll learn how to take pictures
of your computer screen with the Snipping tool.
| | 01:12 | If you're upgrading to Windows 7,
you'll likely want to upgrade to Windows
| | 01:15 | Explorer 8, and Windows Live Essentials,
both of which provide additional tools
| | 01:19 | and accessories, which will
enhance your Windows 7 experience.
| | 01:23 | You'll learn how to use Web Slices,
and Accelerators to help you work more
| | 01:27 | efficiently in Internet Explorer, and
I'll show you how to stay connected with
| | 01:31 | your online community using tools like
Windows Live Messenger, Hotmail, Sync,
| | 01:38 | Writer and even Movie Maker.
| | 01:41 | Now my goal in this course is to show
you how you can greatly improve your
| | 01:44 | experience with Windows 7, using
many of the powerful, and time saving
| | 01:48 | features built right in.
| | 01:50 | So with so much to cover let's get started.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Windows basics for first-time users| 00:00 | If you are new to working in a Windows
environment, or you're simply brand-new
| | 00:03 | to computers in general, you are
definitely in the minority, but
| | 00:07 | congratulations on getting started.
| | 00:09 | This lesson is for you.
| | 00:11 | We are going to cover some basic
concepts that will help you move through the
| | 00:15 | various lessons in this title.
| | 00:17 | Notice that I have launched Windows, and
what I see in front of me is the desktop.
| | 00:23 | This is where everything happens.
| | 00:24 | Just like in real life working on top
of the desk, you may have many papers,
| | 00:29 | different types of files open, maybe
you've got books, and reference materials
| | 00:34 | that can happen on your computer, and
it all happens here on your desktop.
| | 00:38 | You'll also notice that you
may have one or more icons.
| | 00:42 | In this case I have got one for my Recycle Bin.
| | 00:45 | Every time you delete a
file or a folder it goes here.
| | 00:50 | Down below I have got Exercise Files,
so I've got an icon representing that
| | 00:54 | folder full of exercise files.
| | 00:57 | Down at the bottom of the screen
just below you'll notice a Taskbar.
| | 01:01 | Now this Taskbar is going to
display all of your open programs,
| | 01:05 | programs that are running, but on the
left-hand side you'll see shortcuts.
| | 01:09 | These are icons that will take you
directly to some very commonly used
| | 01:14 | programs, or applications.
| | 01:16 | You can add your own here as well, but
the defaults include Internet Explorer,
| | 01:21 | Windows Explorer for navigating the
contents of your computer, and the Media
| | 01:25 | Player for playing things
like music, and video files.
| | 01:28 | In the bottom right-hand corner,
you are also going to see some icons.
| | 01:32 | In this case it looks like I
might have a couple of the issues.
| | 01:35 | I am going to see a little flag with an
X. We'll be talking about what all that
| | 01:38 | means later on in this title.
| | 01:40 | You will also notice that I have got an
icon for my Internet or Network access
| | 01:44 | and this little speaker icon for
adjusting the volume of my Speakers.
| | 01:49 | So these are all the defaults, and we can
definitely make changes to those defaults.
| | 01:53 | If there are certain programs that you
use on a regular basis, you might want
| | 01:57 | them appearing on the Taskbar.
| | 01:58 | I will be showing you how
to do that later on as well.
| | 02:00 | What we skipped over is down here in
the very bottom left-hand corner formally
| | 02:05 | known as the Start button, and many
people will continue to call this the start
| | 02:08 | button, because here is where we go
to start everything, including shutting
| | 02:12 | down your computer.
| | 02:14 | It is also known as the Windows Orb,
and when we click, meaning press the left
| | 02:18 | mouse button once to display
the contents of our Start menu.
| | 02:23 | It's broken up into two sections.
| | 02:24 | On the left-hand side, we are
going to see some actual programs.
| | 02:29 | You might see files that you've
worked with, and at the bottom you'll see
| | 02:34 | something called All Programs, and when
you just move your mouse over there, and
| | 02:38 | hover, that means you don't
click anything just hover,
| | 02:41 | after a certain amount of time you're
going to see a list of programs, and
| | 02:46 | folders that may contain additional programs.
| | 02:48 | Here is where you're going to see
everything that's installed on your computer.
| | 02:53 | You can also search for it using the
Search box down at the very bottom.
| | 02:57 | Now the search functionality is lightning fast.
| | 03:00 | So if you need to find a program or you
need to find a file, the contents of a
| | 03:04 | file, we can use this.
| | 03:06 | We will talk about this
in detail later on as well.
| | 03:08 | On the right-hand side you're going to
see shortcuts to various locations, or
| | 03:14 | folders for example.
| | 03:16 | My own folder, my Documents folder,
Pictures, Music, quick access to Games, down
| | 03:22 | here you'll see the entire Computer
where I can see a list of all of the drives,
| | 03:27 | and the folders, and their contents.
| | 03:29 | We also have quick access in the
bottom section here to the Control panel,
| | 03:33 | Devices and Printers and so on.
| | 03:36 | So these are all shortcuts that stay
here on the right-hand side, which you are
| | 03:39 | going to notice on the left-hand
side is that this list is ever changing.
| | 03:43 | Windows is going to keep track of
the things you use most often, and
| | 03:46 | display them there.
| | 03:47 | For example when you install new
applications they may show up here as well.
| | 03:52 | If you don't want to do anything from
a selected menu, such as our Start menu
| | 03:55 | here, just move your mouse away and I
am going to go to the desktop where there
| | 03:59 | is nothing showing, and click once.
| | 04:01 | Press that left mouse button once
and it closes everything up for me.
| | 04:06 | So clicking will select and deselect things.
| | 04:09 | Double-clicking is another concept when using
the mouse, which is kind of like a shortcut.
| | 04:15 | If I just click the Exercise Files
folder you'll notice that it appears
| | 04:18 | selected or highlighted.
| | 04:20 | Now I can press Enter on my keyboard
to display the contents, or the shortcut
| | 04:24 | is to double-click.
| | 04:26 | So double clicking will open up my
Exercise Files folder, and here you'll notice
| | 04:30 | I've actually got subfolders, and I
can double-click those folders to display
| | 04:35 | their contents, and continue until
I actually see some actual files.
| | 04:40 | So here I am in the 02_04 folder.
| | 04:42 | When I select a file, that means click
once to select it, like HumbugStory, you
| | 04:47 | are going notice some things
happen here in Windows Explorer.
| | 04:51 | For example, at the bottom I see
information about this file, when it was
| | 04:56 | created, the author, etcetera.
| | 04:58 | Also I see it is an XPS Document, and
that's why if I go up to the toolbar
| | 05:03 | you'll notice on the Open button I see
an icon for the XPS Viewer, the default
| | 05:08 | program that will be used to
display the contents of this file.
| | 05:13 | So that means if I was to double-click
this file, the XPS Viewer should launch,
| | 05:18 | and display my document.
| | 05:22 | Now I've got two windows
that are open on my desktop.
| | 05:25 | In the background, I have got Windows
Explorer and I have also got my XPS Viewer
| | 05:30 | showing up here on top.
| | 05:31 | If I want to switch over to Windows
Explorer, I just simply click anywhere there.
| | 05:35 | Notice it appears now on top, my
XPS Viewer is in the background.
| | 05:41 | Both of them appear on my Taskbar.
| | 05:43 | Now Windows Explorer was
already there as a shortcut.
| | 05:46 | So when I move down to it and hover I
see just a quick thumbnail representation
| | 05:51 | of what's being shown in Windows Explorer.
| | 05:54 | You'll also notice, as I move away from
it, that the Windows Explorer icon on the
| | 05:58 | Taskbar is actually highlighted.
| | 06:02 | That means it's in use.
| | 06:04 | It's not just a shortcut now.
| | 06:05 | It's a natural running program.
| | 06:07 | Also you'll notice the XPS viewer, and
when I hover over that, I see a thumbnail
| | 06:12 | of that particular program and its contents.
| | 06:15 | Here is neat thing, I can go right
up inside that, and as I hover there
| | 06:19 | everything else kind of goes
transparent, so I can focus in on that program.
| | 06:24 | If I want to go to that program I can
click once to bring it to the front.
| | 06:29 | In the top right-hand corner of
every window you're going to notice a
| | 06:32 | few buttons as well.
| | 06:34 | Notice there is little button that
looks like a dash it's the Minimize button.
| | 06:38 | So if I want to not close this up, but
just get it out of the way temporarily,
| | 06:43 | so I can come back to it later, I
can click the Minimize button, and it
| | 06:47 | appears down below.
| | 06:48 | Now to bring it back I go down to my XPS Viewer.
| | 06:51 | I can just click to bring it back, or
like we did before, click the thumbnail.
| | 06:56 | The next button is a changing button.
| | 07:00 | Now because this window does not fill
my entire screen, this button is known as
| | 07:05 | the Maximize button.
| | 07:06 | So if I want this document to fill the screen.
| | 07:08 | So I don't have to use scrollbars by
clicking, holding the left mouse button
| | 07:12 | down, and dragging a scroll bar
to be able to read the contents.
| | 07:16 | I can have it filled the
entire screen, so I can see more.
| | 07:20 | Clicking the Maximize button displays
nothing but the XPS Viewer in this case,
| | 07:25 | and my Taskbar down below.
| | 07:27 | Now I don't have to scroll left or right,
but I do need to scroll up and down,
| | 07:30 | because it's a fairly long document.
| | 07:33 | Also notice up here in the top right
corner, the Maximize button has changed
| | 07:36 | to a Restore button.
| | 07:38 | As I hover over that I see the tooltip.
| | 07:40 | It says Restore Down meaning when I
click the button it's going to restore it
| | 07:44 | back down to its original size.
| | 07:48 | The only other button to discuss on the
top right-hand corner of these Windows
| | 07:52 | is the red button with the X on it.
| | 07:54 | That is the Close button.
| | 07:56 | This is what's actually going to close
up the program, not just minimize it.
| | 08:00 | So I am going to close the XPS Viewer,
and I am going to go up to the top and
| | 08:05 | click to close my Windows Explorer.
| | 08:08 | Notice that it's still selected, or
highlighted here so pressing Enter on my
| | 08:12 | keyboard will bring me right
back to the Exercise Files.
| | 08:16 | Now if you want to move things around,
you are going to need to know how to
| | 08:21 | select files, and folders and items, and
different ways to copy, or move them around.
| | 08:27 | For example, If I wanted to take the
XPS Viewer document, and move it to my
| | 08:32 | desktop, well I could go back into the
Chapter 02 folder by double clicking into
| | 08:37 | the 02_04 folder, and just simply click
then drag, and you'll notice when I get
| | 08:44 | to the desktop there is a little
message down below indicating, I am about to
| | 08:47 | move it to the desktop.
| | 08:49 | So when I let go that's exactly what happened.
| | 08:51 | It's now easily accessible on my desktop, but
notice it no longer exists in my 02_04 folder.
| | 08:59 | So how do I undo that?
| | 09:01 | Ctrl+Z on your keyboard is the
shortcut for undoing anything.
| | 09:07 | So if you have deleted text in a
document, Ctrl+Z will bring it back.
| | 09:12 | If you have accidentally changed it to
the color pink, Ctrl+Z will bring it back.
| | 09:16 | So let's try that.
| | 09:17 | Hold down Ctrl on the keyboard.
| | 09:19 | Press the letter Z. And you'll notice
that it's moved from my desktop back
| | 09:24 | to the 02_04 folder.
| | 09:26 | Maybe I'd rather copy it. Well in that
case, I can click-and-drag it over.
| | 09:32 | Now I am going to hold down my Ctrl key
before I let go over the mouse button,
| | 09:36 | and it says Copy to Desktop.
| | 09:38 | So when I let go I have made a copy.
| | 09:41 | Now I am going to get the other
one as well, but I am going to try a
| | 09:44 | different method here.
| | 09:45 | There is another button on
your mouse, on the right-hand side.
| | 09:48 | So when we click that button,
we call it right-clicking.
| | 09:51 | Well instead of right-clicking, press
the right button down and hold it and
| | 09:56 | now drag over to the desktop, and
you'll notice you get the same option which
| | 10:01 | is to Move to Desktop, but when you
let go you get some options now, copy it
| | 10:06 | here or move it here.
| | 10:08 | The Move here is bolded,
because it's the default.
| | 10:11 | You could also just simply create a
shortcut to it, which means it's not going
| | 10:15 | to copy it to the desktop.
| | 10:16 | That's going to put a little link
that will open it up from its original
| | 10:19 | location, or I can just cancel the whole thing.
| | 10:22 | Let's create a Shortcut.
| | 10:24 | Notice that shortcuts
look a little bit different.
| | 10:26 | I see it's an Excel file, but I also
see this little arrow indicating that this
| | 10:31 | is a shortcut to the original,
which still exists in my 02_04 folder.
| | 10:36 | I am going to close this up.
| | 10:39 | Now if I click the desktop,
neither of them is selected.
| | 10:42 | I can get organized by moving
them around, just his click-and-drag.
| | 10:45 | Maybe I want them side-by-side, click the
desktop and neither of them is highlighted.
| | 10:51 | Now I have got quick and easy access
to them, one through a shortcut, one
| | 10:54 | through a copy of the original.
| | 10:56 | When you no longer need files,
and you wish to delete them,
| | 11:00 | you can move them to the Recycle Bin.
Deleting them using the Delete key on your keyboard
| | 11:05 | does the exact same thing.
| | 11:06 | For example, if I click the Humbug
document and press Delete on my keyboard,
| | 11:11 | a little message appears, are you sure you
want to move this file to the Recycle Bin?
| | 11:16 | Notice my Recycle Bin is empty, when I
click Yes, it's no longer empty, and my
| | 11:21 | file has been move there.
| | 11:23 | What's great about the Recycle Bin is
if you didn't mean to delete it, or you
| | 11:27 | need to get it back for some reason,
| | 11:28 | you can go get it, double-click the Recycle Bin.
| | 11:31 | It opens up just like any other folder
in Windows Explorer, and you can just
| | 11:36 | drag it back to the desktop.
| | 11:38 | Notice the Recycle Bin is empty.
| | 11:40 | There are no files, no contents.
| | 11:43 | I can close the Recycle Bin
just like any other window.
| | 11:47 | If you want to move more than one file there
is different ways to select multiple files.
| | 11:52 | In this case, we are on the desktop.
| | 11:53 | So if I click HumbugStory, and hold
down my Ctrl key on the keyboard, I can
| | 11:59 | select another file.
| | 12:00 | In this case the shortcut.
| | 12:02 | Let's deselect, by simply
clicking anywhere on the desktop.
| | 12:06 | Another option is to use Shift.
| | 12:08 | Let say I want the Exercise Files and
both of these documents deleted and put
| | 12:13 | into the Recycle Bin.
| | 12:14 | I would click the first one, Exercise
Files, go to the last one, hold down my
| | 12:18 | Shift key, and notice
everything in between is selected.
| | 12:22 | So I have used Ctrl to select
individual that are not adjacent to each other,
| | 12:27 | use Shift to select everything
in between my two selections.
| | 12:31 | In this case Exercise
Files and my Excel shortcut.
| | 12:35 | I am going to deselect one more time.
Because we are on the desktop, another
| | 12:38 | option is to marquee select.
| | 12:41 | If I want just these two files I
can start out here in my desktop,
| | 12:44 | click-and-hold the left mouse
button down, and now you can see I am
| | 12:48 | actually drawing a marquee.
| | 12:49 | As soon as I touch the first one, you
can see how it's selected, when I get over
| | 12:53 | close to the Humbug document.
| | 12:55 | It becomes selected.
| | 12:57 | Now they are both selected.
| | 12:58 | So I can just drag them
directly into the Recycle Bin.
| | 13:02 | When I let go, they have been deleted.
| | 13:05 | Of course, I can get those back. When
we right-click, remember right-clicking
| | 13:10 | with the right mouse button, such as
the Recycle Bin, we see those options, and
| | 13:14 | one of them is to empty the Recycle Bin,
and this will permanently delete both
| | 13:19 | of the contents that have been added.
| | 13:21 | So I am going to choose Empty Recycle Bin.
| | 13:23 | I get this warning, and you'll
often see warnings when you go to delete
| | 13:26 | something permanently.
| | 13:27 | Are you sure you want to do this?
| | 13:29 | Clicking Yes will permanently delete
them, click No, if you are not sure and
| | 13:35 | they will stay there.
| | 13:37 | So those are just some of the basics you
will need to know, as we continue on in
| | 13:41 | this course going through the various
lessons, learning all about Windows 7.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using the exercise files| 00:00 | If you're a premium subscriber or if
you purchase this title on disc, you'll
| | 00:04 | have access to the Exercise Files.
| | 00:06 | A number of the lessons in this title
will make use of exercise files and if you
| | 00:11 | plan on following along with me, you
might consider placing the Exercise Files
| | 00:14 | folder in a convenient
location, such as the Desktop.
| | 00:18 | Inside the Exercise Files folder,
you'll find sub-folders corresponding to any
| | 00:23 | of the chapters, where
exercise files might be used.
| | 00:27 | Inside those sub-folders, you'll find
additional sub-folders, corresponding to
| | 00:31 | the individual movie that uses an
exercise file and inside those folders is
| | 00:36 | where you'll find the actual files we'll use.
| | 00:38 | Now, if you don't have access to
the Exercise Files, don't worry.
| | 00:43 | You can still learn lots by
sitting back, relaxing and watching.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
1. Upgrading and MigratingAssessing your hardware and Windows 7 versions| 00:00 | If you're watching this movie and you
have not yet installed Windows 7, you may
| | 00:05 | be wondering, "Will my PC hand Windows 7?"
| | 00:08 | "Do I have the hardware necessary?
| | 00:10 | "What edition should I be installing?"
| | 00:12 | This movie is for you.
| | 00:14 | If you've already installed Windows 7 and
it's working fine, you can skip by this one.
| | 00:18 | You can see I have loaded
up Internet Explorer here.
| | 00:21 | I'm at the Windows homepage.
| | 00:23 | So, if you want to follow along with me,
go to the Microsoft homepage and next
| | 00:27 | we're going to locate the Window 7 page.
| | 00:30 | Now, of course, this webpage is ever
changing and there may be links that
| | 00:34 | you'll find to Windows 7.
| | 00:36 | At the date and time of this
recording, it's this icon down below,
| | 00:40 | Introducing Windows 7.
| | 00:41 | I'm going to select it to
go to the Windows 7 homepage.
| | 00:44 | And here's where we find some of the
headings that are going to help us with our
| | 00:47 | decision to either upgrade
to Windows 7 or install it.
| | 00:50 | First of all, you will see I
have got a What's New heading.
| | 00:53 | That's going to tell me
some of the new features.
| | 00:55 | If there are features in there that you
don't care about you may not need to upgrade.
| | 00:58 | However, there are some great new
features that we're going to be talking about
| | 01:01 | in his title that you may want and
you will need to install Windows 7.
| | 01:05 | Here is where we go to compare the
different editions and then finally Get Windows 7.
| | 01:11 | When we go to Get Windows 7, there is
a cool utility we're going to download
| | 01:15 | that will help us scan our computer and let us
know if there are any issues we may run into.
| | 01:20 | But let's start by
comparing the different editions.
| | 01:23 | Now, that scan that I was talking
about, will help you decide on the right
| | 01:27 | edition for you, but you can get some
information ahead of time by clicking that
| | 01:31 | Compare Editions heading.
| | 01:32 | Here you'll see we have got Home
Premium, Professional, and Ultimate.
| | 01:36 | There are other editions as well if
you buy hardware with Windows 7 already
| | 01:40 | installed, you might have the
Starter Edition, for example.
| | 01:43 | But then you might want to
consider upgrading to one of these three.
| | 01:46 | On the left the Feature list tells
you what's going to be included in each
| | 01:50 | edition by the check marks and you can
see the first number of features here
| | 01:54 | all three of the editions are going to
include Internet Explorer 8, improved
| | 01:59 | desktop navigation, something called
HomeGroup to help you with creating home
| | 02:03 | networks, very nice utility.
| | 02:05 | Let me get down to one called Windows XP mode.
| | 02:08 | If you have Windows XP programs that
will not run in Windows 7, don't let that
| | 02:15 | stop you from upgrading to Windows 7,
because with Windows XP mode you can run
| | 02:19 | those programs in your Windows 7
environment and you can see that you'll need
| | 02:24 | the Professional or Ultimate edition to do that.
| | 02:27 | Next, we have got some networking options.
| | 02:29 | So if networking is important to you,
you'll probably want the Professional
| | 02:33 | or Ultimate editions.
| | 02:34 | You can see backing up and restoring
either a home or business network is also
| | 02:39 | included in both
Professional and the Ultimate editions.
| | 02:43 | Now, if you need to be secure with your
portable storage devices, and you want a
| | 02:47 | help protect data using a new feature
called BitLocker, you're going to need the
| | 02:51 | Ultimate edition, and if 35 languages
is important to you as well, you'll need
| | 02:56 | to consider installing the Ultimate edition.
| | 02:59 | Now, let's go up to the top and click
Get Windows 7, and we're not actually
| | 03:04 | going to install it quite yet, we're
going to scroll down the Overview tab here
| | 03:09 | and you'll see there is some
information, Can my PC run Windows 7?
| | 03:12 | I can learn more about that
and I can also Shop for PCs.
| | 03:16 | The other link, that's going to take
as to that same question, Can my PC run
| | 03:21 | Windows 7 is the Upgrade
Advisor, so let's click that.
| | 03:24 | With the Upgrade Advisor, and you can
see as we scroll down, there is a button
| | 03:30 | that will allow us to Download the
Upgrade Advisor, at the date and time of this
| | 03:34 | recording, it's a Beta version, but we
click that button and this is going to
| | 03:39 | get us to the page where we can
Download the Beta version in this case, of
| | 03:44 | Upgrade Advisor and I'm going to do that.
| | 03:46 | And you can see I am asked a question here:
| | 03:48 | Can I run this file?
| | 03:49 | I'm going to click Run, yes and
I'm going to run the installation.
| | 03:54 | That's going to copy it to my computer.
| | 03:56 | Now, it's on my computer.
| | 03:58 | You can see it's very fast
and I'm going to click Next.
| | 04:01 | I'm going to accept the license terms
after reading them thoroughly of course,
| | 04:06 | and when I click Next, you can see the
default location for the Upgrade Advisor.
| | 04:10 | It's also going to Create a shortcut on
my desktop, so I can run it at any time
| | 04:15 | to scan my computer.
| | 04:17 | If you want to choose a different location,
use the Browse button and click Install.
| | 04:21 | And this could take a couple of
moments as it installs the application, and
| | 04:25 | creates that shortcut on your desktop.
| | 04:28 | Some user account control will show up
that you'll need to confirm by clicking
| | 04:32 | Yes, giving permission to install and then
it's successfully installed on your computer.
| | 04:38 | You can close that up and you can
minimize your Internet Explorer and you'll
| | 04:43 | notice a new shortcut on your Desktop.
| | 04:45 | Now, you're likely going to be
in Windows XP when you do this.
| | 04:49 | I've already got Windows 7 installed,
but I can still run the Upgrade Advisor.
| | 04:53 | All I do is double-click the shortcut
to get it running and if there is any
| | 04:57 | permissions required, you'll need to answer Yes.
| | 05:00 | You can see this is going to check
if your PC is ready for Windows 7.
| | 05:04 | All you have to do is
click the Start check button.
| | 05:08 | It's also going to be checking
devices that are attached to your computer,
| | 05:11 | so keep that in mind, if you got printers,
scanners, if you've got USB devices attached.
| | 05:16 | All of those would be taken into consideration.
| | 05:19 | Not only is it going to check your
hardware to see if it's going to run Windows
| | 05:24 | 7, but it's also going to choose which
edition of Windows 7 is best for you.
| | 05:29 | You've got that background knowledge.
| | 05:31 | You've studied the different editions
and you're going to get a recommendation
| | 05:34 | at the end of the Upgrade Advisor.
| | 05:36 | So, I'll let that take its course and
fast-forward to the completed report.
| | 05:41 | All right, eventually you're
going to see this Window pop up with a
| | 05:46 | few different sections.
| | 05:48 | You can see System Requirements,
it passed all 4 system requirements.
| | 05:51 | If I want to know what those are,
I can click the link, See all
| | 05:54 | system requirements.
| | 05:56 | CPU speed, my Random Access Memory,
my Hard Drive Free Space, and something
| | 06:02 | called Windows Aero.
| | 06:04 | If Windows Aero is capable on your
system, you'll be able to take advantage of
| | 06:07 | some of the cool features that
are included in Windows Aero.
| | 06:11 | That's kind of cool.
| | 06:12 | Let's go back to the Overview.
| | 06:14 | For Devices, No issues detected and
you can click See all devices to look at
| | 06:19 | each individual device connected to
your computer and how they passed.
| | 06:23 | Down below under Programs, it
looks like I have one Minor issue.
| | 06:27 | As I scroll down, I can
see all of that information.
| | 06:30 | It has to do with my SQL Server Client
and you can see, I might experience minor
| | 06:35 | issues using this program, while in Windows 7.
| | 06:37 | If it's a program you don't use a
lot, really nothing to worry about.
| | 06:41 | Even if you do use it, in
this case, it's a minor issue.
| | 06:44 | Any major issues will also show up and
in our case, in my case, I don't have any.
| | 06:49 | I can start to scan over or simply
close this window knowing I'm safe to go
| | 06:54 | ahead and install Windows 7.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Upgrading from other Windows versions| 00:00 | When upgrading to Windows 7 from
other versions of Windows wouldn't it be
| | 00:04 | nice if you could keep all of your
programs, all of the files you've created
| | 00:08 | using those programs, even some of
the settings that you've saved in that
| | 00:12 | previous version of Windows?
| | 00:14 | Well in many instances, that will be the case.
| | 00:17 | However, because there are
different editions and different versions of
| | 00:20 | those editions, you may run into issues
where you need to perform a custom installation.
| | 00:26 | So, we're going to examine those scenarios now.
| | 00:29 | Let's start with Windows XP
and the Vista Starter Edition.
| | 00:33 | If you're going to be upgrading to
Windows 7 from either of those two, you will
| | 00:37 | need to perform a custom installation.
| | 00:40 | What does that mean?
| | 00:42 | Well, you're going to need
to back up all of your files.
| | 00:44 | You'll need to remember your settings,
so you can apply them in Windows 7 and
| | 00:49 | you'll need to reinstall the
programs you were running in Windows XP or
| | 00:53 | Vista, in Windows 7.
| | 00:56 | So a Custom Installation can be a little
bit of work but it's definitely doable.
| | 01:00 | Now, let's talk about upgrading from
the different versions of Windows Vista.
| | 01:05 | You will see them down the
left-hand side of his table.
| | 01:08 | If you've got the Windows Vista Home
Basic edition, and you're going to be
| | 01:12 | upgrading to Windows 7, upgrading to the
Home Premium or Ultimate Editions will
| | 01:17 | allow you to do that In-Place Upgrade.
| | 01:19 | That means you won't have to worry
about backing up your files although you'll
| | 01:23 | probably want to, just in case.
| | 01:25 | But your files will be saved, the
programs you've installed they'll be there.
| | 01:29 | Even some of the settings that you've
applied in Windows Vista Home Basic, will
| | 01:33 | appear in Windows 7.
| | 01:35 | If you're upgrading to Windows 7
Professional however, you'll need to do that
| | 01:39 | custom installation.
| | 01:41 | Do you have the Windows Vista
Premium Edition, right now and you plan on
| | 01:44 | upgrading to Windows 7?
| | 01:46 | Well, upgrading to the Home Premium
Edition of Windows 7 or the Ultimate Edition
| | 01:51 | will allow you to do that In-Place Upgrade.
| | 01:53 | But again, if you need to go to Windows 7
Professional, you'll be performing a Custom Install.
| | 01:59 | If you're going from Windows Vista
Business to Windows 7, well upgrading to
| | 02:04 | Windows 7 Professional or Ultimate
allows you to do that In-Place Upgrade.
| | 02:08 | You'll have to do a Custom Install to
upgrade to Windows 7 Home Premium though from
| | 02:13 | the Windows Vista Business Edition.
| | 02:15 | And if you've got Windows Vista Ultimate,
you'll have to do a Custom Install to
| | 02:19 | go to Windows 7 Home Premium or
Professional but, if you're going from Windows
| | 02:23 | Vista Ultimate to Windows 7 Ultimate,
no problem that is In-Place Upgrade.
| | 02:28 | The other thing you'll need to
consider is what bit version you're using.
| | 02:32 | In other words, if you've got a 32-
bit version of a previous version of
| | 02:36 | Windows, you will need to upgrade to the 32-
bit version to be able to that In-Place upgrade.
| | 02:42 | If you're going from a 32-bit version
of Vista to 64-bit version of any of the
| | 02:47 | Windows 7 editions, it's a Custom Install.
| | 02:50 | So keep that in the back of your mind
as well when considering the edition
| | 02:54 | you're going to upgrade to.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Transferring old files with Windows Easy Transfer| 00:00 | Upgrading to any operating system,
including Windows 7, can mean a little bit
| | 00:04 | of work on your part.
| | 00:05 | You will need to back up your folders
and files so you can transfer them to the
| | 00:09 | new operating system environment.
| | 00:12 | If you're going to be moving from
Windows Vista to Windows 7, there is something
| | 00:16 | called Windows Easy Transfer and not
only will it allow you to choose the
| | 00:20 | folders and files you want to bring
over, but you can copy things like User
| | 00:24 | Accounts, Program Settings,
Internet Settings and Favorites.
| | 00:28 | Even E-mail Settings like
your contacts and messages too.
| | 00:32 | Well, if you are upgrading from Windows
XP, you know you are going to have to do
| | 00:35 | a Custom Install, which would normally
mean manually copying all of the files,
| | 00:40 | and folders you want to bring across.
| | 00:42 | But there is something called the
Windows Easy Transfer for Windows XP.
| | 00:46 | I have loaded up Internet Explorer
here and I have gone to the Microsoft page
| | 00:50 | where I can download Windows
Easy Transfer for Windows XP.
| | 00:53 | It didn't exist in XP.
| | 00:56 | There was something for
transferring files and settings, but it is not
| | 01:00 | compatible with Windows 7.
| | 01:02 | Now when you download Windows Easy
Transfer for Windows XP, you can run that
| | 01:06 | application on your XP computer.
| | 01:09 | Once you have run the application and
you have chosen the different folders,
| | 01:13 | files and settings that you want to
copy over, you can then use Windows Easy
| | 01:18 | Transfer in Windows 7 to bring them
over and that's we are going to do.
| | 01:22 | But I just want to show you that
clicking the Continue button here is going to
| | 01:25 | allow you to have Windows
Easy Transfer on your XP machine.
| | 01:29 | We will just close this up.
| | 01:31 | Now there are different
options for transferring your files.
| | 01:33 | You can do it using a
Windows Easy Transfer cable.
| | 01:36 | So you could have two computers
connected to each other through this cable using
| | 01:39 | easy transfer, simply move
the files and settings over.
| | 01:43 | But if it's the same machine that you
are upgrading you will probably want to
| | 01:46 | use something else, such as a CD, a DVD
or like I have done, use a USB device.
| | 01:53 | I plugged in a device and you can
see what happens here in Window 7.
| | 01:56 | AutoPlay launches the window that gives
me a number of options for working with
| | 02:01 | the files that are on my removable device.
| | 02:04 | Well, in this case I don't actually
want to do any of these things, I am just
| | 02:08 | going to close it up.
| | 02:09 | I want to use Easy Transfer to copy all
of those files and settings that I chose
| | 02:15 | in XP over to my new Windows 7 installation.
| | 02:18 | So to do that we will go to the Start
button or Windows Orb and we have got this
| | 02:23 | little Search field down
at the bottom, I love this.
| | 02:25 | All I have to do is type in the word, easy.
| | 02:28 | So I don't have to go looking
for the program. Look at the top.
| | 02:30 | There is two programs
that contain the word easy.
| | 02:33 | Windows Easy Transfer, right there
and Windows Easy Transfer Reports.
| | 02:38 | Once you have used Easy Transfer, at
least once, you will be able to go back to
| | 02:41 | reports to see what happened.
| | 02:44 | Well, we haven't done that yet.
| | 02:45 | So we are going to go to Windows
Easy Transfer and with the USB device
| | 02:50 | already plugged-in, you can see from this
window all of the different things I can transfer.
| | 02:55 | Now Windows 7 does bring us some new
upgrades to Windows Easy Transfer that
| | 03:00 | didn't exist in the old Vista version.
| | 03:02 | But you can see that User accounts,
Documents, Music and Pictures would be
| | 03:07 | included in the number of files
and folders you can move across.
| | 03:10 | There is E-mail, Internet
favorites, Videos and a whole lot more.
| | 03:13 | We will click the Next button.
| | 03:15 | Here is where we choose the way
that we are doing our transfer.
| | 03:18 | Remember I mentioned you could use a cable.
| | 03:20 | You can also use a Network if you are connected.
| | 03:22 | So if you're using one computer that
you're upgrading you can copy to a network
| | 03:26 | drive and then bring them back.
| | 03:28 | These two options are probably the best
and allow you to transfer the most, but
| | 03:33 | with an external hard disk or a USB
flash drive like we have got here, it might
| | 03:37 | be limited in space and may need to
repeat the process a few times before you
| | 03:41 | get everything moved over.
| | 03:43 | So you'll choose the selection that
corresponds to your transfer and now you
| | 03:48 | need to choose whether or not this
is the new computer or the old one.
| | 03:52 | Well, the old one is the old Windows version.
| | 03:55 | Like I said, I've already gone
through the download of the XP version of
| | 03:59 | Windows Easy Transfer.
| | 04:00 | I have chosen the files
and settings that I want.
| | 04:02 | They are on my USB drive.
| | 04:04 | This is my new computer.
| | 04:06 | So that's the one I am going to select
and at the very top, Has Windows Easy
| | 04:10 | Transfer already saved your
files from your old computer?
| | 04:12 | So if you haven't done that like I
already have, your option then would be No
| | 04:17 | and it would step you through the
process of backing up all the stuff that you
| | 04:21 | want to bring across to Windows 7.
| | 04:22 | If the answer is Yes, it's
already selected, click once to choose.
| | 04:27 | Well, there is my
removable disk right down there.
| | 04:30 | With it selected, I'll click Open and you
can see there is one file here and it's
| | 04:35 | just named automatically as I hover over.
| | 04:37 | It is an Easy Transfer File.
| | 04:39 | You can see the date it was
modified and the size. So I select that.
| | 04:43 | It now appears in the File
name field and I can click Open.
| | 04:46 | Now you can see it's
copying the Easy Transfer files.
| | 04:50 | This may take a moment.
| | 04:51 | It all depends on how much you are transferring.
| | 04:54 | One neat thing about Easy Transfer
is you can also protect all of that
| | 04:58 | information that you're
putting on a removable drive.
| | 05:01 | So to be more secure, I added a
password and I need to enter that password here
| | 05:06 | to be able to access those files.
| | 05:08 | This way I know that only I know the
password and nobody else could get access
| | 05:12 | to those files and settings.
| | 05:15 | So now I get to choose what I
want to transfer to this computer.
| | 05:18 | It's going to show me everything I have
chose and I have got some Shared Items.
| | 05:21 | I've got one of the User Accounts
with some of those user settings.
| | 05:25 | They are both checked off by default.
| | 05:27 | If you selected more you are going to
see the full list here in the screen.
| | 05:31 | All you have to do now is click Transfer
and you can see Easy Transfer file size.
| | 05:36 | There it is, 160 megs in my case, and
you'll see the progress as those files
| | 05:41 | are being transferred.
| | 05:43 | Remember, it's not just files and folders.
| | 05:46 | It could be any program settings you chose.
| | 05:48 | User accounts like we have here for Karen.
| | 05:51 | It could be program settings.
| | 05:52 | It could be your favorites for
example, in Internet Explorer.
| | 05:56 | So they are going to show up as well.
| | 05:58 | Once they are all transferred you can
see what was transferred or simply close.
| | 06:02 | To show what was transferred again, you
can see there are a number of documents
| | 06:06 | and if you want to see those
documents click Details and one user account.
| | 06:11 | So clicking Details here is going to
show me that it's the user account called
| | 06:14 | Karen and it's transferred to a new user
account called Karen here in Windows 7.
| | 06:19 | That's created for me.
| | 06:20 | I don't have to do any of that.
| | 06:21 | So I am going to close this up.
| | 06:22 | This is the Windows Easy Transfer Report.
| | 06:25 | If at any time I want to go back to that
and after I have closed up Windows Easy
| | 06:29 | Transfer remember, we can go to
the Start button or Windows Orb.
| | 06:33 | Type in the word 'easy'.
| | 06:34 | This time we are going to
choose Windows Easy Transfer Reports.
| | 06:38 | If you need to get
permission click Yes, and there it is.
| | 06:41 | That's the last report and I can go
back to any of these details if I need to
| | 06:46 | look at the different files
and so on, save the report.
| | 06:50 | It's already been saved, I am going to
close it up and I am going to close up
| | 06:53 | Windows Easy Transfer Reports and I am
ready to continue now in Windows 7 having
| | 06:58 | transferred everything I
need for my old XP account.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Dealing with device drivers| 00:00 | Drivers are those little files that
are typically hidden away that actually
| | 00:04 | drive the devices you connect to your computer.
| | 00:06 | For example, when you plug in a
digital camera, a driver is necessary to make
| | 00:11 | that device work on your computer.
| | 00:14 | The good news is with Windows 7 when
you connect devices, typically the drivers
| | 00:19 | are automatically found for you.
| | 00:20 | They are installed for you the first time.
| | 00:23 | And then you don't have to worry about them.
| | 00:24 | Sometimes even software is installed and
you are up and ready to use your device.
| | 00:28 | You don't even know anything happened.
| | 00:30 | Some older devices
however may not get recognized.
| | 00:34 | Now typical devices you might connect
to your computer include printers and
| | 00:37 | scanners, cameras, video cameras,
mass storage devices and so on.
| | 00:42 | So let's see what happens when
we connect a device in Windows 7.
| | 00:46 | I am going to use a digital camera.
| | 00:48 | Now if you have got something you'd
like to connect, go ahead and plug it in.
| | 00:52 | When you connect it to the
computer something may happen.
| | 00:55 | Check it down the bottom right hand corner here.
| | 00:57 | Very quickly it happened.
| | 00:58 | A message appeared saying that the driver
was being installed automatically for me.
| | 01:03 | Also down here the software was
installed successfully for my Olympus camera.
| | 01:09 | You can see the model number.
| | 01:10 | It's a USB device and because it is a
camera, AutoPlay also launch this window
| | 01:16 | where I have some picture options
for importing and viewing pictures.
| | 01:19 | Also some general options for using the
device like I would in any other Windows
| | 01:23 | folder, even as a backup or a speed up resource.
| | 01:28 | So I am going to close this up.
| | 01:29 | So my device is now
connected and it's ready to use.
| | 01:33 | So I can access it from Windows
Explorer or I could have made one of those
| | 01:37 | selections for viewing or
downloading those files.
| | 01:42 | But once it's connected
what about the driver itself?
| | 01:45 | We know the driver was installed.
| | 01:47 | Sometimes drivers are updated.
| | 01:49 | Sometimes we want to remove the driver.
| | 01:51 | How do we manage the drivers for
these devices when we connect them?
| | 01:55 | Well, we use the Device Manager.
| | 01:57 | Let's go down to the Windows Orb.
| | 01:59 | The old Start button.
| | 02:01 | Give it a click and down at the bottom,
the fastest way to find something and I
| | 02:05 | know the Device Manager is
under Control panel up here.
| | 02:08 | But I also know it's called Device Manager.
| | 02:10 | So I can start typing in the word
device and right at the top under Control
| | 02:15 | panel you will see Device Manager.
| | 02:18 | And here is where you are going to get
a list of everything in your computer.
| | 02:21 | Anything connected to your computer as well.
| | 02:24 | So if I go up to Disk Drives, because
I know that my digital camera is being
| | 02:27 | treated like a drive where I can
back up files and view those files,
| | 02:32 | there it is right at the top the Olympus.
| | 02:34 | And when I select it or highlight it, I
have got a number of options at the top.
| | 02:39 | I could go up to the File
menu to view those Options.
| | 02:42 | There is an Action menu to
update the driver software itself.
| | 02:46 | That's cool, and I can
Uninstall from here as well.
| | 02:49 | If I don't want this driver and I don't
plan on using this device on this computer.
| | 02:54 | I can also Scan for changes,
all kinds of cool things.
| | 02:57 | Now another option, we will just
click to close that, is to right-click the
| | 03:01 | device to see some of those options such as
Update Driver Software. So let's try that.
| | 03:07 | Now you can see that for this
particular driver I can search automatically.
| | 03:11 | I need an Internet connection if I
want to be able to search the Internet for
| | 03:15 | the latest driver or I can browse
the computer myself doing it manually.
| | 03:20 | Well most people are going to
let that happen automatically.
| | 03:24 | Look how fast that was.
| | 03:25 | Windows determined the
driver software is up to date.
| | 03:28 | So nothing happened.
| | 03:30 | If there was a new version it would
automatically be updated for me.
| | 03:33 | So I am going to close this up.
| | 03:35 | And I am going to close up my Device Manager.
| | 03:37 | Now let's see what happens
when I add an older device.
| | 03:42 | I know that this device in Windows XP,
even Windows Vista, did not get recognized
| | 03:48 | but I am in Windows 7 now.
| | 03:49 | So I am going to attach a very old MP3 player.
| | 03:52 | Let's see what happens.
| | 03:53 | As you can see the exact same thing
happened as with my new Olympus camera down in
| | 04:02 | the bottom right-hand corner of the Task bar.
| | 04:04 | You can see the name of this.
| | 04:05 | This is the BenQ Joybee.
| | 04:07 | So I even got the manufacturer name and size.
| | 04:10 | The device driver was found, the
software installed successfully and because
| | 04:14 | this is an actual storage device,
you can see this little window appears
| | 04:20 | indicating there might be a problem
with some of the files on the device.
| | 04:23 | Doesn't know really, so I can scan and
fix or I can continue without scanning if
| | 04:28 | I am not worried about it.
| | 04:29 | I will choose Continue and now I am back
to AutoPlay and you can see it's a media file.
| | 04:34 | So I have got Audio file options.
| | 04:36 | I can open it to view it.
| | 04:37 | Even use it to speed up my system.
| | 04:39 | Just like I could with my Olympus camera.
| | 04:42 | Now if we go back to Device Manager, I
like to type it in and we look at our
| | 04:50 | Disk Drives we have got the
BenQ installed here as well.
| | 04:55 | So I am going to right-click, and this
time go to Properties and here you can
| | 04:58 | see we have got a number of tabs.
| | 05:00 | In this case, you can see that the
manufacturer just under Standard disk drives,
| | 05:04 | but it does show up here is
BenQ, so it recognized that.
| | 05:07 | Any Policies, check out the Volume
information. Now in this case, there are no
| | 05:12 | volumes on this disk.
| | 05:14 | It's not really a disk, but if you
are working with disk devices you will
| | 05:17 | be able to do that.
| | 05:18 | Here is the Driver tab
and here are some options.
| | 05:21 | So I can view the Driver
Details. You can see that.
| | 05:24 | There is two of them there. Two certificates.
| | 05:28 | I can update the driver just like I
could by right-clicking, right from here.
| | 05:32 | I can Disable the device.
| | 05:33 | Now that doesn't remove the actual driver.
| | 05:36 | It just disables it.
| | 05:37 | So it doesn't appear in Device
Manager or I can choose to Uninstall it.
| | 05:41 | If I am not going to use this MP3
player, I really don't need the driver,
| | 05:44 | choose Uninstall and click
okay and it will be removed.
| | 05:49 | Now, I have got it done twice here.
| | 05:51 | So I have repeated this.
| | 05:53 | I have to do the same thing.
| | 05:53 | This time I am going to right-click and
choose Uninstall and click OK and it's
| | 05:57 | very quickly removed. Just like that.
| | 06:00 | So close up Device Manager and
talk about one last scenario.
| | 06:05 | If you got a really old device, you
probably don't want to use it anyways, but
| | 06:09 | if you can't let go the old device, you
want to plug it into your computer here
| | 06:12 | on Windows 7 and the driver can't be found,
| | 06:16 | you are going to have to go to that
manufacturer's website to try to find the
| | 06:20 | driver, download it from there.
| | 06:23 | Windows 7, once it's downloaded and
installed will be very good at finding it and
| | 06:27 | picking it up and allowing your device to
work, but not every single device in the
| | 06:31 | world is going to be able to work.
| | 06:34 | Some of those old ones just need to be
let go and continue working with your
| | 06:39 | newer devices here in Windows 7.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Running a Windows XP program in Windows 7| 00:00 |
Many people never upgraded
from Windows XP to Windows Vista.
| | 00:04 |
And one of the reasons was the inability
to run some of their older XP programs.
| | 00:09 |
Well, there's a new and powerful
feature that builds on virtual Windows XP that
| | 00:13 |
now lets you run XP applications and
Windows 7 applications side-by-side.
| | 00:18 |
It's called XP mode.
| | 00:21 |
And it consists of the virtual PC
based, virtual environment and a fully
| | 00:24 |
licensed copy of Windows XP with Service Pack 3.
| | 00:28 |
Now, it's not in the box with Windows 7.
| | 00:30 |
But it will be made available as a
free download from the Microsoft website
| | 00:35 |
and it will be available to users of Windows 7
Professional, Enterprise and Ultimate editions.
| | 00:41 |
Now, the key to XP mode is that it
does not require you to run the virtual
| | 00:45 |
environment as a separate Windows desktop.
| | 00:48 |
Instead, as you install applications
inside the virtual XP environment, they are
| | 00:52 |
published to the Windows 7
operating system as well.
| | 00:55 |
And this way you'll be able to run XP
based applications, like Internet Explorer
| | 00:59 |
6, for example, along side Windows
7 applications, on a single desktop.
| | 01:04 |
So let's check it out.
| | 01:05 |
Now I've installed XP mode already,
and you should know it's not just a
| | 01:10 |
simple download and run.
| | 01:12 |
First, you need to make sure you
have the power needed to run XP mode.
| | 01:16 |
You can see I am at the Windows site
here, on www.microsoft.com for Windows 7,
| | 01:22 |
specifically the page dedicated to
Windows XP mode, and Windows Virtual PC.
| | 01:27 |
Now, as we scroll down, you can see we
can download Windows XP mode from here.
| | 01:32 |
But before you download, you need to
learn how to configure your BIOS settings
| | 01:36 |
to enable hardware virtualization on your PC.
| | 01:39 |
And here's where you can go to see if
your PC is powerful enough to run XP mode.
| | 01:45 |
So when we click that link and scroll
down, you'll see there's a couple of
| | 01:48 |
utilities, one for Intel processors,
so if your computer uses the Intel
| | 01:53 |
processor you can download Intel
Processor Identification Utility, there is also
| | 01:58 |
one for AMD processors as well.
| | 02:02 |
So the Intel Processor Identification
Utility which I've already downloaded,
| | 02:05 |
clicking this link, it feeds you prompts,
you just answer the questions, you can
| | 02:09 |
accept all the defaults
and you'll have this utility.
| | 02:12 |
So I have got it running already.
| | 02:14 |
When you open it up, there are
several tabs, the Frequency Test tab is
| | 02:18 |
selected by default and you can
see the Expected Speed of the various
| | 02:22 |
components and the reports.
| | 02:24 |
But what's really important here is
you go to CPU Technologies tab, and for
| | 02:30 |
Intel(R) Virtualization Technology you
must see the word Yes, on the right-hand side.
| | 02:36 |
If you see a No, here, you will not be
able to run XP mode, and you will need to
| | 02:40 |
upgrade your computer,
| | 02:41 |
your hardware to be able to do so,
so I am going to close this up.
| | 02:45 |
Now we are back to the website, and we
are going to go back to the previous page.
| | 02:49 |
So once we have figured out whether or
not we can run XP mode, if you can, there
| | 02:53 |
are some steps to follow now as we
scroll down a little bit further.
| | 02:57 |
First step is to choose the appropriate
installation, whether you're using a 32
| | 03:00 |
bit or 64 bit installation.
| | 03:04 |
So for me it's 32 bit. The
language I have selected here is English.
| | 03:09 |
Step 2 is to download Windows Virtual
PC, the RC that you see at the end of
| | 03:15 |
Windows Virtual PC and XP mode stands
for Release Candidate, at the date and
| | 03:19 |
time of this recording.
| | 03:20 |
That's all that's available.
| | 03:22 |
Eventually RC will disappear.
| | 03:24 |
You'll have the full programs to download.
| | 03:26 |
So Step 2 is to click this button
to Download Windows Virtual PC again.
| | 03:31 |
You will follow the
prompts and it gets installed.
| | 03:33 |
Then once that is completed you go
down to Step 3 and do the exact same thing
| | 03:38 |
for Windows XP mode.
| | 03:39 |
Clicking this button will prompt
you for certain pieces of information.
| | 03:43 |
You can accept the defaults, like I did,
and you'll have XP mode ready to use.
| | 03:48 |
So I am going to minimize Internet
Explorer, back to my desktop and go to the
| | 03:54 |
Start button or Windows Orb.
| | 03:56 |
And I am going to go to All Programs.
| | 03:58 |
Once you follow those steps,
you'll see Windows Virtual PC.
| | 04:02 |
It's a folder appearing
at the bottom of your list.
| | 04:04 |
When you click that you will see
Windows Virtual PC as well as the one we
| | 04:08 |
want, Windows XP mode.
| | 04:11 |
Now the first time you select Windows
XP mode, there is a setup program that
| | 04:16 |
will run, so you'll have to wait for it to
pretty much install itself and be up and running.
| | 04:22 |
Then when you close it up,
it actually just hibernates.
| | 04:26 |
So you can see I have already gone through this.
| | 04:28 |
It opens up quickly.
| | 04:29 |
I have got a separate window
now, which I can move around.
| | 04:32 |
I can resize it if I need to.
| | 04:34 |
You can see it's going to adjust itself
and I am running Windows XP right here
| | 04:41 |
on my Windows 7 desktop.
| | 04:42 |
I have got the Start button down below.
| | 04:44 |
If I click Start, for example,
and choose Internet Explorer.
| | 04:46 |
I am actually running Internet
Explorer 6 in Windows XP right here.
| | 04:53 |
And if I go back down to my Windows 7
Taskbar and click the Explorer icon, you
| | 04:59 |
can see now I'm running Internet Explorer 8.
| | 05:02 |
And I can switch back to XP mode.
| | 05:05 |
I've got both versions running
simultaneously on the same desktop.
| | 05:10 |
And of course, if you have got any
older XP programs, they can be installed
| | 05:14 |
right from the Start button
inside the Windows XP mode window.
| | 05:19 |
So isn't that something?
| | 05:20 |
You can close that up, notice it's
hibernating the virtual machine.
| | 05:24 |
So next time when you go to run
XP mode it will open up quickly.
| | 05:27 |
I am also going to close up Internet
Explorer 8, and there you have it, Windows XP mode.
| | 05:36 |
No more excuses for
avoiding the upgrade to Windows 7.
| | 05:41 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
2. The Windows 7 User InterfaceGetting familiar with the desktop| 00:00 | When you launch Windows 7, and
you log in with your user account.
| | 00:04 | The very first thing you'll www
see is the Windows desktop.
| | 00:07 | This is where all of
your work will be performed.
| | 00:10 | At first glance, the Windows 7 desktop
doesn't really look any different from
| | 00:13 | the Windows Vista desktop.
| | 00:15 | But there had been some
changes and improvements.
| | 00:17 | So let's explore the desktop now.
| | 00:19 | We will begin in the bottom left-hand
corner with our Windows Orb, also known
| | 00:23 | as the Start button.
| | 00:25 | Notice as we hover over this button,
we see a little tooltip that says Start.
| | 00:30 | And this is where we go to start just about
everything, including shutting down our computer.
| | 00:35 | But when we click this button, there are
some subtle changes that we will notice.
| | 00:39 | For example, when you install new
applications such as the Intel(R) Processor ID
| | 00:44 | Utility that you see down here, you no
longer have the choice of displaying a
| | 00:48 | shortcut icon on the
taskbar during the installation.
| | 00:52 | Instead, newly installed programs appear
for a short time on the left side of the
| | 00:56 | Start menu down here at the bottom.
| | 00:58 | And this is all part of the recently
used list, so the other applications or
| | 01:03 | programs we see here have been recently used.
| | 01:05 | You will also see some at the top with
arrows, for example, Microsoft Office
| | 01:10 | PowerPoint, something I have used
recently, has a little black arrow, when I
| | 01:14 | hover over PowerPoint.
| | 01:15 | I am going to see some of the files I
used recently so I can quickly access them
| | 01:19 | from here, I don't have to go searching
through the various files in different
| | 01:23 | folders or once I launch
PowerPoint, I don't need the Open button.
| | 01:27 | I'll open PowerPoint
directly with the file in place.
| | 01:32 | Notice also when we hover over
these that a little pushpin appears on
| | 01:35 | the right-hand side.
| | 01:37 | If there's a certain file you use over
and over, such as an Excel Spreadsheet
| | 01:41 | everyday, you might want to pin it to
this list, so that it never disappears.
| | 01:45 | It'll appear at the top now under
the Pinned category and Recent files
| | 01:51 | will appear down below.
| | 01:52 | Of course as you continue to use more
and more files some of the older ones
| | 01:56 | disappear from the Recent list but
if you have Pinned one, it will always
| | 02:00 | appear on the Pinned list.
| | 02:02 | You can also unpin by clicking that pushpin.
| | 02:04 | It goes back to the recently used list.
| | 02:06 | All right, notice down at the bottom
we've got a program, in this case that
| | 02:11 | was recently installed.
| | 02:13 | And when you install programs you're
going to notice them appear down here at
| | 02:17 | the bottom, and if it's something that
you want to have quick and easy access
| | 02:21 | to, well you might want to pin it to the
Task Bar, or keep it here on the Start menu.
| | 02:27 | So you can pin programs as well.
| | 02:29 | Let's right-click our Intel Processor
ID Utility or any of the other programs
| | 02:34 | you have on your list.
| | 02:35 | It really doesn't matter.
| | 02:36 | When you right-click you will notice an
option to pin it to the taskbar, which
| | 02:39 | will pin it down below at the bottom
of your screen on the taskbar or you can
| | 02:44 | keep it here on the Start menu
by choosing Pin to Start menu.
| | 02:47 | I am going to choose Pin to Taskbar.
| | 02:49 | Notice a shortcut appears down
here on the taskbar and this item has
| | 02:53 | disappeared from my Start menu.
| | 02:56 | We can always unpin that by
right-clicking on the taskbar.
| | 02:59 | Choose Unpin this program.
| | 03:02 | We'll go back to the Windows Orb and
notice that that program appears back at
| | 03:06 | the bottom of my Start
menu on the left-hand side.
| | 03:09 | Now, you can do this for any of the
programs, another option is to create a
| | 03:13 | shortcut right on your desktop.
| | 03:15 | That's something you are
accustomed to doing, no problem.
| | 03:17 | For example, if you use the Paint
accessory on a regular basis, you might want a
| | 03:22 | shortcut to that right on your desktop.
| | 03:24 | All you do is go to the Paint icon,
click and drag it over to the desktop and
| | 03:30 | you'll notice, I haven't let go yet.
| | 03:32 | It says I'm about to
create a link in my desktop.
| | 03:34 | And when I will let go, there is my shortcut.
| | 03:37 | Of course, I can move that around if I want to
stay organized, move it over here to the left.
| | 03:41 | Now, this is just a shortcut.
| | 03:42 | It's not the actual program.
| | 03:44 | So if I move this to the Recycle Bin
all I am doing is deleting the shortcut
| | 03:49 | itself, not the program.
| | 03:51 | I can always go back to my Windows
Orb and access it from here as well.
| | 03:56 | Now, one cool new feature that I really
like about Widows 7 is called Aero Themes.
| | 04:03 | And with Aero Themes you get
some really cool functionality.
| | 04:07 | Let's start by right-
clicking anywhere on the desktop.
| | 04:10 | I'll go down to Personalize.
| | 04:13 | Now, under Themes here you'll notice that
you've got something called Aero Themes.
| | 04:18 | And the 7 in brackets or the number
you might see in brackets represents the
| | 04:22 | number of themes you have in that category.
| | 04:25 | So you can choose any of these themes,
this will change the background colors
| | 04:29 | and the images you see, might affect
your screen savers, some of the sounds that
| | 04:33 | you're going to hear as well.
| | 04:35 | So, if you have selected any of these
Aero themes, you have access to some of
| | 04:38 | the Aero functionality.
| | 04:40 | So let's close this up, we'll come back to
personalizing your desktop in another lesson.
| | 04:46 | For now though, as long as we got an
Aero Theme selected and it is a default
| | 04:50 | theme that is selected for you, when you
install Windows 7, we can start playing
| | 04:54 | around with some of that functionality.
| | 04:56 | So we'll start by opening up some programs.
| | 04:58 | We will go down to the Windows Orb.
| | 05:00 | Let's open up Paint, one
click opens that one up.
| | 05:04 | We'll go back down to the Windows Orb,
if you see the Calculator there, go
| | 05:07 | ahead and click that.
| | 05:08 | We'll also open up a game.
| | 05:11 | So we'll go down to the Windows Orb.
| | 05:13 | This time we'll just go to All Programs.
| | 05:15 | You can click or just hover
and eventually it'll open up.
| | 05:18 | And now we'll go up to Games, click,
and let's open up a game of Hearts.
| | 05:23 | And you can see now, we have got
several windows open up in front of us that
| | 05:28 | could get a little bit
confusing, a little bit crowded here.
| | 05:31 | If we wanted to focus on our Paint
window, here is one cool feature.
| | 05:35 | Of course, we could click the Paint
window to bring it to the front, but we
| | 05:39 | still see some clutter.
| | 05:40 | So just click and drag and shake
it, something called Aero Shake.
| | 05:46 | And you'll notice now it's the only
window appearing on the desktop, the others
| | 05:50 | have been minimized, moved down to the taskbar.
| | 05:53 | Now if we click and shake
again, we'll bring those back.
| | 05:57 | You can see they are both
open up here in the background.
| | 06:01 | Another option to stay organized and
this is very handy when copying files, for
| | 06:04 | example, from one folder to another,
is to simply drag any window from it's
| | 06:09 | Titlebar here at the top to one side
of the screen, either left or right.
| | 06:13 | So I am going to drag
this all away to the right.
| | 06:15 | As soon as my mouse pointer hits the right
side of the screen, you can see what happens.
| | 06:18 | It's resized for me, and
automatically fills the right side of my screen.
| | 06:23 | I am going to do the same
with my Hearts game here.
| | 06:26 | Drag it over to the left.
| | 06:27 | When I release, you can
see it's automatically sized.
| | 06:30 | So I can see both of these applications.
| | 06:33 | So you can imagine if you are working
with folders for example, how easy it
| | 06:37 | would be to drag files from one to the other.
| | 06:40 | You still have Minimize, Maximize and
Close buttons showing up at the top.
| | 06:44 | But another option if you want to
maximize is just to drag from the titlebar any
| | 06:50 | application, you can see when I move
back into the middle of my screen, it
| | 06:53 | resizes or restores to
it's original shape and size.
| | 06:57 | I can move all way to the top and let
go, and now I've maximized my screen.
| | 07:03 | Notice that the Maximize button
turns into a Restore button, clicking
| | 07:07 | this button will restore it back down to
it's original size where I can move it around.
| | 07:11 | Now one last item that we need to
discuss is something you may have noticed that
| | 07:15 | was missing when you first installed
Windows 7, and accessed the desktop and
| | 07:20 | that's the Getting
Started or the Welcome Center.
| | 07:23 | Now it no longer appears by default,
but you can always access it when needed
| | 07:27 | from the Accessories folder.
| | 07:28 | Let's go down to the Windows Orb, go
to All Programs and from Accessories,
| | 07:35 | you'll notice something called Getting Started.
| | 07:38 | And when we select Getting Started,
this is what you probably are accustomed
| | 07:41 | to seeing, when you first launched or installed
other Windows versions like Vista for example.
| | 07:48 | We have a lot of options here, for
getting started with your new operating system.
| | 07:52 | Once you have launched it though, remember
our Start menu displays recently used items.
| | 07:57 | So I am going to close this up.
| | 07:59 | You can go ahead and do the same thing.
| | 08:01 | Click the Windows Orb, and you
should see Getting Started now.
| | 08:04 | It's one of those with a black
arrow on the right-hand side.
| | 08:07 | So when you move over to the right
you'll notice the various tasks that we saw,
| | 08:12 | in the Getting Started window.
| | 08:13 | But we can access them directly from here now.
| | 08:16 | For example, if we wanted to add a new
user account, we could chose use Add new users
| | 08:21 | and it takes us directly to that section.
| | 08:23 | We could also get there from the Control panel.
| | 08:25 | You can see the entire path that's
required to get to User Accounts.
| | 08:30 | Here's where we can go to do things like
Change your passwords and account names
| | 08:33 | and Add new accounts and so on.
| | 08:35 | I am just going to close this up for
now, and let's close up all of the other
| | 08:39 | applications or programs that we have running.
| | 08:42 | And we return back to our desktop.
| | 08:44 | So that does cover the desktop itself.
| | 08:47 | We haven't gone into detail with a
part of the desktop that has been enhanced
| | 08:51 | down at the bottom, our taskbar.
| | 08:53 | That's coming up next.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Handling tasks with the improved task bar| 00:00 | Windows 7 includes an enhanced Taskbar
that addresses minimizing clutter and
| | 00:04 | putting commonly needed
functions in a single place.
| | 00:08 | And the biggest change is how
Microsoft has combined the Taskbar's ability to
| | 00:12 | manage open applications, and other
Windows with program launching capabilities.
| | 00:17 | Instead of two separate areas between
the Start button or Windows Orb on the
| | 00:21 | left, and the tray that you see on the
right-hand side, we have a single area.
| | 00:26 | We don't have two separate areas now,
for running programs and shortcuts.
| | 00:31 | So, they're all located down here
together on the Taskbar and this helps to
| | 00:36 | minimize the number of UI locations you
need to visit to get your work done.
| | 00:39 | So, let's open a program or two.
| | 00:42 | We'll go to the Windows Orb and if you
have got the Calculator handy, you can
| | 00:46 | try that one or any other
program for that matter.
| | 00:49 | Notice now that it appears on the
Taskbar next to the shortcut buttons that we
| | 00:54 | see there by default.
| | 00:56 | Now, any running application
looks a little bit different.
| | 00:59 | You can see it's shaded
and it's got this border.
| | 01:01 | Now buttons appear on the Taskbar in
the order that they were open, but one
| | 01:05 | cool thing you can do now with the
Taskbar buttons is to place them in the
| | 01:08 | order that you want.
| | 01:09 | So, let's open up another program,
we'll go to the Windows Orb and this time
| | 01:14 | we'll open up Paint.
| | 01:16 | And because it was opened second, you
can see it appears second here, in the
| | 01:19 | Taskbar after the other running program.
| | 01:21 | And these two appear after the three shortcuts.
| | 01:24 | But we can move these around.
| | 01:25 | Let's move the Paint ahead of the
Calculator or let's move it all the way over
| | 01:30 | to the left, in front of the Explorer icon.
| | 01:34 | So it is really up to you
the order that these appear.
| | 01:37 | Now, with Aero themes, which we
talked about in the previous lesson,
| | 01:41 | there is a new feature known as Aero Peeks.
| | 01:43 | And thumbnails can be accessed
from the Taskbar or by using something
| | 01:47 | called Windows Flip.
| | 01:48 | You may remember the old Alt+Tab,
now we can do the Windows+Tab to move
| | 01:53 | between running programs.
| | 01:54 | So, hold down your Windows
button on the keyboard and press Tab.
| | 01:59 | You can see now we've got a few
different things running here, pressing Tab
| | 02:03 | brings each item to the front.
| | 02:05 | So, we can go back to the desktop, back
to Paint or bring Calculator to the front.
| | 02:10 | Release the Windows button,
and that's what you see on top.
| | 02:13 | Of course, you still have Alt+Tab,
which will allow you to move directly to
| | 02:18 | any of those items.
| | 02:20 | Here's a neat feature too, when you have
more than one Window opened in any program.
| | 02:25 | For example, if you have multiple
Spreadsheets open in Excel or if we launch
| | 02:30 | Explorer you can see now that it
appears down at the bottom with that shaded
| | 02:34 | border indicating that it's a running program.
| | 02:38 | Right-click the Explorer icon down at
the bottom and click Internet Explorer to
| | 02:44 | open a second Window.
| | 02:45 | Notice that they are overlapped.
| | 02:47 | Now here's something that's really cool.
| | 02:50 | It's a part of the Aero themes
package. It's called Aero Peak.
| | 02:54 | When you hover over an icon, you are going to
see the open Windows presented in front of you.
| | 02:59 | Here, we've got two that are exactly the same.
| | 03:02 | So, let's go to our www.lynda.com site
here. We'll click up in the address bar
| | 03:07 | and go to a different site.
| | 03:09 | Let's go to www.microsoft.com.
| | 03:12 | Now, when I move down to my Explorer
icon on the Taskbar and just hover over it,
| | 03:18 | I get a little peek at the two windows.
| | 03:20 | So, if I wanted to see what's going
on with the www.lynda.com one, I just
| | 03:24 | simply hover over it, and if that's the window
I want to switch to, I click once to get there.
| | 03:31 | Another thing we can do using Aero Peeks,
so let's go back down to the Explorer
| | 03:34 | icon on the Taskbar.
| | 03:36 | You will notice when you move up to
either one of these open Windows, there is a
| | 03:40 | close button in the top right corner.
| | 03:42 | So, you don't have to select it and
then go to the close button to close it up.
| | 03:45 | You can close it right from here. There we go.
| | 03:48 | Now, we are left with one and you can
see my icon hass changed slightly. I don't
| | 03:52 | see that stacking or overlapping.
| | 03:54 | Now you may have noticed the absence of
a Show desktop icon on the Taskbar, for
| | 03:59 | hiding all of your open Windows.
| | 04:01 | And this feature has been
improved and renamed to Preview Desktop.
| | 04:05 | It's a part of the Aero Peek's functionality.
| | 04:06 | In this case, we move all the way over
to the right-hand side of our Taskbar.
| | 04:10 | You know as we just hover over that
little rectangle on the right, that's the
| | 04:14 | Show desktop, our open or running
programs become invisible or see through.
| | 04:20 | You can see there are borders.
| | 04:21 | But this allows us to see the
desktop, any shortcuts or any gadgets we
| | 04:25 | might have running.
| | 04:26 | And if you actually want to
minimize everything, click this button, and
| | 04:31 | everything does get
minimized down to the Taskbar.
| | 04:33 | You can see which ones are running:
Explorer, Calculator, and Paint. They look
| | 04:37 | different then Windows Explorer and the
Media Player down there on the Taskbar.
| | 04:41 | So, we can quickly go back to any
one of those, with a single click.
| | 04:45 | Now that's the default Taskbar, of course,
you can change how your Taskbar behaves.
| | 04:50 | All you need to do is go to a blank
spot on the Taskbar, anywhere with your
| | 04:53 | mouse pointer, and right-click, and you'll see
some options right away, such as Lock the taskbar.
| | 04:59 | By default it's checked off, meaning it's a
locked down there at the bottom of your screen.
| | 05:04 | But we can move it around.
| | 05:05 | First we need to unlock it.
| | 05:06 | So we'll click Lock the
taskbar, which does unlock it.
| | 05:10 | And now go to a blank spot on your
Taskbar, click and drag it over to the right
| | 05:14 | and you'll see what it looks like
on the right side of your screen.
| | 05:17 | Or move it to the left, if
that's where you like it.
| | 05:20 | That hides my shortcuts so I am
going to move it back down to the bottom.
| | 05:23 | When you hit the bottom of your
screen and it appears there, let go.
| | 05:27 | And this is where you might want to
lock it, so we can right-click again and
| | 05:30 | choose Lock the taskbar.
| | 05:33 | But there's more properties as well,
so let's go back down there, right-click,
| | 05:36 | and choose Properties.
| | 05:38 | For example, one popular
one is the Auto-hide feature.
| | 05:42 | This means that when you're not using the
Taskbar, it kind of hides itself out of the way.
| | 05:47 | Click the Auto-hide checkbox and click Apply.
| | 05:51 | This way we apply, the change but
we keep the Taskbar and Start menu
| | 05:55 | Properties Window open.
| | 05:57 | Notice that it's disappeared until we move our
mouse pointer down to the bottom. Then it reappears.
| | 06:01 | I am going to deselect that, and leave it
so that the Taskbar is always in view.
| | 06:08 | We can change the location from here as well.
| | 06:10 | You can see it is set to the Bottom.
| | 06:11 | But we can go Left or Right
or even the Top if you prefer.
| | 06:15 | The Taskbar buttons
always combine and hide labels.
| | 06:18 | Now, this is important when you start
to run many, many different programs at
| | 06:22 | the same time or have multiple
files open in an application.
| | 06:26 | You have some options here.
| | 06:28 | You can Combine when the taskbar is full,
Never combine or Always combine and hide labels.
| | 06:33 | So let's say we have got
three Spreadsheets open in Excel.
| | 06:37 | And there's no room on the Taskbar for
each one to appear as a separate button.
| | 06:41 | Well, they could always get combined.
| | 06:43 | You would hide the labels or wait
till the Taskbar is full, until they get
| | 06:47 | combined into one icon that's stacked,
like we saw with Explorer for example, or
| | 06:51 | you could choose to Never combine
and they will always have to appear
| | 06:55 | side-by-side and they get smaller and smaller.
| | 06:57 | So you may have seen this in the past
with other versions of Windows such as XP
| | 07:02 | or even Vista where the Taskbar
gets kind of full and gets crowded.
| | 07:07 | Now you have the ability to combine them
and choose the option that best suits you.
| | 07:11 | Always combine and hide labels is
selected and that's why when we had multiple
| | 07:15 | Explorer Windows, they appeared stacked.
| | 07:17 | But if you only wanted them
combined when the Taskbar is full.
| | 07:20 | You can make that selection. Click Apply.
| | 07:23 | And now down below you can see they are
spread out, and we can see the labels,
| | 07:28 | Taskbar Untitled Paint, the Calculator.
| | 07:31 | You can even see a little bit about Explorer.
| | 07:33 | Let's go back to here, and right-click
and open up another Internet Explorer,
| | 07:37 | see how it appears side-by-side and not stacked.
| | 07:40 | So, now it's starting to
get a little bit crowded.
| | 07:43 | Let's right-click and go back to
Properties, and let's go to our Taskbar buttons
| | 07:48 | dropdown, and choose Always combine
and hide the labels, when we click Apply,
| | 07:52 | you can see how it's tidied up our
Taskbar, our Explorer icons are stacked.
| | 07:57 | We have got Aero Peek, so that
helps us to determine what we want to do
| | 08:01 | with those Windows.
| | 08:02 | Also, you'll notice we can customize
the Notification area, which icons and
| | 08:06 | notifications appear in that area,
known previously as the Tray.
| | 08:11 | We've got some icons down here that
can be customized and we can choose which
| | 08:15 | ones we want to hide and
show using the Customize button.
| | 08:18 | Use Aero Peek to preview the desktop is
turned on, by default and that's why we
| | 08:22 | are able to hover over these and
see that little peek of the window, to
| | 08:26 | determine whether or not we want to
go there or for example, shut it down.
| | 08:30 | So, let's click OK and it'll save any changes.
| | 08:34 | We'll close up any open programs, we
know they are open from the Taskbar, if
| | 08:39 | they have got that border and shading
and we can close them directly from there,
| | 08:43 | by clicking the close
button inside the thumbnail.
| | 08:46 | So that's the new and
improved Taskbar in Windows 7.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Accessing your favorites quickly with jump lists| 00:00 |
Jump List provides quick and easy access
to frequently used files, sites, options
| | 00:05 |
and even information for any
program displayed on the taskbar.
| | 00:09 |
For example, if you visit a website
on a regular basis, you can access it
| | 00:13 |
quickly from the Internet
Explorer button on the taskbar.
| | 00:17 |
Now instead of clicking the Explorer,
button, right-click and you'll see up at the
| | 00:22 |
top frequently or recently visited sites.
| | 00:25 |
So you can quickly go to one of those
sites by simply selecting it on the Jump List.
| | 00:31 |
So, not only does it launch Explorer
but it takes you directly to that site.
| | 00:36 |
Let's close this up, and I want to show
you one other option with a Jump List.
| | 00:42 |
When we right-click the Explorer icon
not only can we see those frequently
| | 00:46 |
visited sites but you notice as we hover
over them, there is a little push-pin as well.
| | 00:51 |
So we are going to always see the
frequently or recently used sites, but if you
| | 00:56 |
want to keep one there, simply pin it
to the Jump List and it appears in a new
| | 01:00 |
category called Pinned.
| | 01:02 |
So you can always quickly access
that site directly from the taskbar.
| | 01:07 |
Let's try it with some files now.
| | 01:09 |
First, we'll go to the Windows Orb, click
once and you should be able to find Paint there.
| | 01:15 |
What we are going to do is pin this
to the taskbar, so right-click and
| | 01:19 |
choose Pin to Taskbar.
| | 01:21 |
Now it's down there.
| | 01:23 |
We'll click the Desktop anywhere.
| | 01:26 |
That closes up our Start menu, and
now we have our shortcut to Paint.
| | 01:30 |
Let's go up to the Exercise Files,
if you've got them, and double-click.
| | 01:34 |
Now double-click the Chap02
folder and double-click 02_03.
| | 01:38 |
You'll find a few different files here.
| | 01:41 |
They are all images.
| | 01:42 |
We'll go to Otters, right-click and let's
choose Open with and we'll choose Paint.
| | 01:50 |
Now, this launches the Paint program,
and opens up our image, which is fairly
| | 01:54 |
large, so it's hard to tell what
it is from this particular view.
| | 01:57 |
We might want to zoom down a little bit just
to be able to get a better look at that image.
| | 02:04 |
And now let's close up Paint and close
up our Windows Explorer folder as well.
| | 02:10 |
And now down at the bottom if we want to
quickly go back to that because we've
| | 02:13 |
got the Paint icon on the taskbar, we
right-click, look at that, there is the
| | 02:17 |
recently used list including Otters at
the top, so we can quickly go back to that.
| | 02:23 |
With a single click it launches
Paint and opens up our file for us.
| | 02:27 |
That's the beauty of Jump Lists.
| | 02:30 |
Now, it also works for
locations in Windows Explorer.
| | 02:35 |
For example, if we want to quickly go
back to the Exercise Files we have them on
| | 02:40 |
the desktop as a shortcut, but
instead of double-clicking Exercise Files,
| | 02:43 |
double-clicking Chap02 and double-
clicking the 02_03 folder we can go to the
| | 02:48 |
Jump List right down here, Windows
Explorer is on the taskbar by default.
| | 02:52 |
You can see the 02_03 folder, right there.
| | 02:54 |
It takes us directly back to that
folder much faster than having it
| | 02:58 |
double-clicked through all those folders.
| | 03:00 |
So, Jump Lists can really save you a lot of time.
| | 03:03 |
You also have the ability to manage the
number of items appearing on a Jump List.
| | 03:06 |
So by default it's set to 10.
| | 03:09 |
To make changes to that, right-click
the Windows Orb and click Properties.
| | 03:14 |
Now with the Start menu tab selected,
click Customize, and down at the bottom
| | 03:21 |
you'll notice two options.
| | 03:22 |
First of all you've got the Start menu
size, the number of recent programs to
| | 03:25 |
display in the Start menu.
| | 03:27 |
But you've also got number of recent
items to display in Jump Lists. There is
| | 03:30 |
that number 10, if you want less click
the Down Arrow, if you want more pump it up.
| | 03:35 |
I am going to move up to 12 and click OK.
| | 03:38 |
When I click OK, those changes are saved,
and now whenever I right-click any of
| | 03:43 |
those icons down below, I'll be able
to see up to 12 items on that Jump List,
| | 03:48 |
including the ones that I
pinned using that push-pin option
| | 03:52 |
So, remember Jump Lists when you want to
save some time and effort when locating
| | 03:56 |
frequently used files, locations, or even sites.
| | 03:59 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Finding files and programs with Windows Search| 00:00 | Windows Search functionality has been
greatly enhanced, and Windows 7 comes with
| | 00:04 | the very latest version.
| | 00:06 | Unlike the version that shipped
with Windows Vista, you can now obtain
| | 00:09 | lightning fast search results from
network-based file shares, as well as your
| | 00:14 | own local hard drives.
| | 00:16 | Let's say we are looking for a
spreadsheet with a hockey schedule.
| | 00:20 | There are a couple of different ways we
could do that. If we knew where it was located,
| | 00:24 | we could go to the Exercise Files, for example.
| | 00:27 | If you've got them double-click to open.
| | 00:30 | We'll double-click the Chap02 folder.
| | 00:31 | We know it's somewhere here in Chap02.
| | 00:34 | In the top right-hand corner of Windows
Explorer, you'll notice we've got a Search field.
| | 00:38 | So we can click there and everything we
search for is going to be in the Chap02
| | 00:43 | folder, so let's type-in the word hockey.
| | 00:45 | Notice there is one
spreadsheet here with a hockey schedule.
| | 00:51 | We see a little bit of information about it.
| | 00:54 | First of all, the type of file that it is.
| | 00:55 | It's an Excel 97 to 2003 worksheet.
| | 00:59 | Also down below in the list, we see a
little bit of information, the contents of
| | 01:03 | this particular file, when
it was updated and so on.
| | 01:07 | So, let's close up Windows
Explorer and try another method.
| | 01:10 | This is even better.
| | 01:11 | If you have no idea where to find this
file, click the Windows Orb, your old
| | 01:15 | Start button and type
hockey down there at the bottom.
| | 01:19 | You can see a flashing
cursor in the Search field.
| | 01:22 | Since we do that there
seems to be only one file.
| | 01:25 | It's in our Exercise Files, we don't
know that till we hover over it and see the
| | 01:29 | size, the date modified and
click to open up that file.
| | 01:33 | If you've got Microsoft Excel it
automatically opens up Excel and displays the
| | 01:38 | file, so we could close that up.
| | 01:40 | Now, another great use for Windows
Search is to find programs that you want run.
| | 01:45 | So instead of sifting through the All
programs menu and the Start menu, and a
| | 01:49 | bunch of sub-menus we can use the Search
field from the Windows Orb, give it a click.
| | 01:55 | Let's say we want to run Solitaire.
| | 01:57 | Start typing in the word solitaire
and you'll notice right at the top, got a
| | 02:01 | couple of different versions, select
the one you want and you are quickly in
| | 02:05 | and playing a game.
| | 02:06 | So, we'll close that one up as well.
| | 02:08 | So that's just a couple of examples how
you can save a lot of time, looking for
| | 02:13 | files and programs using this
latest version of Windows Search.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using the Action Center| 00:00 | A new feature to Windows 7 that
builds on the security center from previous
| | 00:04 | versions of Windows is the Action Center.
| | 00:07 | The Action Center consolidates system
notifications into a centralized location
| | 00:12 | where you can monitor issues and
the maintenance status of your PC.
| | 00:16 | Now, you typically won't interact
with the Action Center unless there is an
| | 00:20 | issue with one of your tracked
features and you will notice a little white
| | 00:23 | flag in the system area or
notification area here in the taskbar, if
| | 00:28 | everything is okay.
| | 00:29 | When you see a little red X like I
have, it means there may be a problem
| | 00:34 | or some minor issues.
| | 00:35 | And in this case when we hover over it,
you can see I have got a couple of
| | 00:38 | important messages, three messages in total.
| | 00:41 | When the message disappears, simply
move away from the taskbar and move your
| | 00:45 | mouse back down to read the rest of the message.
| | 00:48 | Now, to actually view the Action Center
information and address the issues that
| | 00:54 | may exist, you need to click
this button to gain access.
| | 00:58 | So, here you can see now I have got 2
important messages, 3 total messages.
| | 01:04 | I need to find an antivirus program
that's important, I need to set up Windows
| | 01:08 | Update and I need to Set up backup.
| | 01:10 | Those are the three messages
and actually handle those things.
| | 01:13 | I can go to the Action Center
itself from the bottom of this window.
| | 01:17 | Click Open Action Center and opens it up.
| | 01:20 | Now, I am getting even more information
under Security for example, Virus protection.
| | 01:24 | Windows didn't find an
antivirus software on this computer.
| | 01:28 | So I can use this button
to find a program online.
| | 01:32 | Same thing for Windows Update.
| | 01:33 | It's not set up for this computer.
| | 01:35 | I can change the settings directly from
here, by clicking the Change settings button.
| | 01:39 | So, I can Install Updates
automatically or choose,Let me choose to go into
| | 01:45 | this part of the Control panel.
| | 01:47 | Notice the path, System and Security,
Windows Update and Change settings.
| | 01:51 | So, I could have got there manually.
| | 01:53 | The Action Center is a convenient
location where I can access all of these things.
| | 01:57 | So, where it says Please select an
option, I am going to choose Check for
| | 02:01 | updates but let me choose whether or not
to download and install them, I click OK.
| | 02:06 | That saves my changes and
takes me back to the Action Center.
| | 02:10 | Here I can also set up a backup.
| | 02:12 | So if I choose Set up backup, you
can see it's starting Windows backup.
| | 02:16 | This is an actual program I would
have had to run using the Windows Orb for
| | 02:21 | example, and search for this program
or I can access it directly from the
| | 02:24 | Action Center here.
| | 02:25 | And here, you can see, I have got my
options, I can Save on a network, there is
| | 02:30 | my two drives, Backup Destinations, etcetera.
| | 02:33 | I am going to click Cancel for now.
| | 02:35 | I don't need to set that up right away.
| | 02:37 | As I scroll down towards the bottom of
this window you can see that I have also
| | 02:41 | got Troubleshooting and Recovery options
directly available to me here, from the Action Center.
| | 02:48 | I have also got access to some very
important features on the left-hand side.
| | 02:52 | I can go to the Control panel, the
homepage directly from here as well, Change
| | 02:56 | Action Center settings, when I click
this option you can see the messages can be
| | 03:01 | turned on or off and here are the
Security messages, all of which are checked
| | 03:05 | off, Maintenance message is also checked off.
| | 03:07 | If I don't want to see messages
about Virus protection I can deselect the
| | 03:11 | checkbox, any of these
other ones as well and click OK.
| | 03:15 | Notice down below now, in the notification
area of my taskbar I have got a white flag.
| | 03:19 | I no longer see that red X. That's
either because I fixed the issues or turned
| | 03:24 | off the notifications.
| | 03:26 | And in this case, on the left-hand side
I have got these yellow bars, they are
| | 03:29 | not red, they are not pressing, they
are not super important, but they are
| | 03:33 | things I should probably address.
| | 03:35 | So I am going to close up the
Action Center to return on to my desktop.
| | 03:39 | So, with the new Action Center, Security
and Maintenance tasks and Monitoring is
| | 03:44 | consolidated into one convenient location.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Keeping information at your fingertips with desktop gadgets| 00:00 | Windows 7 installs with a number of
desktop gadgets you have at your disposal.
| | 00:04 | So if there is information you like to
have on your screen at all times, you can
| | 00:08 | use a gadget to display that information.
| | 00:11 | Let's explore them now.
| | 00:12 | The easiest way to get a gadget on your
desktop is to right-click the desktop.
| | 00:17 | So we'll do that, and you'll notice
from the pop-up menu we've got Gadgets
| | 00:21 | down near the bottom.
| | 00:22 | So click that to display the default
gadgets that are installed with Windows 7.
| | 00:26 | Let's say you always like to have the
current time available to you, no matter
| | 00:30 | what you're working on.
| | 00:31 | There is one called Clock and we can
drag that over to the desktop and release
| | 00:35 | and we now have a gadget sitting there.
| | 00:38 | If you like to have access to a Calendar,
let's double-click the Calendar gadget
| | 00:42 | to pop it onto the desktop.
| | 00:44 | Notice some other cool ones here,
like the Weather for example.
| | 00:48 | If you always need to know what the
current and forecasted weather is, there
| | 00:52 | is a Weather gadget.
| | 00:53 | Currency conversion at your
fingertips, if you use this gadget.
| | 00:57 | The CPU Meter I like, because it always
shows you your computer's performance,
| | 01:00 | the CPU and your memory.
| | 01:02 | Let's say you load up an
application that bogs down your system.
| | 01:06 | You'll know exactly which application is
doing it when you watch the meters change.
| | 01:10 | You've also got some fun ones, like a
Picture Puzzle, and a Slide Show that's
| | 01:14 | going to go through your different photos.
| | 01:16 | You've got RSS Feeds as well
available to you, Feed Headlines.
| | 01:20 | So if you want to have
headline news at your fingertips.
| | 01:23 | If any of these, you need more
information on, let's see the CPU Meter.
| | 01:26 | We'll click once to select it, and
then down below, click Show Details.
| | 01:30 | This allows you to read a
little bit of information down below.
| | 01:33 | So you can see the current
computer CPU, and system memory in action.
| | 01:38 | If we click the Feed Headlines, we see
that we can track the latest news, sports
| | 01:42 | and entertainment headlines.
| | 01:44 | Now let's just leave this open for a
moment and explore the two gadgets we've
| | 01:49 | added already to our desktop.
| | 01:50 | When you hover over them, you're
going to see some buttons appear.
| | 01:52 | One to close it up, if you no longer
need it, another one to create a larger
| | 01:58 | sized version of the gadget.
| | 02:00 | Now in this case with the Calendar, we
are going to see the current date and if
| | 02:04 | we click the little Larger Size icon,
we get to see the actual month at a
| | 02:09 | glance, and we've got arrows to move
back and forth through the Calendar.
| | 02:14 | So I like that feature.
| | 02:15 | I am going to leave it maximized.
| | 02:17 | Same thing goes for your Clock.
| | 02:18 | You'll notice you've got a Close button.
| | 02:21 | Down below we've got options
for our clock. Let's click that.
| | 02:24 | Now, you can see we get to choose our Time Zone.
| | 02:27 | You can name your clock.
| | 02:29 | I am going to call this one, Ottawa,
and you can see we choose different
| | 02:34 | clock faces as well.
| | 02:36 | I like that one there, 2 of 8.
| | 02:38 | Current Time Zone is
selected by clicking the dropdown.
| | 02:42 | For me, I am going to look for
Eastern time in the US and Canada.
| | 02:46 | You can see how it changes
the time there on my screen.
| | 02:50 | Do I need that second hand ticking? Maybe I do.
| | 02:52 | I am going to click that check box
and click OK and there is my updated
| | 02:56 | gadget on my desktop.
| | 02:58 | Now, you may have also noticed when you hover
over these gadgets, there is the third button.
| | 03:02 | That allows you to just
move it around on your desktop.
| | 03:05 | So if you want to change its location,
just go to that third button to drag the
| | 03:08 | gadget, if you want it down there.
| | 03:10 | I am going to move this one to the top-
right corner, it kind of snaps into place,
| | 03:15 | and that looks good just like that.
| | 03:16 | Now, you can also go to
these gadgets and right-click.
| | 03:20 | There are some additional options.
| | 03:21 | For example, while you're running any
other application if you want that clock
| | 03:25 | to be on top, maybe you're waiting for
an important appointment, choose Always
| | 03:29 | on top, and it will always appear on
top of anything else that's running.
| | 03:33 | See when we move this window it goes in
behind the clock but on top of the Calendar.
| | 03:39 | One other option is the Opacity.
| | 03:41 | That's kind of important.
| | 03:42 | You can adjust the Opacity. Set at 100% by
default means you can't see through it at all,
| | 03:47 | nut if you want to be able to see through,
you have some other options to choose from.
| | 03:50 | I am going to go to 40%.
| | 03:52 | It's kind of faded there, until I hover
over it, then I see it in full opacity
| | 03:56 | but it's still going to show up Always on top.
| | 03:59 | You can see it just allows me to see
through the clock when I am not hovering
| | 04:02 | over it what's going on.
| | 04:04 | So it's another cool option.
| | 04:06 | You can also access additional
gadgets from the Gadgets window, down in the
| | 04:11 | bottom right-hand corner,
Get more gadgets online.
| | 04:13 | This is going to launch your default
Browser and take you to the Microsoft site
| | 04:18 | where you can choose from
Additional Desktop gadgets.
| | 04:21 | You can see this tab is selected
in the Desktop Gadgets section.
| | 04:25 | Here is one that will show me the date and
time together, so I don't need two gadgets.
| | 04:30 | Outlook Tasks, if you're using
Microsoft Outlook, you'll always have your
| | 04:33 | tasks at your fingertips.
| | 04:34 | Same thing goes for upcoming appointments.
| | 04:36 | That might be a good idea.
| | 04:38 | There is a Blogger Buddy, and you can
get access to Radio, all kinds of cool
| | 04:43 | things from the Microsoft site.
| | 04:45 | Let me just close this up, and we'll
close up our Gadgets window, and now we are
| | 04:49 | ready to continue working
with gadgets on our Desktop.
| | 04:53 | At anytime, if you don't want them
there, just hover over, click the Close
| | 04:56 | button and you'll close them up.
| | 04:59 | Now, you know how to get them
back, right-click, go to Gadgets.
| | 05:02 | They are still there, and the options
you select, for example, when I move the
| | 05:07 | clock over, are lost.
| | 05:08 | So if you want to keep the gadget there
and keep your options, don't close it up.
| | 05:12 | As soon as you close it up, you are
back to the default gadget, and that's how
| | 05:16 | you can keep information at your
fingertips using Desktop Gadgets in Windows 7.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
3. Windows ExplorerNavigating folders and their contents| 00:00 | If you think of your computer as a
huge file cabinet with many drawers and
| | 00:04 | in those drawers you might find
programs and in other drawers you might find
| | 00:07 | folders with sub-folders containing
files, we need in Windows 7, some kind
| | 00:13 | of program to manage those files, a file
management system known as Windows Explorer.
| | 00:20 | We are going to get a brief overview of
Windows Explorer in this lesson, because
| | 00:24 | there have been a few subtle changes
made to Windows Explorer in Windows 7 that
| | 00:29 | differ from Windows Vista, for example.
| | 00:32 | We can access Windows Explorer
from a number of different locations.
| | 00:35 | If you've got a shortcut to your Exercise
Files for example, it appears as a Folder Icon.
| | 00:39 | Double-clicking this will open it
up in a Windows Explorer Window.
| | 00:45 | Let's close that up.
| | 00:47 | By default you've also got a
shortcut to Windows Explorer on the taskbar.
| | 00:52 | Clicking once will launch Windows
Explorer, but it will display a different
| | 00:56 | location by default.
| | 00:58 | In this case, you can see Libraries.
| | 01:00 | Let's close this up one more time, and
access Windows Explorer from the Windows Orb.
| | 01:06 | Here we'll go to the right-hand
side and select Documents, for example.
| | 01:11 | This will display a different
location, but no matter how you access
| | 01:16 | Windows Explorer, you can always
navigate around to the various folders and
| | 01:20 | areas of your computer.
| | 01:21 | We'll start at the very top.
| | 01:23 | Here is where you're going to see the path.
| | 01:25 | For example, if you selected
documents from the Windows Orb, you'll see
| | 01:29 | Libraries and Documents.
| | 01:31 | On the right-hand side, you now
have a re-sizable search field.
| | 01:36 | In other words, if you want to make
this field bigger, move in between it and
| | 01:40 | the actual field showing the
path, you'll see a double-arrow.
| | 01:43 | Now, click-and-drag to the left to
increase the size of your Search field.
| | 01:49 | Now, it's just a matter of clicking
inside, and searching for whatever it is
| | 01:53 | you want to look for.
| | 01:54 | For example, if we type in the word
Hockey again, like we did in a previous
| | 01:59 | lesson, and press Return, we're
going to be searching in this case, the
| | 02:02 | Documents Library and you can
see no items match our search.
| | 02:06 | However, if we go to the Desktop and
select that one, so if you've got the
| | 02:10 | Exercise Files, you've probably stored
the Exercise Files folder, to get inside
| | 02:15 | a folder we just double-click and now if
we go up to the Search field and select
| | 02:21 | Hockey because we've already typed
it in once, you can see what happens.
| | 02:24 | We've got a couple of files containing the
word 'Hockey' and they happen to be Excel files.
| | 02:29 | Notice that down below, we
can search again in Libraries.
| | 02:32 | The entire computer gives us access to
every single file and folder on our computer.
| | 02:38 | We can also search the Internet from here.
| | 02:41 | Well let's go back to the left-
hand side and examine what's known as
| | 02:45 | the Navigation Pane.
| | 02:46 | You'll notice little arrows, which allow us
to expand or collapse the various sections.
| | 02:51 | If we don't care about Favorites, we can
collapse that by clicking, and we might
| | 02:55 | want to collapse our libraries as well,
and down under Computer, expand our
| | 03:00 | Local Disk, drive C.
| | 03:02 | Under Users for example,
we'll find ourselves in here.
| | 03:06 | If it's your own computer you'll find your
own User account as well as any other
| | 03:09 | accounts and a Public account.
| | 03:12 | To go inside my own, I'd click that arrow.
| | 03:14 | You can see I am expanding all the way down
and I could access My Documents from here.
| | 03:19 | Of course that's a long way to do.
| | 03:22 | Let's go back to the Exercise
Files now, and experiment a little bit.
| | 03:26 | So in this case, we're going to go
back up to Favorites and click Desktop.
| | 03:31 | To open up the folder Exercise Files, we
can double-click, and we will go to the
| | 03:36 | Chapter 03 folder and double-click it as well.
| | 03:39 | Now, we'll double-click 03_01.
| | 03:41 | These are all sub-folders within
folders and now we actually see the
| | 03:44 | files inside a folder.
| | 03:46 | And they're different types of files, and
how these files are displayed is up to you.
| | 03:51 | Yours may not look like mine.
| | 03:52 | I've got the Name showing up, the Date
modified, the Type of file it is, the
| | 03:57 | Size, these are details that
are being displayed in the Window.
| | 04:00 | If we go up to this little toolbar that
we see across the top, we've got buttons
| | 04:04 | for organizing, including them in Libraries.
| | 04:07 | There is a whole lesson devoted to
working with Libraries coming up shortly.
| | 04:12 | We can share our files, we can burn
them, even create our own folders.
| | 04:15 | We will be doing that in another lesson as well.
| | 04:18 | But over here on the right-hand side,
we've got a button to change our view.
| | 04:22 | This little dropdown allows us to view
the different options in a slider format.
| | 04:26 | You can see mine is next to Details.
| | 04:29 | I can click these or move the slider.
| | 04:32 | For example, if I just want to
see a list, I can move that up.
| | 04:35 | I no longer see the details,
just the list of my different files.
| | 04:39 | So if I got lot of files, I may not
want to clutter up the screen with details,
| | 04:43 | I just want to see the files.
| | 04:45 | If you want to have an idea of what's
inside the files, you might choose a
| | 04:48 | different option such as an Icon.
| | 04:50 | Now the smaller icons
don't give you much of a hint.
| | 04:53 | As you move up to Medium, Large and
Extra Large icons, you can start to see the
| | 04:58 | content inside some of these files.
| | 05:01 | Now, another option is to use the Preview Pane.
| | 05:05 | It's not showing by default, so if yours is
showing, it was probably turned on at some point.
| | 05:09 | But click the Preview Pane to view that
on the right-hand side and now when you
| | 05:13 | click once to simply select the file,
like a Word document, you will be able to
| | 05:18 | see the first page of that document.
| | 05:21 | Now, it may not look exactly the way
it's going to look when you open it up, but
| | 05:25 | it gives you a good idea of what's inside.
| | 05:27 | If we go to the other one, which is an XPS
file where you can see, it's straight text.
| | 05:31 | To close up the Preview Pane, click the
exact same button that you used to open it up.
| | 05:37 | I am going to go back to my
Options and choose Details.
| | 05:40 | I always like to see the Date modified,
the Type, and, because I've got these
| | 05:44 | displayed this way, I can also
change the order that they appear.
| | 05:47 | You'll notice above Name, there is this
tiny little arrow indicating that these
| | 05:51 | are sorted in alphabetical order.
| | 05:53 | That's why Annual Report
shows up before HumbugStory.
| | 05:57 | But if I'd rather see them sorted by the date
they were modified, I can click that button.
| | 06:02 | Click it again to reverse the order.
| | 06:05 | Same thing goes for Type and Size.
| | 06:07 | Now, when an item is selected, let's go
to the Annual Report, you are also going
| | 06:11 | to see some information
down below about that file.
| | 06:15 | And across the top, the toolbar
is ever changing. It's dynamic.
| | 06:20 | You'll notice the Open button
displays a Microsoft Word icon.
| | 06:23 | So clicking the Open button will
launch Microsoft Word, in this case, the
| | 06:27 | default program, and display my Annual Report.
| | 06:31 | If I click the dropdown, I could
choose a different program or choose a
| | 06:34 | different default program.
| | 06:36 | We'll be doing that later on as well.
| | 06:39 | So with Windows Explorer, you can navigate
your entire computer, go to your Favorites.
| | 06:44 | We'll also be talking about Libraries
in an upcoming lesson, and choose the
| | 06:49 | way you're going to display them and
whether or not you want to preview their contents.
| | 06:54 | Let's close up Windows Explorer
before we move onto the next lesson.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Staying organized with your own folders| 00:00 | Windows Explorer isn't just for
navigating your folders and files, there are
| | 00:04 | things you can do with those folders
and files and ways to stay organized.
| | 00:09 | That's what we are going to explore right now.
| | 00:11 | If you've got the Exercise Files,
we're going to open up that folder.
| | 00:15 | I've got mine on the Desktop.
| | 00:16 | So double-clicking opens it up.
| | 00:17 | Now I am going to move it from the
Title Bar, clicking-and-dragging all the way
| | 00:22 | to the left until it resizes
itself to the left-side of the screen.
| | 00:26 | Now, to open up another occurrence of
Windows Explorer, I am going to go down to
| | 00:31 | the Taskbar, and right-click.
| | 00:34 | From here, I can choose on the
pop-up menu Windows Explorer.
| | 00:37 | This opens up the second occurrence.
| | 00:39 | Now, I can move to the Title Bar and
drag that one all the way to the right to
| | 00:44 | resize and position it.
| | 00:46 | Now, you can see I've got two Windows
Explorer windows open, which is ideal for
| | 00:50 | copying and moving files around.
| | 00:53 | There are other things we can do as well.
| | 00:55 | Let's say we've got some files we want
to move from one of the folders on our
| | 00:58 | hard drive in the Chapter 03 folder.
| | 01:00 | We'll double-click that, double-click 03_02.
| | 01:03 | We got a couple of files that we want to put on
an external device, such as a USB Flash Drive.
| | 01:09 | Well, I've got mine plugged-in, if
you've got one, go ahead and plug it in or
| | 01:12 | choose a different location.
| | 01:14 | To find those devices of course, when
we go into Windows Explorer here on the
| | 01:18 | right-hand side, and just click anywhere.
| | 01:20 | It's going to be on the computer.
| | 01:22 | So underneath Computer, as long as
it's expanded, you'll see that device.
| | 01:27 | Click once to select it, and you'll be
viewing the contents on the right-hand side.
| | 01:31 | I've got a single folder.
| | 01:32 | Well, I want to create a new folder that's
called Exercise Files that I can copy to.
| | 01:37 | Well, you'll notice that we've got on
the Title Bar conveniently located right
| | 01:41 | at the top, a button for creating new folders.
| | 01:44 | It will create it in the folder you're
viewing, in this case, in our external device.
| | 01:49 | So click New Folder.
| | 01:51 | It says New Folder but
it's highlighted or selected.
| | 01:55 | You can type right over that.
| | 01:56 | I am going to type in Exercise Files,
and when I press Return or Enter on the
| | 02:01 | keyboard, I've got a new folder, simple as that.
| | 02:05 | Double-clicking will open it up and
you can see the folder is indeed empty.
| | 02:10 | Now it's time to get a copy of my files.
| | 02:13 | Well, I am going to start with the
PowerPoint file called ECPReview.
| | 02:16 | I am going to click-and-drag it
over to the right-hand side, and you'll
| | 02:20 | notice by default because this is a
separate location, it's not another
| | 02:25 | folder on my computer.
| | 02:27 | It's an actual device plugged into my
computer, the default is to copy to my
| | 02:31 | Exercise Files folder, and
that's what I wanted to do.
| | 02:34 | If I hold down Ctrl, when I am moving
to a folder within the same computer, I
| | 02:40 | can get copy as well.
| | 02:41 | But I am going to let go, and now I
have got a copy in both locations, a
| | 02:46 | backup if you will.
| | 02:47 | Of course I could do that with
multiple files. When you select a file,
| | 02:51 | you can select multiple files by holding
down Shift or Ctrl to select more than one file.
| | 02:57 | In this case, I only need to move the
other one or copy the other one, so I am
| | 03:00 | going to go back up to the top here,
my EatCake Inventory, which is an Excel
| | 03:05 | file, click-and-drag it over as well.
| | 03:08 | When I let go, I have now got those files in
my new folder called Exercise Files up here.
| | 03:13 | You can see it in the
path on my external device.
| | 03:17 | So copying and moving files around
is one great use for Windows Explorer.
| | 03:22 | Now, I am going to close up one of
these, and we are going to maximize our
| | 03:28 | Chapter 03, 03_02 folder here,
where we can see the contents.
| | 03:32 | And we're going to talk about
copying or moving within the same computer,
| | 03:37 | because it works a little bit different.
| | 03:39 | Let's say I want easy
access to this on the Desktop.
| | 03:42 | Well, if I click-and-drag and move over
to Desktop, you'll notice before I let
| | 03:46 | go, it says I am about to move it to
the Desktop which means it will only exist
| | 03:51 | in one location on my computer, and
that will be on the Desktop itself.
| | 03:55 | If I hold down Ctrl, you can see
how it changes to Copy to Desktop.
| | 03:59 | So when I let go, I now
have a copy on my Desktop.
| | 04:02 | To see it, I'll click Desktop.
| | 04:04 | There is my Exercise Files, but
there is my EatCake Inventory Excel
| | 04:09 | worksheet also on my Desktop.
| | 04:11 | Of course, when I close up Windows
Explorer, I am going to see it here on my
| | 04:16 | Desktop as well, which means double-
clicking will give me quick and easy
| | 04:20 | access to that file.
| | 04:21 | If I use it on a daily basis for example,
this is a great place to have it, not
| | 04:25 | only will it launch Excel for me, but
it will open up the file simultaneously.
| | 04:29 | So Windows Explorer is excellent for
navigating the contents of your computer
| | 04:34 | but it's also great for manipulating
and working with the files in the various
| | 04:38 | folders on your computer or any
device plugged into your computer as well.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Choosing how your folders and user interface behave| 00:00 | With Windows Explorer you have full control
over how your files and folders are displayed.
| | 00:06 | You also have full control over how
those files and folders behave, and that's
| | 00:10 | what we were going to explore in this lesson.
| | 00:13 | Now you can use any folder you like,
your Documents, or Pictures folder.
| | 00:17 | If you've got the Exercise Files folder
and you want to follow along with me, we
| | 00:20 | are going to double-click to open it up,
double-click the Chapter 3 folder, and
| | 00:25 | in there we'll double-click the 03_03
folder, because these are the files and
| | 00:29 | subfolder we are going to work with.
| | 00:31 | Now you can see by default what
happened here in Windows Explorer I have a list
| | 00:36 | of different types of files.
| | 00:38 | I also have a subfolder, which
automatically appears, at the top of my list.
| | 00:42 | I see details as well like the date
they were modified, the Type and Size.
| | 00:47 | Now that's a default view
for this type of folder.
| | 00:50 | If we double-click the Photos subfolder,
you'll notice it appears much differently.
| | 00:55 | Here I am seeing actual thumbnails of
each of the photos, as well as their names
| | 00:59 | down below, and I can get additional
information, just by hovering over a photo.
| | 01:04 | You can see the date it was
taken, dimension, size, etcetera.
| | 01:07 | All right, let's go back up to our 03_03
folder simply click it up here in the path.
| | 01:15 | Now we're going to change the way
we're viewing the contents of this folder.
| | 01:19 | Well one option is to change the order.
| | 01:22 | By default everything is listed in
alphabetical order, in ascending order, by
| | 01:26 | name, and when we click the
heading you'll notice it reverses order.
| | 01:30 | It's in descending order, now
any folders will appear at the end.
| | 01:33 | I can do the same for Date modified to see
the most recent, or the oldest to newest.
| | 01:39 | I can do that with the Type, and this
is great for getting different types of
| | 01:43 | files together for example, my two
Excel files are together, and then the
| | 01:47 | rest are on their own.
| | 01:49 | But you'll notice there is little
dropdowns to next each of these as well.
| | 01:53 | If we click the dropdown for example,
next to the Name heading, we can choose
| | 01:57 | to split the group up.
| | 01:58 | So if we got a huge list of files and
folders, and we want to see a section of
| | 02:02 | them, you can click a checkbox
and it narrows down the list.
| | 02:05 | If we click the checkbox for the others,
we see them all and of course if we
| | 02:09 | deselect all of our checkboxes, we
get the default, which is every single
| | 02:13 | file and subfolder.
| | 02:16 | Now the more files you have, the more
checkboxes you are going to see here,
| | 02:19 | and the better you are going to be able to
narrow down that list of files and folders.
| | 02:24 | Watch what happens though when we just
click anywhere down below to turn that off
| | 02:29 | and go to Date modified dropdown button.
| | 02:32 | This is cool, we get to choose Dates,
so we can choose the files and folders
| | 02:37 | that will be displayed using a date
or date range, if we select this first
| | 02:41 | checkbox, your default
date will be the current date.
| | 02:44 | And I happen to have one that was
created today, my Photos folder.
| | 02:48 | But if I want a Range, I can go back.
| | 02:50 | Let's go back to August for example.
| | 02:52 | You can use your own dates here.
| | 02:54 | Of course they are going be different
from mine, because you'll be doing this on
| | 02:57 | a different date from me.
| | 02:59 | And I'm going to hold down my Shift key
to get a whole range of dates, and you
| | 03:03 | can see that increases my list by one.
| | 03:06 | I am going to deselect that
checkbox, and I have some other options.
| | 03:09 | If I want to see older files, you can
see A long time ago, I can also just
| | 03:14 | click, and it's going to take me to
that list, and you'll notice a little
| | 03:18 | checkmark now next to Date modified
indicating I've made a selection, here I am
| | 03:22 | not seeing necessarily
every single file and folder.
| | 03:25 | So I can go back to that now, and
include files from Earlier this year, maybe
| | 03:30 | the ones from last week.
| | 03:31 | Maybe I want to take away the
long time ago and include today.
| | 03:36 | You can see how the list keeps
changing and changing, when we deselect
| | 03:40 | everything, we get the default back.
| | 03:42 | Now we can just click
anywhere here to see that default.
| | 03:45 | We can do it by size as well, and you
can see from the dropdown, we can do Empty
| | 03:49 | ones, Small ones, Medium or Unspecified.
| | 03:53 | Let's go to Medium files, and it looks
like we do have a couple that fall into
| | 03:56 | the 100 KB to 1 Megabyte file size.
| | 04:00 | We'll deselect that again, and
click to see the default list.
| | 04:03 | And the way it's listed here is by Details.
| | 04:06 | So if we go up to our
toolbar, we've seen this before.
| | 04:09 | We can view using just a list and in
this case we don't see any details about
| | 04:14 | the actual files, just a
little icon and the name.
| | 04:17 | We can use Small Icons, Medium or Large
Icons allow us to peek into the actual
| | 04:23 | files, to get a field for the content.
| | 04:24 | And if we go down to very bottom, and
choose Content you can see what happens,
| | 04:29 | each one on its own line, so we get
additional information such as the Authors,
| | 04:34 | Dates, Sizes etcetera.
| | 04:37 | Let's go back to the default, which is Details.
| | 04:39 | We can select Details by clicking it.
| | 04:42 | Well if you want to change the
default, and now when we go to Photos for
| | 04:45 | example, let's double-click our photos,
we are seeing actual icons here, and if
| | 04:49 | we go to our dropdown, they are Large Icons.
| | 04:53 | So how does Windows know to display
photos this way, and in my other folder a
| | 04:57 | list of files using details, also a
part of some of those customizable options,
| | 05:02 | I was talking about.
| | 05:04 | Let's start by making sure you've got
your menu bar appearing across the top,
| | 05:09 | where you have got File, Edit, View,
tools, and Help, if you don't, click the
| | 05:13 | Organize button, move down to Layout
and make sure menu bar is checked off.
| | 05:18 | Next we are going to go to View, and
here you can see the current selection,
| | 05:22 | which is Large Icons.
| | 05:24 | But we can customize down below.
| | 05:27 | Notice for example we can choose the
details, and Customize this folder.
| | 05:32 | Let's start with Customize this folder.
| | 05:34 | Notice right at the top that this
folder is optimized for Pictures, but if we
| | 05:39 | click this button, we could say make it
act like it's a full of documents, and
| | 05:43 | when we choose Document and click Apply.
I'll just move this out of the way to
| | 05:48 | see that it now looks like my other
folder, and I've got icons with names.
| | 05:54 | I have got the details that
I saw in the previous folder.
| | 05:57 | I am going to change this back to Pictures.
| | 06:01 | So if your folder contains music,
videos and so on, you can choose how
| | 06:04 | it behaves by default.
| | 06:06 | You can change these views at
anytime, but the default view is what we
| | 06:09 | were selecting here.
| | 06:10 | Let's close this up.
| | 06:12 | We'll go back up to the parent folder
03_03, and in the Details view you'll
| | 06:19 | notice, we were using these headers
across the top. How do we decide which
| | 06:23 | headers appear and which ones do not?
Well, these are the Folder Options.
| | 06:27 | So let's go up to View and choose the
Details that can or cannot be viewed.
| | 06:33 | Here is the default Name, Date
modified, Type and Size, or maybe we're not
| | 06:37 | concerned with the type, we can
deselect that checkbox, and we can see down
| | 06:42 | below, we've got all kinds of options
to choose from. Maybe the Authors is
| | 06:46 | important information, for working
with music Beats Per Minute might be
| | 06:51 | important, and as we scroll
down the list is very extensive.
| | 06:57 | For pictures Date Taken, lots of
cool options to choose from here.
| | 07:03 | When we click OK, our changes appear.
| | 07:05 | You can see now we've got Authors, if
you don't like the order, well we could
| | 07:08 | have changed it from that screen, but
you can change it from here as well.
| | 07:11 | I want Authors before Size, so I just
click-and-drag it over, simple as that.
| | 07:16 | So let's close up our Windows Explorer,
returning to the desktop, and those are
| | 07:21 | just some of the examples of how you can
customize the user interface in Windows
| | 07:26 | Explorer and choose how
your folders and files behave.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Sharing and protecting folders and files| 00:00 | If you share a computer with someone,
and you have multiple user accounts on
| | 00:04 | that computer, or even if
you're on a network for example.
| | 00:08 | How you share and protect
your files may be important.
| | 00:11 | So that's what we were
going to talk about right now.
| | 00:14 | I am going to go down to my Windows
Explorer icon, and launch that, and if you
| | 00:18 | have multiple users on your computer
you might be able to follow along with me,
| | 00:22 | otherwise you can just sit back and watch.
| | 00:24 | I am going to go to the Local Disk,
which is Drive C for me, and I am going to
| | 00:29 | double-click Users and you'll notice
there are a couple of different users here.
| | 00:34 | I'm David. Here's one for Karen, and
if I double-click Karen's folder and
| | 00:38 | double-click her Documents folder, I
can see and access her files, or maybe she
| | 00:44 | doesn't want me to have access to
this file, or even this entire folder.
| | 00:48 | So we need to talk about how you would
share or protect your files and folders.
| | 00:53 | So let's start with this one
right here, which is ECPReview2008.
| | 00:58 | You'll notice to Share With button at the top.
| | 01:00 | First we click once to select the
file, down below you could see the
| | 01:04 | status currently Shared.
| | 01:05 | That's why I was able to access it.
| | 01:08 | And if I go to Share with button, I
can choose to share this with Nobody, or
| | 01:12 | if I have Homegroups setups, something we are
going to talk about later on in this course,
| | 01:16 | I could choose whether to Read or Read/
write access to the Homegroup, or I can
| | 01:20 | choose Specific people. When you choose
Specific people, you can see the names
| | 01:25 | of those people, and you can
see the Permission Level granted.
| | 01:29 | So for example, for me, if I click my
name I have Read, Read/Write or I can
| | 01:34 | totally Remove this person, which means,
me, David, won't have access to the file.
| | 01:40 | I can also change it to read-only for
example when I click Share, it's now
| | 01:45 | shared and you can see I can even e-mail
someone links to this shared item if I wanted to.
| | 01:50 | I am going to click Done.
| | 01:52 | Now another option is to right-click
the file, when you right-click a file
| | 01:56 | you'll notice one called Properties down below.
| | 01:59 | And from here you have got several tabs.
| | 02:01 | Now the first tab shows up by default
General, where you are going to see information.
| | 02:06 | We can make this Read only
automatically by clicking the Read only checkbox.
| | 02:10 | We can even hide it by choosing Hidden.
| | 02:12 | But we are going to deselect those,
and instead go to the Security tab.
| | 02:17 | Now here we see a list of groups or
usernames, and we can select those people,
| | 02:22 | and even Edit their permissions.
| | 02:24 | So if I go down to David for example,
you can see that Full Control is granted
| | 02:29 | that means it could be modified, read, written.
| | 02:32 | So changes can be made, but clicking
the Edit button allows a person to
| | 02:36 | change those permissions.
| | 02:37 | Now you need to be the owner of this.
| | 02:39 | You need to have access to it like I do.
| | 02:42 | If I go to David now, and go over to
the Permissions for David, and deny
| | 02:47 | everything, and click Apply, notice
there is a warning message, asking if you
| | 02:53 | want to continue, it means that, if
this person is part of several groups or
| | 02:57 | whatever, they will not have access.
| | 02:59 | And I am going to confirm that, and click OK.
| | 03:01 | So I am going to OK now. I just
want you to see what happens.
| | 03:05 | I am logged in as myself.
| | 03:06 | So if I have this file selected and I
right-click, and I choose to Delete it.
| | 03:11 | Notice that there's a little shield
appearing next to Delete and Rename.
| | 03:15 | That's because these new
settings have been applied.
| | 03:18 | And if I click Delete you'll notice I
need permission to perform this action, I
| | 03:23 | could Try Again or just cancel.
| | 03:25 | The same thing would go for renaming it.
| | 03:27 | If I right-click try to rename this to
something else, I am going to type in 'dr'.
| | 03:33 | Press Return.
| | 03:34 | I need permission so I can click
Cancel and the name stays the same.
| | 03:39 | I can always go back and change that.
Right-click and go down to Properties.
| | 03:43 | Notice the two shields, and I choose
Properties now, and go back to Security,
| | 03:48 | and Edit the permissions for David by
selecting the name, and deselect each of
| | 03:54 | these checkboxes, click Apply,
those changes have been saved now.
| | 04:01 | I can click OK a couple of times.
| | 04:03 | Now if I right-click you'll notice the shields
have disappeared next to Delete and Rename.
| | 04:09 | So I am now allowed to Delete, Rename,
even open up and make changes to that file.
| | 04:14 | Now the same can be done for entire folders.
| | 04:17 | Now you can follow along with me, if
you have got the Exercise Files, we'll go
| | 04:20 | to the Desktop and double-click our
Exercise Files, and let's just right-click
| | 04:26 | the Chapter 3 folder.
| | 04:27 | This is not file. It's a folder, but the
folder too has Properties, and in here
| | 04:33 | you can see there is a Sharing tab,
and underneath you can see the Network
| | 04:36 | Path, when I click the Share button, I
can add people, if I click the dropdown
| | 04:41 | list such as Karen.
| | 04:42 | I add her first and then choose Share.
| | 04:45 | Now Karen is going to have access to
this folder on my user account, click Done.
| | 04:50 | And when I right-click again and go
down to Properties, we've also got a
| | 04:57 | Security tab and you'll see the same
options here that we saw for our individual file.
| | 05:03 | This applies to the entire folder.
| | 05:05 | So you have got that at your disposal as well.
| | 05:07 | I am going to click Close, and then I
am going to close up Windows Explorer.
| | 05:12 | So protecting your files and even
your folders from others can be done by
| | 05:16 | setting permissions.
| | 05:18 | You can also hide them. Remember when
you right-click a file or folder all of
| | 05:23 | those properties are at your
fingertips, thanks to that pop-up menu.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Simplifying organization with libraries| 00:00 | As we have been working with Windows
Explorer in this chapter you may have
| | 00:04 | noticed something new,
here in the navigation pane.
| | 00:07 | It's called Libraries.
| | 00:09 | Libraries are indeed new to Windows 7,
and they give us a quick and easy way to
| | 00:13 | organize documents that may
exist in several different locations.
| | 00:18 | So typically you'll see the
defaults here for Documents, Music, Videos
| | 00:22 | and Pictures, and those are the default
you're used to seeing in your own user folders.
| | 00:29 | But when they're in a library, the
subtle difference here is that we can add
| | 00:33 | additional locations to our library, so
we never have to go navigating for those
| | 00:38 | specific files or folders.
| | 00:39 | Let me show you what I mean.
| | 00:41 | We'll start by using our Exercise Files.
| | 00:44 | Let's go up to the Desktop or wherever
you have stored your exercise files, and
| | 00:49 | open up that folder.
| | 00:51 | Now we'll go to the Chapter 3
folder. Double-click that and we'll
| | 00:54 | double-click the 03_05 folder.
| | 00:57 | Now in here you'll notice two subfolders:
Cool Pics and Wildlife, and if we look
| | 01:02 | at either of these we've
actually got photos in there.
| | 01:05 | So I am going to go back up to my 03_05
and give it a click to navigate back
| | 01:10 | to that main folder.
| | 01:12 | And I want to this particular folder in my
Library, and I want it to be added to My Pictures.
| | 01:19 | So I don't have to go navigating here
every time I want to access these pictures.
| | 01:23 | So all I am going to do is go back up
to Chapter 3. With over 03_05 selected,
| | 01:28 | I am going to click Include in library.
| | 01:31 | Now I get to choose one of the default
locations, such as Pictures, or I go to
| | 01:36 | create a brand-new library.
| | 01:38 | I am going to choose Pictures.
| | 01:39 | Now you'll notice over here for
Pictures when I select it in the navigation
| | 01:43 | pane, I have got my own pictures,
which is empty, and you see the sample ones
| | 01:47 | that come with the installation, and
then down below I also have quick and easy
| | 01:51 | access to those two folders
that I just added to the library.
| | 01:55 | When you want to remove
something from the library,
| | 01:58 | you are not actually
removing the folders in the files.
| | 02:00 | Library simply reference or monitor the
contents of folders that are located elsewhere.
| | 02:06 | That means if I go under Libraries,
click once on the 03_05 folder and press
| | 02:11 | Delete on the keyboard, I've removed it
from the library, but it still exists in
| | 02:16 | its original location.
| | 02:17 | Let's just prove that, we'll go back
to our Exercise Files navigating a long
| | 02:22 | way, which we were able to avoid with
a library but there they are still in
| | 02:26 | their original locations.
| | 02:28 | Now this could also work with
network drives for example.
| | 02:32 | So if you have got pictures somewhere on a
Network, you can make them part of your library.
| | 02:35 | It makes it very easy to access
them, even other user accounts.
| | 02:40 | Let's say I wanted to access documents
for another who might log into this machine.
| | 02:45 | Well here's the path. I'd have to go
down to my Local Disk, and I have to
| | 02:49 | double-click Users, go find that user.
| | 02:52 | I am going to use Karen.
| | 02:53 | You can try another user if you've got one.
| | 02:56 | Then I would double-click Documents,
and look at that there is one in there.
| | 02:59 | Well I am going to go back up now to
Karen, and with Documents selected I am
| | 03:03 | going to choose Include in library.
| | 03:06 | This time in the Documents section, now
you can see here under Documents, I have
| | 03:11 | got My Documents, Public
Documents and the one I just added.
| | 03:15 | So now I've got quick and easy
access to the contents via the library.
| | 03:20 | Again, if I want to remove this I can
press Delete or right-click and choose
| | 03:25 | Remove location from library.
| | 03:27 | You're only removing the location.
| | 03:29 | You're not removing the actual
folder or any of its contents.
| | 03:34 | So libraries can save you a lot of time
in navigating those various folders that
| | 03:39 | may be located in multiple destinations.
Simply add them to your library, and
| | 03:44 | you'll quick and easy access
through the navigation pane.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Backing up by burning to CD or DVD| 00:00 |
Backing up important files is not
something that everybody does, but it's
| | 00:04 |
probably something we should all consider.
| | 00:07 |
Anything can happen, computers crash,
other kinds of disasters can happen and if
| | 00:13 |
you lose your important files that are
very crucial to a business for example,
| | 00:17 |
or perhaps their memories and photos,
| | 00:20 |
you want to have them located
somewhere else, such as a CD or a DVD.
| | 00:24 |
So we're going to talk
about burning files to a disk.
| | 00:28 |
I've already inserted a blank DVD into
my drive and you can see what happens
| | 00:32 |
here, AutoPlay opens up.
| | 00:35 |
You'll also see that this
happens to be a DVD Read/Write Drive.
| | 00:39 |
So the driver I am using allows
me to read DVDs but also burn DVDs.
| | 00:44 |
Now down below I've got some options.
| | 00:46 |
I can burn files to this disk, which is
just copying files, or it can actually
| | 00:50 |
burn a DVD video disc, which
means I can pop it into a DVD player.
| | 00:56 |
Well, I am not going to do either of these.
| | 00:58 |
So I am going to close up this window.
| | 01:00 |
Now I've got my blank DVD in the
drive and I am in Windows Explorer.
| | 01:04 |
Now, you'll notice when you're in Windows
Explorer, on the toolbar you'll see a Burn button.
| | 01:10 |
So we can select files or whole
folders, multiple folders if you will, to be
| | 01:15 |
burned or backed up to a
drive such as a DVD or a CD drive.
| | 01:19 |
I am going to select the Exercise Files
and now I am going to find Burn, here it
| | 01:24 |
is now over here on the toolbar and
when I click Burn, you're going to see the
| | 01:28 |
Disc title is going to be created for me
using the current date but you can type
| | 01:32 |
whatever you want in there.
| | 01:33 |
I am going to type 'Backup Exercise' files.
| | 01:39 |
That's about as far as I can do.
| | 01:41 |
So I might want to shorten this, 'Ex
Files'. There we go and I've got two
| | 01:46 |
options down below.
| | 01:48 |
I can burn them like files to a USB
flash drive, which means I'll be able to
| | 01:52 |
copy them off the drive.
| | 01:54 |
I'd be able to edit and delete the
files on the disc before I actually close up
| | 01:59 |
a session or if I prefer, I can choose
to Burn files in groups and individual
| | 02:05 |
files won't be able to be edited or
removed after burning, but I'll be able to
| | 02:09 |
put them into a CD or a DVD player.
| | 02:11 |
In this case, I am just backing up the files.
| | 02:14 |
I want to have them in another location just
in case something happens to my hard drive.
| | 02:18 |
So I am going to choose Like a USB flash drive.
| | 02:21 |
When I click Next, it's
going to format my blank disc.
| | 02:25 |
In this case it's a DVD.
| | 02:27 |
So you can see it's preparing to
format it on my DVD Read/Write Drive.
| | 02:31 |
Now the disc I placed in
there he is a DVD+R disk.
| | 02:37 |
It's got 4.7 gigabytes of space on it.
| | 02:40 |
It's not a read/write disc though.
| | 02:43 |
Even though it's in a read/write drive.
| | 02:45 |
If you're using a read/write disc,
whether it's a CD or a DVD, you'll be able to
| | 02:49 |
copy files over but you're also be
able to go in there and take out files.
| | 02:53 |
You would be able to
delete, add additional files.
| | 02:57 |
So you can always go back, clear space
if you needed to and continue to use that
| | 03:01 |
DVD or CD on a regular basis,
only if it's a read/write disc.
| | 03:05 |
With a read-only disc like this,
I'll be able to work with the files.
| | 03:10 |
I can move them around and delete them and
stuff, but when I close the session I am done.
| | 03:13 |
So now you can see AutoPlay shows up
again here for backing up the files.
| | 03:18 |
I can open the folder to view the files,
now there aren't anything in there.
| | 03:21 |
There is nothing to be found.
| | 03:22 |
So when I choose this, I can drag files
to this folder and add them to the disc.
| | 03:28 |
Notice at the top, that's what I am
looking at, the contents of my new disc
| | 03:32 |
called Backup Ex Files.
| | 03:34 |
Now an easier way to burn them instead of
dragging them is just to go select them.
| | 03:39 |
So I am going to go back to Desktop,
click Exercise Files and if that's all I
| | 03:43 |
want, I don't have to select anything
else but I could if I wanted to, for
| | 03:47 |
example, if I wanted to hold down my
Ctrl key and also copy this file here, you
| | 03:52 |
can see they are both selected and when I
click Burn, it's actually going to start
| | 03:58 |
copying them to my drive.
| | 04:01 |
So there is the Exercise Files.
| | 04:03 |
You can see the number of items in total
and the amount of space that's going to
| | 04:06 |
be used up for this, and eventually I
am going to see my Exercise Files and my
| | 04:11 |
Excel file copied to my DVD.
| | 04:14 |
Now I haven't closed the session, I
haven't ejected the disc at this point.
| | 04:18 |
So if I want to manipulate these,
maybe I don't want that, I can select it,
| | 04:22 |
press Delete on the Keyboard and
confirm by clicking Yes, that I want to
| | 04:26 |
remove it from the disc.
| | 04:28 |
I can go inside the Exercise Files.
| | 04:30 |
There is the various chapters.
| | 04:32 |
We go to Chapter 03 for example.
| | 04:34 |
I could delete an entire folder if I
didn't want it included, go to 03_01 press
| | 04:40 |
Delete and confirm that.
| | 04:41 |
So you can see, we can manipulate these
before we actually eject the disc, so we
| | 04:47 |
can get exactly what we need on
the disc before we close it up.
| | 04:51 |
Now at the top you'll notice Eject,
this will close the session as well.
| | 04:56 |
It closes the current session and then I
can take it to another computer and copy
| | 05:00 |
those files if I needed to or just
store it away until that event happens where
| | 05:04 |
I need to go back and get these files.
| | 05:07 |
When I click Eject though you're
going to see it's actually going to close
| | 05:10 |
the session, Please wait while the
session is closed, so the disc can be used
| | 05:14 |
on other computers.
| | 05:15 |
So it's going to be busy closing it up
and then eventually it's going to eject
| | 05:19 |
the disk from my drive and I can
take it to another computer.
| | 05:22 |
So burning your files using the Burn
button on the toolbar is a very simple process.
| | 05:28 |
It's choosing the right disk
and having the right drive.
| | 05:32 |
If you don't have a read/write drive
you won't be able to use it to burn files.
| | 05:35 |
If you do have a read/write drive and
it's a DVD you'll be able to use CDs and
| | 05:40 |
DVDs in there, and if you've got
discs that also have the RW on the end -
| | 05:45 |
standing for Read/Write - then you're
going to be able to take that disk and
| | 05:49 |
bring it back and forth and remove files,
create space, edit those files, copy
| | 05:54 |
them and so on.
| | 05:56 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
4. Music, Photos, and VideoWindows Media Center| 00:00 |
With Windows 7 you have a built-in
entertainment hub known as the Media Center.
| | 00:05 |
By using the Media Center, you can
gain quick and easy access to all of your
| | 00:09 |
movies, your music, photos,
Internet, TV and lots more.
| | 00:14 |
So let's take a look at it now.
| | 00:16 |
You can access the Media
Center from the Windows Orb.
| | 00:18 |
I am just going to type in 'media'.
| | 00:21 |
You can do the same in the Search field,
and at the top you'll see there are a
| | 00:24 |
couple of programs with the word media,
one of them being the Windows Media
| | 00:28 |
Center, so we'll select that.
| | 00:30 |
If this is your very first time, there
will be a setup that needs to be run.
| | 00:35 |
After that, you'll simply see the
default screen based on the setup you chose.
| | 00:40 |
If you ever need to run the setup again,
right from your Media Center, move down
| | 00:45 |
to the bottom of the screen near the
left-hand side when that little arrow
| | 00:48 |
appears, scroll all the way down to task.
| | 00:50 |
You'll find Settings and give that a click.
| | 00:53 |
Select General and then move
down to Windows Media Center Setup.
| | 01:00 |
It's from here where you
can run the setup again.
| | 01:04 |
You need to confirm that you want to
continue and this is what you'll see the
| | 01:07 |
very first time you try
to access the Media Center.
| | 01:10 |
We can move through these
various icons, Everything in One Place.
| | 01:14 |
That's the main advantage
to using the Media Center.
| | 01:18 |
You can also plug-in your TV to your
computer and within Windows Media Center
| | 01:23 |
Remote you'll be able to display movies,
recorded TV, all your pictures and so
| | 01:28 |
on, right from your computer to your TV screen.
| | 01:33 |
So we'll just click Continue
to continue with our setup.
| | 01:35 |
There is a couple of options here.
| | 01:36 |
You can learn some more.
| | 01:37 |
So you get to learn a little bit about
the Media Center before you run the setup,
| | 01:42 |
or you can go to the Express, which
is very quick, and we'll accept all the
| | 01:45 |
defaults or if you need to
customize you can do that too.
| | 01:49 |
Now, typically people will run the
Express Setup and if they need to come
| | 01:53 |
back here, like I just did, they can go
into custom and change a few of those options.
| | 01:58 |
So let's click Express.
| | 02:00 |
It =just takes a moment and we
are into our Media Center.
| | 02:02 |
Now, we've got this little window, we
can move around, we can resize it and you
| | 02:07 |
can see we've got Extras at the top.
| | 02:09 |
You can click Extras and you can
see there is an extras library for
| | 02:12 |
Internet, TV, News.
| | 02:14 |
You'll need an Internet
connection obviously, for this stuff.
| | 02:17 |
So we move down to the bottom left-hand
side and see that arrow, we can go down
| | 02:21 |
to Pictures and Video.
| | 02:23 |
Some of these categories have
subcategories like playing favorites in the
| | 02:26 |
Picture Library or accessing a Video library.
| | 02:30 |
Then we have Music, the
music library and Movies.
| | 02:33 |
Let's go to Music for a moment.
| | 02:36 |
Most people have music on their
computer, so to access your music library you
| | 02:40 |
would click the music library icon.
| | 02:42 |
Now this is a very fresh installation
of Windows 7, so I don't really have any
| | 02:46 |
other music except for the three songs
that come with the Windows installation.
| | 02:51 |
How do I add stuff?
| | 02:52 |
Well, I could just simply add songs to
my Music folder and they will appear here
| | 02:56 |
or I can go and access other folders
right from here and say, I want them
| | 03:01 |
showing up in my Media
Center. So let's do that.
| | 03:04 |
Again, we're going to need to go to our Settings.
| | 03:06 |
So inside the Library here, let's just
click the Windows Orb to take us back
| | 03:11 |
to the very homepage and let's scroll
all the way down to the bottom till we
| | 03:16 |
see Tasks and Settings.
| | 03:17 |
We'll choose Settings, and go to Media
Libraries this time, where we can make
| | 03:23 |
changes to our Music, Pictures, Video,
Recorded TV and our Movies library.
| | 03:27 |
So we're going to go to Music,
once that selected click Next.
| | 03:31 |
We want to add folders.
| | 03:33 |
We could also remove folders from here.
| | 03:35 |
We need to add, so we'll select
that radio button before clicking Next.
| | 03:39 |
And the folder might be on this computer,
| | 03:41 |
another computer, or you can manually
add a shared folder on any computer
| | 03:46 |
that you are sharing.
| | 03:47 |
So here we're going to select
one of our Exercise Files folders.
| | 03:51 |
So it's on this computer.
| | 03:53 |
You can choose your own folder if you
don't have the Exercise Files. When we
| | 03:56 |
click Next, it's just a matter of finding
them, well we know our Exercise Files
| | 04:00 |
are on the desktop.
| | 04:01 |
You may have yours in another location.
| | 04:03 |
It's just a matter of finding them.
| | 04:04 |
We'll expand the Desktop. There is
Exercise Files, select it and in the
| | 04:09 |
Chapter 04 folder, which we can
expand, there are couple of sub-folders
| | 04:12 |
including the 04_01 folder.
| | 04:16 |
We'll expand that and there is a
folder there with Music and one with Video.
| | 04:20 |
Well, we only want the Music one so
we'll click the check box to the left of
| | 04:23 |
Music and then click Next.
| | 04:25 |
You can see the entire path
shows up across the bottom.
| | 04:29 |
When you choose Next you can see the
number of files, Confirm Changes is next,
| | 04:34 |
do we want to use these locations
or do we want to make more changes?
| | 04:38 |
If we're done we'll choose Yes,
use these locations and click Finish.
| | 04:42 |
Now we can go back Home, clicking
the Orb inside the Media Center.
| | 04:47 |
Click Music and go to our music
library and you'll see we've got some extra
| | 04:53 |
stuff in here, such as an Unknown Album.
| | 04:56 |
Notice that we've also got ways to view
the contents here by artists, by songs,
| | 05:03 |
lot's of cool things to do
with our built-in Media Center.
| | 05:08 |
If we go up to shared, if you're sharing,
let me take a moment to see any shared
| | 05:14 |
folders you're connected to as well.
| | 05:17 |
So this includes shared libraries and
music can be shared amongst folders on
| | 05:22 |
any computer even on a network, and
then in this case I've not done any of that
| | 05:26 |
yet so this is the message that you'll see
and here is where we go to play our music.
| | 05:30 |
Here is where we go to use any of the
controls you might see on a remote control.
| | 05:35 |
Keep in mind there is a Media Center
remote control you can purchase, so you can
| | 05:38 |
use it if hooked up to your TV.
| | 05:41 |
Click the Back button.
| | 05:42 |
It will take you back.
| | 05:43 |
Let's go back to the music library
and we'll go back here to our albums, go
| | 05:51 |
to the Unknown Album.
| | 05:52 |
Here is where we are going to find
those files we just added to our library.
| | 05:57 |
I am going to go to the LDC_open
and here I can play the song
| | 06:01 |
from here or click the Play button down below.
| | 06:04 |
It's really up to you.
| | 06:11 |
And we'll Pause that, and let's go
back to the homepage for our Media Center.
| | 06:16 |
Let's try the same thing now but with
videos, so we go to Pictures and Videos.
| | 06:20 |
There is a picture Library.
| | 06:21 |
We want the video library and you're
going to see sample videos. If you wanted to
| | 06:26 |
add the videos from the
Exercise Files, you know what to do.
| | 06:29 |
You want to cancel this, first of all,
go back to the homepage and go back down
| | 06:35 |
to your settings where you can go to
your Libraries>Media Libraries and this
| | 06:44 |
time you would be going to Videos and
navigating to the Exercise Files folder
| | 06:48 |
where you have those videos,
they get added to your library.
| | 06:51 |
So with the Media Center, you have one
convenient location for all kinds of things.
| | 06:56 |
I am going to click Cancel here.
| | 06:58 |
Let's move back and let's try TV for example.
| | 07:04 |
Here is where you got recorded TV,
your hard drive can be used like a
| | 07:07 |
personal video recorder.
| | 07:10 |
Under Sports you can connect to the
Internet to get the latest, lots of
| | 07:14 |
information to choose from.
| | 07:16 |
When you are done, close it up by
clicking the Close button and that is the
| | 07:20 |
Windows Media Center.
| | 07:22 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Playing media files with Windows Media Player| 00:00 | Another option for playing media files,
such as music and video, is to use the
| | 00:05 | Windows Media Player.
| | 00:07 | It comes with Windows 7, and there is a
couple of different ways to access this program.
| | 00:12 | For example, on the taskbar, the very
bottom of your screen, by default, the
| | 00:17 | Windows Media Player
icon appears on the taskbar.
| | 00:20 | So, if you've left it there, all
you need to do is click once to access
| | 00:24 | Windows Media Player.
| | 00:26 | You will see that up in the title bar
and the current view is what we would
| | 00:30 | call our Library view.
| | 00:32 | So here we are automatically
going to our Music Library.
| | 00:35 | We will see the sample files that come with
Windows 7 as well as any we might have added.
| | 00:40 | But here is another way to find and play files.
| | 00:44 | Let's close this up, and if you've got
the Exercise Files, you'll notice I've
| | 00:47 | opened up to Chap04>subfolder 04_02, where
I have got a music file and a video file.
| | 00:55 | Now, when I click FinalSong, the
music file, you'll notice the Play button
| | 00:59 | displays the same icon I see down below
on my taskbar for Windows Media Player.
| | 01:04 | That means if I click the Play button,
I'll be playing that song in the default
| | 01:09 | program or Windows Media Player.
| | 01:16 | I can change the volume.
| | 01:17 | I can pause by clicking the Pause button.
| | 01:25 | Click Play again to play or simply Stop.
| | 01:28 | You'll also notice this little
icon up here in the top right corner.
| | 01:32 | This will switch me back to that
Library view, where I can go access other
| | 01:36 | songs, or if I want to go back to the
song I am playing, down the bottom right
| | 01:40 | corner of this view, I can
switch to the Now Playing view.
| | 01:45 | So I can play again or
simply close it up when I am done.
| | 01:51 | The Media Player also plays video files.
| | 01:55 | So if I go to my santa
barbara pier, which is a video clip.
| | 01:59 | Notice, down below, it does say it's a video clip.
| | 02:03 | You can see the size, the name, and the
little icon representing Media Player again.
| | 02:07 | Of course, I can choose
other programs to play this with.
| | 02:10 | Clicking Play will launch Media
Player but clicking the dropdown for more
| | 02:13 | options allows me to choose from
other things that might be installed like
| | 02:17 | the QuickTime Player.
| | 02:18 | You may or may not have this installed.
| | 02:20 | You do have Live Movie Maker if you've got
Live Essentials installed. Look at this.
| | 02:25 | The Media Center is accessible from
here or you can change the default program.
| | 02:29 | It is currently set to be the Media
Player, but if I click Choose Default
| | 02:33 | Program, I might want the Media Center
to be the default when I double-click or
| | 02:38 | launch a video file like
the one I have selected.
| | 02:42 | I am going to click cancel.
| | 02:43 | Media Player is fine, so
I'm going to click Play.
| | 02:45 | You can see my video file starts playing.
| | 02:49 | I have got my controls down below.
| | 02:52 | Maybe I want this one to repeat.
| | 02:54 | So I can turn it on or off with the Repeat On.
| | 02:58 | When it gets to the end, it
just starts over and keeps playing.
| | 03:01 | If you have got more than one video
file or more than one music file you can
| | 03:05 | use the Shuffle button. Here's my volume.
| | 03:13 | Keep that all the way down.
| | 03:15 | If you want view this in full
screen, there is a full screen button.
| | 03:18 | Now, on the bottom right-hand corner,
as you move, it appears to exit Full
| | 03:25 | screen mode and we're back to the original size.
| | 03:27 | Notice it's looping around back
to the beginning and starting over.
| | 03:32 | Again, I can go back to the Library
view or simply close this up when I'm done.
| | 03:38 | Let's close-up our Windows
Explorer as well to return to the Desktop.
| | 03:42 | So the Media Player, keep it in mind,
for playing all kinds of music files
| | 03:45 | like MP3s and WMA files.
| | 03:49 | You can also use it for playing different
types of video files like AVIs and MPEGs.
| | 03:54 | The Windows Media Player built
into Windows 7, at your fingertips.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Organizing and sharing photos in Windows Explorer| 00:00 | Since the advent of the digital camera,
the computer has played a major role in
| | 00:03 | how we organize our photos, and share them
with others, and even make changes to them.
| | 00:08 | So in this lesson we are going to
use Windows Explorer to help us stay
| | 00:11 | organized, and share our photos with others.
| | 00:14 | We'll look at a couple of
different ways to do that.
| | 00:16 | I've already opened up the 04_03
folder under Chap04 of the Exercise Files.
| | 00:21 | So if you've got those files, you can
go ahead and open them up, if you'd like
| | 00:24 | to follow along with me.
Otherwise, just use your own pictures.
| | 00:28 | The very first thing that I like to do
when I download photos maybe from a
| | 00:33 | camera, for example, is to add
them to my Pictures library.
| | 00:36 | Right now, if I go over to Pictures in
the Navigation Pane you can see, I've got
| | 00:40 | nothing under My Pictures.
| | 00:42 | I've got those Sample Pictures that
come with the Windows 7 installation, but
| | 00:47 | wouldn't it be nice if I can access
that folder we just looked at here from my
| | 00:51 | Pictures library as well.
| | 00:52 | So we're going to go back, click the
Back button up here at the top left, and
| | 00:56 | here is the folder, the 04_03 folder,
that we want to include in the library.
| | 01:00 | So we click the Include in
library button and choose Pictures.
| | 01:04 | Now all we have to do is go to one
location Pictures to see all of our images
| | 01:09 | including the free samples, and the
newly added folder, there it is right there.
| | 01:14 | Now, staying organized means
rearranging how we view our images as well, and we
| | 01:19 | can use a couple of different
systems for organizing those photos.
| | 01:23 | Let's start by going to the top right
where we see by default, everything we're
| | 01:27 | looking at is Arrange By Folder, but
we can change that, and click the Folder
| | 01:31 | button, and choose Month.
| | 01:33 | Now you're going to see all of the
images in the Pictures library not just the
| | 01:37 | folder we added, but the sample
pictures as well, and you can see they're all
| | 01:40 | arranged here by the actual month.
| | 01:43 | So, for example, if I go to February
2008 and I select it, you'll see some
| | 01:48 | information down below.
| | 01:49 | There is 5 in that particular section,
and I'll double-click now to see them.
| | 01:54 | You'll actually see more
specific dates in February.
| | 01:59 | We can use the Back button to go back,
or if you prefer just simply click
| | 02:03 | Pictures in the Pictures library.
| | 02:06 | Let's use another option here.
| | 02:07 | We'll click where it says
Month, and choose Rating.
| | 02:11 | One thing you can do in Windows
Explorer is rate your photos, give them a
| | 02:15 | star rating, and here you can see each of
our sample pics actually uses a star rating.
| | 02:20 | As we scroll a little further down,
there are a number of Unspecified images.
| | 02:23 | Guess what? They're the ones we just added.
| | 02:26 | So how do we add a rating, so we
can group them by their ratings?
| | 02:30 | For example, if all of our
favorites have a five star rating.
| | 02:33 | How do we apply the five stars?
| | 02:35 | Well, first we need to select the
images we want to apply the rating to.
| | 02:38 | If it's a single image we just click
once, we'll choose this SepiaSurf one, and
| | 02:43 | down below we see
information in Windows Explorer.
| | 02:45 | The rating over here has up to five stars
and none of them appear to be highlighted.
| | 02:50 | So if we go to the fifth star, just
hover it and you can see they all turn
| | 02:53 | yellow, click once that applies the rating.
| | 02:56 | We need to save that, click the Save
button, and it moves from the Unspecified
| | 03:01 | group up to our 5 Stars section.
| | 03:04 | Now we can do that to multiple images as well.
| | 03:08 | Let's say there is a few in here like,
we'll click the first one which is called
| | 03:11 | CaliforniaCool, hold down your Shift
key go all the way over to the Giraffe,
| | 03:15 | everything gets selected in between.
| | 03:18 | To select individuals we hold down
Ctrl like the Otters and let's select the
| | 03:23 | Underpass here, there we go.
| | 03:26 | With those selected we can do the
exact same thing, move down below.
| | 03:30 | These are five-star ratings.
| | 03:31 | We click the fifth star and click Save.
| | 03:34 | It may take a moment for each of
those to move up into the 5 Stars section,
| | 03:38 | when we scroll up we'll see that
they've been added, and removed from the
| | 03:42 | Unspecified section.
| | 03:43 | Let's say the rest of these are three stars.
| | 03:45 | So I'll click the first one, hold down
Shift, click the last one to select them
| | 03:48 | all, and choose the third Star and click Save.
| | 03:52 | Now we're not going to have any
of that are actually unspecified.
| | 03:55 | Once they're all moved
into the appropriate section.
| | 03:58 | You can see at the bottom 3
Stars is our lowest rating.
| | 04:02 | So just another way to help you stay organized.
| | 04:04 | Another option is to use tags.
| | 04:07 | Let's just select one of our animals.
| | 04:09 | I'm going to select the Giraffe.
| | 04:10 | Down below you can see Tags.
| | 04:13 | I've got an Add a tag right here, when
I hover over Add a tag there is a little
| | 04:16 | field, I can click inside there.
| | 04:18 | And all I have to do is type in the tag.
| | 04:20 | I'm going to type in Animal, and when I
click Save it's been tagged as an Animal image.
| | 04:26 | I can use tags to organize my images.
| | 04:29 | So let's select some other animal
images. Use Ctrl on your keyboard. Hold that
| | 04:34 | down as you select some of the other animals.
| | 04:37 | Now they could be from different groups.
| | 04:39 | I am going to go to my Penguin here.
| | 04:41 | We've already got the Giraffe.
| | 04:43 | I've selected the otter.
| | 04:44 | Same thing go down to Add a tag,
click once inside and type Animal.
| | 04:49 | Notice that it's already there as an
option because we've created it,
| | 04:52 | so we can click the checkbox, and click
Save, it just saves us a little bit of time.
| | 04:57 | Now we can arrange these by their tags.
| | 04:59 | So if go here and select Tag, we're
going to see Unspecified and Animal images.
| | 05:05 | So double-clicking Animal opens up
all of our images that are tagged as
| | 05:10 | Animals, simple as that.
| | 05:13 | Now what about sharing our images?
| | 05:14 | Let's go back to Pictures to see them
all, and change the way we view them.
| | 05:17 | Let's go back to Folder.
| | 05:20 | Let's say we want to share some of our own
photos down below here with other people.
| | 05:25 | Well, you'll notice right at the
top there is a Share with option here.
| | 05:29 | Let's select one image, CaliforniaCool.
| | 05:32 | If we go up to Share with, you'll
notice that the options are Nobody, or if
| | 05:37 | we've created a Homegroup which is a
network, and we will be talking about
| | 05:41 | creating homegroups later on in his title,
| | 05:44 | we can choose an actual Homegroup and
give permissions to Read or view them, or
| | 05:48 | even make changes to them with Read/Write,
or we can choose Specific people, and
| | 05:53 | then in this case it's going to
be people who have user accounts.
| | 05:56 | And you can see I've got the option
also to create a new user at the bottom or
| | 06:00 | just choose Everyone.
| | 06:01 | I'm going to choose the other user,
Karen, click Add and click Share.
| | 06:06 | So now when Karen logs in, she is going
to be able to view my single photo here.
| | 06:11 | You can also e-mail her a
notification that this just happened.
| | 06:15 | I'm going to click Done.
| | 06:17 | That is another option that is to e-mail images.
| | 06:20 | Let's go to SepiaSurf for example.
| | 06:23 | You'll notice up at the top on the toolbar
here, we've got File, Edit, View and tools.
| | 06:30 | If we go to File and scroll down we've
got Share with here, so these are the
| | 06:34 | same Share with options we saw
using the button on the toolbar.
| | 06:38 | But a little further down
we've also that Send to.
| | 06:40 | So we can send it to a folder to our Desktop.
| | 06:43 | There is a Fax recipient, if you've got
your computer hooked up to be used as a
| | 06:47 | fax, and there is a Mail recipient as well.
| | 06:49 | Select Mail recipient, your default
e-mail application will launch, the image,
| | 06:54 | or images will automatically be
attached and you just have to send out the
| | 06:57 | e-mail, simple as that.
| | 06:59 | I am not going to do that right now.
| | 07:01 | I'll just deselect.
| | 07:03 | So with Windows Explorer you have a
number of different options for keeping your
| | 07:06 | photos organized, and for
sharing them with others.
| | 07:09 | There is another feature known as the
Windows Live Photo Gallery that gives you
| | 07:15 | many, many more options for
staying organized and sharing.
| | 07:18 | We'll be talking about that
much later on in this title.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Taking screenshots with the Snipping tool| 00:00 |
On the occasion where you need to
take a snapshot picture of your computer
| | 00:04 |
screen, whether it be to send to someone
else or to save it as an image for example,
| | 00:09 |
there is a built-in tool here in
Windows 7 that will allow you to do just that.
| | 00:12 |
It's called the Snipping tool.
| | 00:14 |
We're going to explore it right now.
| | 00:16 |
I'm going to use this file that you
see here in the 04_04 subfolder of the
| | 00:20 |
Chap04 folder of my Exercise Files,
but you can use any file you like.
| | 00:25 |
Let's say we want to share this with a
Homegroup, and we've never done this before.
| | 00:29 |
Well, we would select the file, and
then we go up to Share with and we would
| | 00:33 |
choose Homegroup, and want
it to be a read-only file.
| | 00:36 |
So we'll choose Homegroup (Read).
| | 00:37 |
Now if you've never setup a homegroup,
this is the message that you're going to see.
| | 00:42 |
This is the window that opens up.
| | 00:44 |
Well, I'm not sure what to do at this point.
| | 00:47 |
So here is a typical
scenario for the Snipping tool.
| | 00:49 |
I call up tech support and
say I don't know what to do.
| | 00:52 |
Here is the screen that's
popping up in front of me.
| | 00:56 |
They might ask me to describe it, but a
better option might be to take a picture
| | 00:59 |
of it, and just send it off to them.
| | 01:00 |
So we're going to do that
now with our Snipping tool.
| | 01:03 |
We go down to the Windows Orb, and
instead of navigating through All Programs,
| | 01:08 |
Accessories, etcetera,
| | 01:09 |
I like the type in the word snip, and
you can see right at the top under Programs,
| | 01:14 |
there's my Snipping tool.
| | 01:16 |
So I'm going to click that
to launch the Snipping tool.
| | 01:19 |
I'm ready to start capturing parts
of my screen, but before we do that, in
| | 01:24 |
the Snipping tool window you'll
notice the New button is depressed, I am
| | 01:27 |
ready to create a new snip.
| | 01:29 |
I can cancel this whole
operation, and change our Options.
| | 01:32 |
Let's go to Options first, so you
know exactly what's about to happen.
| | 01:36 |
This instruction text is going to
disappear, hide the instruction text, if I
| | 01:41 |
click this checkbox right now.
| | 01:43 |
So I'm not seeing the
instruction text in my capture.
| | 01:46 |
Now that doesn't include the entire window.
| | 01:48 |
It disappears temporarily
while we capture a screen
| | 01:51 |
anyway, but we'll also
include the instruction text.
| | 01:54 |
Always copy snips text to the Clipboard.
| | 01:56 |
That's going to happen when we select
an area of our screen. It will be copied
| | 02:00 |
to our memory in computer, so we can
paste it in other applications, or an
| | 02:05 |
e-mail for example.
| | 02:06 |
That's a good one to leave on.
| | 02:07 |
If we are capturing parts of a webpage, we
are going to include the URL below the snip.
| | 02:13 |
That's a nice feature.
| | 02:14 |
People know exactly where
we got the picture from.
| | 02:17 |
It prompts us to save snips, if we try to
exit without saving, we'll be prompted,
| | 02:21 |
if you like that leave it turned on, and Show
screen overlay when Snipping tool is active.
| | 02:27 |
You'll see that in a
moment what that looks like.
| | 02:29 |
You can also change the Ink color when
you're actually highlighting an area of
| | 02:34 |
your snipped screen, and you can
change the color, and let's go to Red.
| | 02:38 |
You might have red if you've ever used this
before, but you can choose any color you like.
| | 02:42 |
You can even show that selection after
the snips are captured, or you can choose
| | 02:47 |
to leave this unchecked in the area
that you selected that ink will disappear.
| | 02:52 |
So I am going to do that and click OK.
| | 02:55 |
Now I've got my Options set,
I'm ready to create a new snip.
| | 02:59 |
There is different types of snips though.
| | 03:00 |
We can click the dropdown to see them.
| | 03:02 |
A Free-form Snip, when you select it,
changes your mouse pointer into scissors.
| | 03:06 |
So you can actually select a
free-form shape if you wanted to.
| | 03:11 |
I'm not going to do that one.
| | 03:12 |
For this particular example, a
Rectangular Snip might be better.
| | 03:16 |
It will draw a box around the
area we want to take a picture off.
| | 03:20 |
You can include a whole
Window, or the entire screen.
| | 03:23 |
Let's go do Rectangular Snip.
| | 03:25 |
Notice my mouse pointer changes to crosshairs,
and this is the area here that I want to include.
| | 03:31 |
So I'm going to start in the top
left corner just above this little icon
| | 03:35 |
representing Homegroups.
| | 03:37 |
When I click and start
dragging, notice the color.
| | 03:40 |
It's red and my little window
disappeared and when I let go, there it is.
| | 03:46 |
There is my capture.
| | 03:48 |
It appears in the Snipping tool window,
and this is exactly what I'm about to
| | 03:53 |
save or send off to somebody else.
| | 03:55 |
Here are my options on the toolbar to
create another New Snip, to save this one
| | 04:00 |
and I can choose the location.
| | 04:02 |
It's already been copied to the
clipboard automatically, so Copy doesn't matter
| | 04:05 |
at this instance, but look at
this, I've got Send Snip as well.
| | 04:10 |
I can click the dropdown to
send it to an E-mail Recipient.
| | 04:13 |
The image will appear in the e-mail, or
if I prefer that image to be attached to
| | 04:18 |
the e-mail, I can choose this second option.
| | 04:20 |
If you were to do that, your default
mail application will launch and the image
| | 04:25 |
that you see in front of you right
now will be attached to that e-mail.
| | 04:29 |
We're not going to do that.
| | 04:30 |
Notice we'll also have a Pen, so if we
want to highlight a specific area we can
| | 04:36 |
use the Pen tool, and we can choose a color.
| | 04:38 |
I'm going to choose Red, and maybe the
part that's confusing me is right here.
| | 04:44 |
So I'm going to just click-and-drag
around it, and that becomes part of my
| | 04:48 |
image that I've saved.
| | 04:49 |
We also have a Highlighter, so if we
want to highlight that as well maybe, just
| | 04:54 |
like you would using a
Highlighter, click-and-drag over the text.
| | 04:58 |
And you can erase any of those things that
you've added to the screen using the Eraser.
| | 05:02 |
I've got a little spot up here maybe
I don't want that, so I click-and-drag
| | 05:06 |
over it and it's gone.
| | 05:08 |
So if I try to close this right now, we know
it's automatically going to ask me to save it.
| | 05:11 |
I'm going to click Save and down
below it's going to be called Capture by
| | 05:16 |
default, and I'm going say that this is a
HomeGroup Pic, and I can choose the type.
| | 05:24 |
Notice the different file types
or graphic types I can save to.
| | 05:28 |
PNG set by default.
| | 05:30 |
I'm going to save this a GIF.
| | 05:31 |
That's a nice small file.
| | 05:33 |
I'm going to be sending it by e-mail.
| | 05:34 |
JPEG's a little bit bigger, but better
detail, and it could be saved as an HTML
| | 05:39 |
files, so a natural web graphic.
| | 05:41 |
I'm going to choose JPEG.
| | 05:42 |
Now I'm going to choose the location
right here in Pictures in my Pictures library.
| | 05:48 |
When I click Save, I've now got that that image.
| | 05:51 |
So many options for taking a screen
capture, and then saving or sending it off
| | 05:56 |
to other people, all
thanks to the Snipping tool.
| | 06:01 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
5. Other Windows AccessoriesTaking notes with sticky notes, Notepad, and WordPad| 00:00 | Windows 7 comes with a number of
accessories to help you work with text.
| | 00:05 | Text that might be as simple as a Sticky
Note or more complex text that might be
| | 00:10 | equivalent to some word processing applications.
| | 00:13 | We are going to start with that Sticky Note.
| | 00:15 | Let's say we just want to post a
little reminder up on our screen.
| | 00:18 | The Sticky Note accessory is ideal for this.
| | 00:20 | We go down to the Windows Orb.
| | 00:22 | You'll find it under Accessories.
| | 00:24 | So we can go to All Programs here
and we click Accessories and we'll find
| | 00:28 | Sticky Notes there.
| | 00:29 | Now this is something
you use on a regular basis.
| | 00:32 | You might want to pin it to the Taskbar perhaps.
| | 00:34 | So I am going click-and-drag mine down
to the Taskbar when I see Pin to Taskbar
| | 00:39 | appear I can let go.
| | 00:40 | And now I have quick and
easy access to it from here.
| | 00:42 | One click will close up our Start menu.
| | 00:45 | One more click now on the Sticky Note
icon will open up our first Sticky Note
| | 00:49 | and we're ready to start typing.
| | 00:51 | Well, today it just so happens to be
my mother's birthday, so I need a little
| | 00:54 | reminder here to "Call Mom re: happy birthday."
| | 01:01 | There we go.
| | 01:02 | There is a couple of little buttons here
at the top, one for adding another new note.
| | 01:06 | Notice the keyboard shortcut
Ctrl+N for another new note.
| | 01:09 | That's while we are inside the note
and when we are done with this note, the
| | 01:13 | equivalent to peeling it off the screen,
crumpling in up and throwing it in the
| | 01:17 | trash bin would be to click this little Close
button, Ctrl+D as in delete, on the keyboard.
| | 01:24 | When we click the Desktop, those disappear.
| | 01:26 | So Ctrl+N and Ctrl+D won't work now
unless we go back into the note and try to
| | 01:31 | make a change or if we click the Desktop,
we can move right up to the very top
| | 01:35 | to see those buttons again.
| | 01:37 | But we'll just leave it there for now.
| | 01:39 | That's a Sticky Note.
| | 01:39 | Now if you need to type in some actual
text and you're not too concerned about
| | 01:44 | formatting, you just want to get some
sample text, some very simple looking
| | 01:48 | text, the Notepad accessory is ideal for that.
| | 01:51 | We will click the Windows Orb.
| | 01:51 | Instead of going through All Programs>Accessories,
let's just type in notepad.
| | 01:57 | You will notice, it's one of the
programs and it's the only program under the
| | 02:02 | Programs section here.
| | 02:04 | When we click it, we launch Notepad.
| | 02:07 | And this is the same Notepad you might be
used to in previous versions of Windows.
| | 02:11 | Here we have got a menu bar performing
File, Commands, Edit, Format, View and
| | 02:16 | even some Help over here.
| | 02:18 | Flashing cursors sitting there,
waiting for us to start typing.
| | 02:21 | We can resize this window.
| | 02:24 | Let's just type in the beginnings
of our recipe for a Veggie Stir Fry.
| | 02:28 | Now what you're going to
see here is the default font.
| | 02:31 | This is the font you used last.
| | 02:33 | For me, I've got this wild-looking Goudy font.
| | 02:38 | You will probably seen something
a little more tame. All right.
| | 02:41 | Press Return, I am still working in that
font and that's probably too much for this.
| | 02:45 | So let's go up to Format and you
will notice you can change the font.
| | 02:49 | You don't select text in Notepad.
| | 02:51 | It's going to affect the entire document.
| | 02:53 | So let's just scroll through the list of
fonts here and find something quite simple.
| | 02:57 | I am going to go up near the
top and where I find Arial.
| | 03:00 | Now we have got some styles for Arial,
for example, if we want it to be bold,
| | 03:05 | maybe narrow and bold, you
will see a sample down below.
| | 03:08 | We will change the size, I am
going to go up to 12 and click OK.
| | 03:12 | So you can choose whatever you like
there and you will see the changes take
| | 03:15 | place, even though we
haven't selected that text.
| | 03:17 | Okay, then we continue typing and if
we want to save this, we will go to the
| | 03:25 | File menu, notice we've got Save, which
will just simply save it with the current
| | 03:29 | name but if it doesn't have a name, and
this one does not yet, it's says Untitled
| | 03:33 | at the top, Save As is
what it's going to show up.
| | 03:37 | So we can choose Save or Save As either way.
| | 03:39 | We are going to be saving it by
default to our Documents and that's fine.
| | 03:43 | Down below you will notice the
extension is going to be a txt extension.
| | 03:47 | It's the only option. It's a text file.
| | 03:50 | So let's just type in 'VeggieStirfry'
and when you click Save that name now
| | 03:58 | appears on the title bar.
| | 04:00 | We can make some other
simple changes to this document.
| | 04:03 | Click File and go down to Page Setup.
| | 04:05 | You can see the default is Letter size
but we can choose other sizes like Legal,
| | 04:10 | if we need a little more length.
| | 04:12 | The source of your printer where
it's coming from the Default tray.
| | 04:16 | You can see the
Orientation can be selected as well.
| | 04:19 | The Margins can be adjusted.
| | 04:21 | Maybe I want 2 inches at the
top, so I will change that.
| | 04:24 | When I tab over to the Bottom one,
you will notice the change here in the
| | 04:27 | Preview does show up.
| | 04:29 | We can also have information that's
going to appear at the top and bottom
| | 04:32 | of every single page.
| | 04:34 | Right now under Footer, you will notice the
word Page and then the code for the page number.
| | 04:40 | So we're going to see information.
| | 04:41 | You can type whatever you like.
| | 04:43 | If you want to change that from the
word Page you can take that out and put
| | 04:48 | dashes on either side of
the page code and click OK.
| | 04:53 | Now if we go up to File as if we are
going to print this, notice print has the
| | 04:58 | ellipsis after it, Ctrl+P, the shortcut.
| | 05:00 | This is going to open up a dialog box.
| | 05:02 | We can send it to our printer.
| | 05:04 | We can send it to OneNote if you
have got that installed, other options.
| | 05:08 | But if we want to preview this, notice as
we scroll through this, there is really
| | 05:12 | no option to preview it.
| | 05:13 | That's the disadvantage to
using something like Notepad.
| | 05:17 | So I will click Cancel.
| | 05:18 | We've already saved it, so close that up.
| | 05:21 | And we are not asked to save anything.
| | 05:24 | The next option for
working with text is WordPad.
| | 05:27 | And WordPad lets you take it a step further.
| | 05:30 | For example, you can use rich text
formatting, insert pictures, and other
| | 05:34 | documents, links and so on.
| | 05:37 | So let's go down to our Windows Orb and
type in 'wordp' and you'll notice there
| | 05:42 | is only one program
starting with wordp, WordPad.
| | 05:46 | We will select it and it opens up and
you can see it's looking a little bit more
| | 05:49 | like some other word processors you may
work with, Microsoft Word or WordPerfect.
| | 05:54 | We have got the ribbon across the top now.
| | 05:56 | So now here you can see we have
got our button at the very top.
| | 06:00 | Here is where we have go to do
everything like opening and saving and printing.
| | 06:03 | We can click that to see the list.
| | 06:06 | But we have also got tabs for the
ribbon, the Home tab and the View tab.
| | 06:10 | So lots of different options to work with.
| | 06:13 | So let's say we wanted to create
a report on learning how to surf.
| | 06:17 | I am going to type that in. 'Learn How to Surf.'
| | 06:23 | I am going to press my Enter key a couple of
times just to dropdown and leave some space.
| | 06:28 | There is my title.
| | 06:29 | Maybe I want to put in the date.
| | 06:31 | Well, I can actually insert the date from
the Insert section here on the Home ribbon.
| | 06:35 | One of the options is Date and Time.
| | 06:36 | So when I select that you can choose the format.
| | 06:39 | I am going to choose this
one here, September 03, 2009.
| | 06:42 | And I am going to press Return a
couple of times, type 'by David Rivers'.
| | 06:50 | Now this looks very plain,
almost as if it were in Notepad.
| | 06:53 | But we can start making
changes to parts of the text.
| | 06:56 | Let's select our title.
| | 06:57 | If you move in to the left margin,
click once to select the entire line.
| | 07:02 | Now you can see right here from the
Font section of the ribbon, we can
| | 07:06 | choose the Font family.
| | 07:08 | As we scroll down, we've
got lots to choose from.
| | 07:11 | I am going to go quite a ways down the
list to this one, Jokerman. There we go.
| | 07:18 | That's a fancy looking font.
| | 07:19 | I might want that centered.
| | 07:21 | While it's still selected,
| | 07:22 | I will choose the Center button
here in the paragraph section.
| | 07:25 | In fact all of this should
probably be centered.
| | 07:27 | So I am going to click-and-drag until I
select the other two lines, center them as well.
| | 07:34 | Here we go.
| | 07:35 | You can see there's a lot we can
do with WordPad compared to Notepad.
| | 07:39 | When I press Return or Enter couple of times.
| | 07:42 | I am still centered, so if I want to go
back to the left, I can click the Left.
| | 07:45 | You can also insert pictures.
| | 07:48 | Click the Picture button.
| | 07:49 | You can see there is a dropdown here if
we wanted to change or resize a picture
| | 07:53 | but in this case we're
just inserting it right now.
| | 07:55 | Let's just browse to our Exercise Files.
| | 07:58 | If you don't have the
Exercise Files, no problem.
| | 08:01 | You can use any image you like.
| | 08:03 | We are going to go to the Chap05 folder,
at the 05_01 sub-folder and there's
| | 08:10 | our SepiaSurf image.
| | 08:11 | So with it selected, we will click Open.
| | 08:14 | And that just inserts it right here on the page.
| | 08:17 | Now one thing I like to do when working with an
application such as WordPad is to maximize it.
| | 08:23 | I am going to maximize it
so it fills my entire screen.
| | 08:25 | Notice down at the bottom right-hand
corner, we can also adjust the zoom level,
| | 08:29 | which is at normal or current size at 100%.
| | 08:32 | Just bring it back down so we get a
feel for the entire page itself and I would
| | 08:37 | say that this needs to be centered as well.
| | 08:39 | So we will click the image and we
can center it just like we would text.
| | 08:43 | We need to bring this down as well.
| | 08:45 | You can click just in front of the title.
| | 08:46 | You might want to zoom in a little bit now.
| | 08:49 | You can hit Return as many times as
you like and what's going to happen is
| | 08:53 | everything is going to move down
the page. It's a little more centered that way.
| | 08:58 | We can also have the ability
here to change our line spacing.
| | 09:02 | We can add bulleted lists and so on.
| | 09:04 | Now just scroll down, click after the
picture and hit Return a couple more times
| | 09:10 | and we'll insert an object.
| | 09:12 | Now an object could be
another document, for example.
| | 09:14 | So if I go up to Insert Object, you
will notice there is a lots that we can
| | 09:19 | Create New or from a File.
| | 09:21 | I am going to choose Create from File.
| | 09:23 | Now we just have to go browsing for that file.
| | 09:25 | It could be an Excel spreadsheet.
| | 09:28 | It could be a Word document, we are
going to go to our Exercise Files one more
| | 09:34 | time and in the 05_01 folder
we do have a Text Document.
| | 09:41 | So select that and click Open.
| | 09:43 | It now appears in the path and when we
click OK, you can see it actually appears
| | 09:49 | here in our document.
| | 09:50 | So we can scroll down a little bit, we
might zoom in as well and we can resize this.
| | 09:59 | Now this is actually a Notepad document.
| | 10:02 | So double-clicking shows us the text
that's going to appear in our document.
| | 10:06 | If you prefer, you could
actually just highlight this text.
| | 10:10 | We are in Notepad right now, click
Edit and Copy and we can close this up.
| | 10:17 | If you prefer, delete the icon and paste.
| | 10:21 | And we can paste directly from
the Paste button here in ribbon.
| | 10:24 | When we choose Paste, it's
going to be pasted the way it is.
| | 10:28 | Paste special allows us to do
things like match it to our current font
| | 10:32 | or current formatting.
| | 10:34 | So Unformatted Text means the
formatting won't come across.
| | 10:37 | It will use the formatting of our
current document and there it is.
| | 10:41 | One last neat little thing,
there's so much we can do with WordPad.
| | 10:45 | Let's just select all of that text
and turn it into a bulleted list.
| | 10:49 | We got a button for that.
| | 10:50 | You can start a list.
| | 10:51 | There is the default bullets.
| | 10:52 | You can click the dropdown if you want
to try something else like a Numbered
| | 10:56 | list or using Letters, Roman Numerals.
| | 10:59 | I am going to go to the Roman Numerals.
| | 11:03 | Click out here on the page to deselect
and you can see WordPad allows us to take
| | 11:07 | a big step past what we can do with Notepad.
| | 11:11 | And it's just another one of the options
you have in Windows 7 for working with text.
| | 11:16 | Close that up and choose not to save it.
| | 11:19 | Documents you create in WordPad are
text documents but the difference is you
| | 11:25 | will see the rtf extension, Rich Text
Format, which can be opened by all kinds
| | 11:30 | of word processors including Microsoft Word.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating graphics with Paint| 00:00 | If you want to draw your own
graphics on a blank canvas or even on top of
| | 00:04 | another image, you can use the paint accessory.
| | 00:07 | The paint accessory is changed
slightly in Windows 7, so let's take a look.
| | 00:11 | We'll go to the Windows Orb and just
type in 'paint' as opposed to navigating
| | 00:14 | through all programs and accessories.
| | 00:17 | Here you can see at the top under Programs,
we have got our Paint application or accessory.
| | 00:22 | That opens up a blank canvas and
we are ready to start creating.
| | 00:25 | We have got all kinds of tools.
| | 00:27 | Here you'll notice we have got a ribbon
across the top with two tabs, Home and View.
| | 00:31 | On the Home tab, you'll see different
tools for drawing, add text if we wanted
| | 00:36 | to, change brushes, we have
got basic shapes we can add.
| | 00:40 | We can change the Outline and Fill
properties, line sizes, colors for any of
| | 00:44 | the objects we draw.
| | 00:45 | We've got a blank canvas and we're ready to go.
| | 00:48 | Another option though is to open an existing
image and draw on top of it. Let's do that.
| | 00:55 | In this case, we'll go to the button
just left of the Home tab and here's
| | 00:59 | where we see all those things for
creating new images, opening existing files,
| | 01:04 | saving, printing, we can even send
via e-mail if we wanted to and exit the
| | 01:09 | program at the bottom.
| | 01:10 | But let's open one up.
| | 01:11 | We'll click Open and let's just use one
of the images that comes with Windows 7,
| | 01:16 | our Koala bear here in the Pictures Library.
| | 01:19 | Just click Pictures if you're not
looking at it and it should be there.
| | 01:23 | Now when you click Open,
you're going to see it in full size.
| | 01:27 | So we have got scrollbars,
if we want to scroll around.
| | 01:30 | We've also got a zoom slider to change
the zoom level to zoom in, drag it to
| | 01:35 | the left to zoom out.
| | 01:36 | I am going to go back to 100% and
just scroll down so we're focused on the
| | 01:41 | face of our Koala bear.
| | 01:43 | Now we are going to start
using some of the tools.
| | 01:46 | Well, we'll go to the Basic Shape
section here and click Oval, and just before
| | 01:51 | we start drawing our oval, we can
choose things like the line size.
| | 01:55 | Let's go to the thickest line size, the
color you can see, or foreground color
| | 01:59 | is set to black and then the
background color is set to white.
| | 02:03 | That's if our object is going to use two colors.
| | 02:07 | Well, we're not going to use a fill
because we are going to draw glasses around
| | 02:11 | the eyes of our Koala bear, nice round ones.
| | 02:16 | And we can go over here and draw another one.
| | 02:19 | If you don't like where it's
placed, no problem, just move inside.
| | 02:22 | You can move it around, once it's
deselected though it's a little bit trickier to edit.
| | 02:27 | So once you got them in the right spot, let's
try another shape, this time the curve line.
| | 02:33 | We'll click and drag from the center
of one lens to the other and now to bend
| | 02:38 | it we'll go to the center, just drag that up,
click and drag and you've drawn the glasses.
| | 02:44 | Let's scroll up a little bit, so we can
see the ears because we need to draw the
| | 02:49 | arms on these glasses.
| | 02:50 | We could use the curved line or
if you prefer a straight line.
| | 02:55 | We'll just go from the right
side here and drag that up.
| | 03:00 | That might look better if it were a
little bit smaller, so we can move it
| | 03:03 | down to a thinner line.
| | 03:05 | Let's go to the second last one, 5 pixels.
| | 03:08 | Now when we draw the
next one, it'll be the same.
| | 03:11 | Use those same properties and
there is the glasses on our Koala bear.
| | 03:18 | Now we have made some changes to
this image and if we want to save those
| | 03:22 | changes, we can go up to the Save
button, which will just save using the exact
| | 03:26 | same name or if you prefer to change
the name, we'll go to the button below the
| | 03:32 | Save button on the quick
access toolbar and choose Save As.
| | 03:35 | Now you'll notice a number of
different formats to choose from.
| | 03:39 | It could be a PNG or a JPEG, Bitmap, so we
can change the format of this image as well.
| | 03:45 | So let's go to JPEG and
let's save it to our desktop.
| | 03:50 | So click Desktop and down below we'll
change the name from Koala to KoalaPaint,
| | 03:56 | we'll just add paint on
the end. And click Save.
| | 03:58 | So we now got our image saved to the desktop.
| | 04:01 | Here is another cool thing we can do.
| | 04:03 | Let's go back to our Paint button
and from here choose to set it as the
| | 04:09 | desktop background.
| | 04:10 | We have some options.
| | 04:12 | We could take it and tile it across
the desktop, we could center it on the
| | 04:16 | desktop or if you prefer, have it fill the
entire desktop, that's what I am going to select.
| | 04:22 | Choose fill the entire screen with his picture.
| | 04:25 | So that means if we minimize Paint,
look at the image on our desktop in the
| | 04:30 | background, beautiful.
| | 04:31 | We can go back to Paint from the Taskbar.
| | 04:34 | One click brings it back.
| | 04:36 | You continue to make changes as you please.
| | 04:39 | You notice we've got rotating options.
| | 04:42 | You can erase things that weren't
just right and recreate them, look at the
| | 04:46 | different brushes you have to choose
from, if you want to draw freehand.
| | 04:50 | Lots to experiment using the Paint accessory.
| | 04:52 | Let's just close this up to return
to our Desktop, our brand new desktop,
| | 04:57 | thanks to Paint.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Performing simple and advanced calculations with the calculator| 00:00 | One of the most popular Windows
accessories around is the Calculator and here in
| | 00:04 | Windows 7, the calculator gets a
surprisingly major update and its first serious
| | 00:09 | functional refresh since way back to Windows 95.
| | 00:12 | So let's launch the Calculator
from the Windows Orb or Start button.
| | 00:17 | Let's just type in 'calc'.
| | 00:19 | That's going to display one
program starting with calc.
| | 00:22 | That's the calculator and when we
select it, it's going to pop up on our screen
| | 00:26 | and the first thing you might notice
is it probably looks a little bit bigger
| | 00:29 | than you're used to, and that's because
it's getting ready for those brand new
| | 00:34 | multi-touch compatible
displays that are on the way.
| | 00:37 | You're going to be able to press the
calculator buttons right on the screen like
| | 00:41 | you got a real calculator.
| | 00:43 | But it's the different modes of operation.
| | 00:44 | You can now choose from that
makes the calculator worth exploring.
| | 00:47 | Let's click the View button.
| | 00:49 | You'll notice Standard is selected and
it's the default or basic view you're
| | 00:54 | probably accustomed to.
| | 00:55 | You also have Scientific.
| | 00:57 | Scientific still exists like
it did in previous versions.
| | 01:00 | You get all of these extra buttons and
you're going to need to know what you're
| | 01:03 | doing with this particular mode.
| | 01:06 | Let's go back to View and
choose a new one called Programmer.
| | 01:09 | In Programmer mode, you've got a couple
of things that you're going to be seeing
| | 01:13 | and a number of different options for
conversions and different modes as well.
| | 01:18 | Let's just play around a little bit.
| | 01:19 | We'll type in the number 128.
| | 01:22 | So it appears here in the display.
| | 01:24 | This is using our language known as the
decimal language but we can convert it
| | 01:28 | using this mode to hexadecimal, for example.
| | 01:31 | This is great for programmers.
| | 01:33 | 80 is the equivalent in that language
and if you're wondering what computer see
| | 01:37 | when we type in characters like 128.
| | 01:41 | Well, we can change to another
mode such as Byte, for example.
| | 01:45 | Down below, you're going to see the
ones and zeros that make up the number 128
| | 01:51 | in the decimal language or 80
in the hexadecimal language.
| | 01:54 | This is what the
computer sees. Go back to View.
| | 01:58 | One last one is Statistics.
| | 02:01 | This is also like the Programmer mode,
in that, you're going to need to know
| | 02:04 | what you're doing with these types of
modes of operation because you are not
| | 02:07 | going to find a lot of explanation
on how to use the calculator modes.
| | 02:11 | So if you're into statistics, you'll
know how to use these buttons down below.
| | 02:15 | Let's go back to View now
and change it to Standard.
| | 02:20 | Now we also have, not just the different
modes of operation, but some additional
| | 02:25 | options that will allow us to change the
additional information we can work with
| | 02:31 | on the right-hand side.
| | 02:32 | Let's go back to View.
| | 02:33 | You can see we're working in Basic here.
| | 02:35 | We have got Unit Conversion.
| | 02:37 | Now over on the right hand side, next
to our standard calculator, we have the
| | 02:41 | ability to convert things.
| | 02:44 | For example, Angles, which appear by
default on this button, change the type,
| | 02:48 | for example, to Temperature.
| | 02:51 | Now down below, we can enter a value.
| | 02:54 | Notice Degrees Celsius appears.
| | 02:56 | So today we're expecting a high where
I live of 26 degrees C. I'd like to know
| | 03:02 | what that is in Fahrenheit.
| | 03:04 | I'll go down below, change Degrees
Celsius, to Degrees Fahrenheit, and you
| | 03:08 | can see our high today.
| | 03:10 | It's going to be 78.8 degrees.
| | 03:13 | Nice little feature.
| | 03:14 | So lots of different types to choose from.
| | 03:17 | If you want to convert to other metric
system or length, for example, and you'll
| | 03:21 | notice we have got lots to choose from here.
| | 03:23 | Let's say we wanted to
convert 12 inches into centimeters.
| | 03:30 | I think you've got the idea, so 30.48 cm
is what you'll find on the typical ruler.
| | 03:37 | Now I also have date calculations.
| | 03:39 | Let's go up to the View menu,
go down to Date Calculation.
| | 03:43 | Notice the keyboard shortcuts
on the right-hand side as well.
| | 03:47 | Now we can calculate things like
the difference between two dates.
| | 03:50 | All we have to do is select those states.
| | 03:52 | We can type them in, or use
a little calendar buttons.
| | 03:55 | Let's say from today to next
month, later on in the month.
| | 04:02 | The difference in days we
click Calculate. It is 57 days.
| | 04:06 | You can also see 1 month, 3 weeks and 6 days.
| | 04:09 | We'll also check out the templates
for things like gas mileage, lease and
| | 04:13 | mortgage estimations.
| | 04:14 | Click View, go down to
worksheets and you'll see them all here.
| | 04:18 | So if you are trying to figure out a
mortgage, for example, you'd choose Mortgage.
| | 04:22 | What do you want to
calculate, your Monthly payment?
| | 04:24 | What's your Down payment needs to be.
| | 04:27 | Let's go with Monthly payment,
and we'll just try some values here.
| | 04:30 | Let's say the Purchase price of the
house is $350,000 and we got a Down
| | 04:37 | payment of 120,000. And the Term.
| | 04:43 | Let's go for 25 years, and the
interest rate we're going to get right now,
| | 04:48 | let's say, is 5.25.
| | 04:50 | When we click Calculate, we are going to see
that our Monthly payment is just over $1378.
| | 04:59 | Nice little feature built into the calculator.
| | 05:02 | So we'll close that up.
| | 05:03 | When we returned to the Calculator, this
is the mode we'll be in so whatever you
| | 05:07 | leave in it is and what comes back the
next time you launch the calculator, and
| | 05:11 | although the calculator rarely
receives a lot of attention in Windows, this
| | 05:14 | time around in Windows 7, the
enhancements are too numerous to ignore.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Playing Windows games| 00:00 | If you like to play games on your
computer, Windows 7 comes with a number of
| | 00:04 | games that you can play against the
computer or even go online and play
| | 00:08 | against other opponents.
| | 00:09 | Let's check them out, right now.
| | 00:11 | Go down to the Windows Orb, choose
All Programs and you'll find a category
| | 00:15 | or folder named Games.
| | 00:18 | When you click Games you'll notice a
number of different games to choose from,
| | 00:21 | some of which have the word Internet in
front and that means you're going to be
| | 00:25 | going online and playing against
other opponents who are also online.
| | 00:29 | Another game that's very popular and has
been around since the very beginning of
| | 00:33 | Windows is Solitaire.
| | 00:35 | Let's just click that for a moment.
| | 00:37 | It's the same old solitaire game with the
different options you're probably used to.
| | 00:41 | I always wondered when I was teaching
Windows, when it first came out, why they
| | 00:44 | included a game as part of the user interface.
| | 00:47 | Well, it's the first
thing we did in every class.
| | 00:50 | People who had never used a mouse
before, could get used to clicking and
| | 00:53 | dragging. They could get used to a single-click
and how a double-click works as a shortcut.
| | 01:00 | So that's what solitaire was all about.
| | 01:01 | But of course, it's a nice
way to pass the time now.
| | 01:04 | Let's just close that up.
| | 01:07 | You can save your games now.
| | 01:07 | We'll choose not to save this and go
back to the Windows Orb and we'll go up
| | 01:12 | to All Programs and Games again.
| | 01:15 | This time, let's check out
one of the Internet games.
| | 01:18 | For example, Internet Checkers.
| | 01:20 | Now you'll notice as you hover over
these that you can play these games against
| | 01:24 | online opponents, so that's what it says.
| | 01:26 | So when we click Internet Checkers,
you'll see a little bit of information that
| | 01:30 | shows up by default.
| | 01:32 | It matches you with players
around the world by sending some
| | 01:34 | computer information.
| | 01:35 | You don't have to worry about it.
| | 01:37 | There is a unique ID to Microsoft and
none of your own information is sent
| | 01:40 | around, and you can choose not to
show this message every time you launch.
| | 01:44 | I am going to leave it checked and click Play.
| | 01:46 | You can see it's connecting to the server.
| | 01:49 | It just takes a moment. Other people
are also connecting and down below you're
| | 01:53 | going to see information.
| | 01:54 | You're playing as White and Red is
ready to chat, but if you don't want to chat
| | 01:59 | and send messages to your opponent, you
can choose not to, by turning the Chat
| | 02:02 | off and you'll notice it's my
turn at this point, says, Your Turn.
| | 02:07 | So you just move one of our checkers and
now it's Red's turn, your opponent's turn.
| | 02:12 | You can see how this goes back and
forth, with playing somebody online.
| | 02:16 | Now if you want to quit, you can choose Resign.
| | 02:20 | You are going to loose the game. Answer yes.
| | 02:23 | Red wins!
| | 02:24 | Same thing will happen if you close this up.
| | 02:26 | It counts as a loss.
| | 02:28 | You can see in your statistics, if you
answer Yes and you've closed up the game.
| | 02:32 | So have fun exploring some of the
games that are available to you here
| | 02:35 | through Windows 7, some of which will
allow you to play on your own computer,
| | 02:38 | against the computer, others which
allow you to go online and play against
| | 02:42 | other opponents.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
6. System SettingsGetting under your computer's hood with the Control Panel| 00:00 | With Windows 7, you have full control
over how your entire system behaves.
| | 00:05 | That could be what programs open up
certain files to the appearance of your
| | 00:10 | desktop, to the devices
you plug into your computer.
| | 00:13 | They're all accessible from the Control panel.
| | 00:16 | So let's examine the Control panel
Home by going down to the Windows Orb and
| | 00:20 | selecting Control panel.
| | 00:22 | It appears on the right-
hand side of the Start menu.
| | 00:26 | Now let's take a look at this default
view that we're presented with in Control panel.
| | 00:30 | First of all, you're going to notice
in this main area, a number of different
| | 00:34 | categories, they appear in green, such
as Network and Internet, and then down
| | 00:39 | below you might see subcategories in
blue, View network status and tasks,
| | 00:43 | Choosing homegroups.
| | 00:44 | Each of these are actual links that
will take us to those control panels.
| | 00:49 | So for example, let's say we wanted
to change the background on our desktop.
| | 00:54 | Well that's easily found by going over
to Appearance and Personalization, but
| | 00:58 | instead of going to that section, we
can go directly to that subsection to
| | 01:03 | change our desktop background.
| | 01:04 | We click the link, and you can see
the entire path appears up above in this
| | 01:09 | field where we see,
Control panel/Appearance and Personalization, this would
| | 01:13 | have been the long way to get there,
there's Personalization, and then
| | 01:17 | Desktop Background.
| | 01:18 | We did it with one click from the homepage.
| | 01:21 | So now, we could go through the list,
choose a background and when we are done,
| | 01:24 | save our changes down below.
| | 01:27 | Let's click Cancel.
| | 01:28 | This takes us back to the Control panel Home.
| | 01:31 | Now this is a particular view that
doesn't display everything, obviously.
| | 01:35 | You need to know a little bit about
what's going on to find exactly what
| | 01:38 | you're looking for.
| | 01:39 | For example, if I wanted to adjust
folder options, I don't see any link taking
| | 01:44 | me directly to Folder Options
and how my folders will behave.
| | 01:49 | So one great tool that I like here on
our main screen is this Search field in
| | 01:54 | the top right-hand corner.
| | 01:55 | You can see the cursor flashing.
| | 01:56 | Anything we type here will search the
entire Control panel and we're going to
| | 02:01 | type in 'folder options'.
| | 02:04 | And you can see as we type this our
list is filtered and narrowed down.
| | 02:09 | So we have got Folder Options, the
category, and down below, a link to change the
| | 02:13 | Search options for files and folders.
| | 02:14 | We also see HomeGroup as part of that.
| | 02:16 | So if we go to Folder Options, you
can see how much time we saved taking
| | 02:21 | us directly to this window and we
can make changes to how our folders
| | 02:25 | behave directly from here.
| | 02:27 | Let's just click Cancel though and
return back to the Control panel Home.
| | 02:31 | Now that's the trick.
| | 02:33 | If I was to click Control
panel up here, nothing changes.
| | 02:37 | If I click the arrow next to Control
panel, I could go to an All Control
| | 02:41 | panel Items screen.
| | 02:43 | I could go to any of these categories as well.
| | 02:45 | But how do I get back to that homepage?
| | 02:47 | Well, you have also got navigation
buttons, the Back button here is going to
| | 02:51 | take us back to where we
were, which was our homepage.
| | 02:54 | Now, we are going to go back to allowing
us to see all of the control panel items.
| | 02:59 | That's something that a lot of people like.
| | 03:01 | They prefer not to use the category
and subcategory view that we see here.
| | 03:05 | So there is a View by button
showing Category right now.
| | 03:09 | We can click that and change it
to either Large or Small icons.
| | 03:14 | If you choose Small icons, they are small,
but you'll be able to see them all on
| | 03:17 | one screen without having to use a
scrollbar to scroll through them.
| | 03:21 | And now you can see there's many
control panel items, these are the All Control
| | 03:25 | panel Items we saw from this
little dropdown, and it's now selected.
| | 03:29 | You can see from this menu.
| | 03:31 | So now, we've got more to choose from.
| | 03:33 | Let's say we wanted to change our screen saver.
| | 03:36 | Well, as we go through this alphabetical
list, I do not see screen saver directly.
| | 03:41 | So I've to figure out where
does the screen saver appear?
| | 03:44 | Well it's on my Display.
| | 03:46 | So maybe I'll go up to Display, select
Display and over here in the left-hand side.
| | 03:52 | No, I don't see anything dealing with
screen saver, maybe Display Settings.
| | 03:57 | If I go here, no, still nothing, and you'll
notice my Navigation Pane has disappeared.
| | 04:04 | So I've to click Cancel or
use my Back button to go back.
| | 04:07 | So here's where the Search
field might come in handy.
| | 04:10 | When I click in the Search field
and type 'screen', you see the list is
| | 04:15 | narrowed down or filtered. Leave a space.
| | 04:18 | Start typing 'saver'.
| | 04:20 | All I need is the 'sav' and under
Personalization, that's the category I needed to
| | 04:25 | access the link to change my screen saver.
| | 04:28 | Click that link and it takes me
directly to that screen where I could do
| | 04:32 | something like choose a different
screen saver, or choose None at all.
| | 04:36 | When I click Apply it's applied,
clicking OK will close up the window, and now I
| | 04:40 | can go back to my Control panel Home,
either using Control panel from here, or
| | 04:45 | using the Back button.
| | 04:47 | Remember, when you've got search data
in the Search field, you'll need to use
| | 04:51 | your Back button to go back to the
Control panel Home or at least from the
| | 04:55 | Navigation Pane, choose
Control panel Home. All right.
| | 04:58 | Let's change our View back to that
Category for a second, and from here, we're
| | 05:04 | going to leave this the way it is.
| | 05:06 | When we close up Control panel, this is
what we're going to see when we come back.
| | 05:10 | So if you change your view, you change
it for good, which is the nice thing.
| | 05:13 | So if you change it to Small or Large
icons, so next time you open up Control
| | 05:17 | panel, that's exactly what you are going to see.
| | 05:20 | So, we're going to continue in this
chapter examining some of the categories and
| | 05:25 | subcategories in the Control panel.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Controlling system settings| 00:00 |
In this lesson, we're going to use
Control panel to focus on ways to view and
| | 00:05 |
improve the performance of our computer.
| | 00:08 |
With Control panel opened, we're going
to go to the System and Security Category.
| | 00:12 |
So we'll click that link which takes
us directly to that section, and here
| | 00:16 |
you're going to notice a number
of subcategories to choose from.
| | 00:20 |
Some we've seen already, others we'll
be covering later on as we move through
| | 00:24 |
the lessons in this title.
| | 00:25 |
For example, Power Options will be
covered when we get into portable computing.
| | 00:29 |
We'll talk about security with Windows
Updates, and backing up and restoring.
| | 00:34 |
BitLocker Drive Encryption
is covered later on as well.
| | 00:38 |
So there's a lot of things that have
been covered and will be covered, but we're
| | 00:41 |
going to go to the System
section now by clicking System.
| | 00:45 |
We're going to look at the various
ways we can view how our computer is
| | 00:49 |
performing as well as make
changes to improve that performance.
| | 00:53 |
So here from the System screen, you're
going to see basic information, such as
| | 00:57 |
the edition of Windows you're using.
| | 00:59 |
In this case, I'm using Windows 7 Ultimate.
| | 01:01 |
Let's pretend for a moment, I've got
another computer in my business or at
| | 01:05 |
home that's running the Professional Edition,
keep that in mind, as we move down the screen.
| | 01:12 |
Down towards the bottom, you're going
to notice a section for System that's
| | 01:16 |
going to show you a Rating on
the Windows Experience Index.
| | 01:19 |
That's going to show you about your
Processor, the System type, your Memory,
| | 01:23 |
down below, the name of your computer
and any workgroups you're attached to and
| | 01:27 |
then down at the bottom, under Windows
activation, you're going to see your own
| | 01:30 |
product key but a link
to Change the product key.
| | 01:34 |
So, remember that other computer
running Windows Professional Edition.
| | 01:38 |
Well, if I wanted to switch computers,
in other words, I wanted the Ultimate
| | 01:42 |
edition of Windows running on that
other computer, and Professional on this
| | 01:46 |
computer, it doesn't mean
reinstalling Windows on each computer.
| | 01:50 |
All I have to do is change the product key.
| | 01:53 |
The product key determines what
version or edition of Windows I'm using.
| | 01:58 |
So this is a great way to swap versions
without having to do a full install. All right.
| | 02:04 |
Let's go up to the Windows Experience
Index for a moment and this is going to
| | 02:07 |
give us some information about
how our computer is performing.
| | 02:10 |
When we click this link, we're going
to see scores related to the Processor,
| | 02:14 |
Calculations per second, and you
can see that's quite a good score.
| | 02:18 |
Memory, Memory operations per second.
| | 02:21 |
That's the lowest score on this list,
and you can see that's the score that's
| | 02:25 |
going to be used as my base score, so
that's what I saw on the previous screen,
| | 02:29 |
5.5 which is actually a pretty good score.
| | 02:32 |
So the Windows Experience Index tells
you about how your computer is performing.
| | 02:37 |
Now let's talk about ways
to improve that performance.
| | 02:40 |
We don't see anything really right
here that's going to allow us to increase
| | 02:45 |
performance but we can go over to the
left-hand side in the Navigation Pane to
| | 02:49 |
find some other options, and we saw
some of these in other screens like Power
| | 02:53 |
Settings and Indexing options, but Disk
Cleanup is a nice little tool that could
| | 02:59 |
help us improve our performance.
| | 03:01 |
When we click this link,
we need to choose the drive.
| | 03:04 |
We'll just use C drive.
| | 03:05 |
You can use whatever drive you
like, if you're following along.
| | 03:08 |
When you click OK, it just takes a
moment to calculate how much space is being
| | 03:13 |
used up on your disk by
files that could be cleaned up.
| | 03:17 |
So on this little window, just kind of
retro, you see a number of checkboxes,
| | 03:22 |
Downloaded Program Files.
| | 03:24 |
You can see no bytes there,
but it is checked off.
| | 03:27 |
Temporary Internet Files, nothing there
either, so I haven't actually used the
| | 03:30 |
internet recently, and I
still got 0 bytes showing up.
| | 03:34 |
At the top, the maximum I could clean
up is 18.8 megabytes of disk space and
| | 03:40 |
down below, currently with what's
selected, I'm about to clean up nothing.
| | 03:44 |
So if I start selecting some of
these other things like Games Statistics
| | 03:48 |
Files for example, Office Setup Files,
really doesn't have anything to add,
| | 03:52 |
but you can see there's a whole bunch
in here, Error Reporting for example,
| | 03:56 |
and Temporary files.
| | 03:58 |
So as I start selecting checkboxes, you
can see the total amount of disk space,
| | 04:02 |
I'm about to gain is increasing.
| | 04:05 |
So I'm going to just deselect some
of these that are set to zero already,
| | 04:09 |
Offline Webpages, I don't want to clean that up.
| | 04:12 |
I do want the Game Statistics. There we go.
| | 04:14 |
So I'm about to clean up 4 megabytes,
which is a measly amount considering the
| | 04:19 |
size of my hard drive.
| | 04:20 |
So when I click OK, it'll ask me if
I'm sure, when I choose Delete Files, it
| | 04:27 |
cleans up my drive, and then when I go
back to Disk Cleanup and click OK, it
| | 04:33 |
doesn't take very long for it to analyze
my disk space and now you can see a lot
| | 04:38 |
of 0's showing up since I just cleaned them up.
| | 04:41 |
We'll click Cancel to close this up.
| | 04:43 |
That's one way of improving performance.
| | 04:45 |
Let's take a look at some
of the Advanced tools now.
| | 04:48 |
One of the biggest things in the past,
one of the tasks that I really dreaded
| | 04:52 |
performing was defragmenting my hard drive.
| | 04:56 |
So if you think about all the files,
the programs and settings, everything that
| | 04:59 |
gets stored on your hard drive, when
the space begins to fill up, some of those
| | 05:04 |
files might get broken up into pieces.
| | 05:07 |
So they are stored in separate
locations on your hard drive.
| | 05:10 |
Well, you can improve performance
by taking all those files and putting
| | 05:13 |
them back together.
| | 05:14 |
In other words, it's like a big puzzle,
rearranging all those files, so they
| | 05:18 |
can be unseparated.
| | 05:19 |
In other words, brought back together.
| | 05:22 |
So down below, you'll notice
something called the Disk Defragmenter.
| | 05:25 |
When we Open Disk Defragmenter, you're
going to see your various hard drives,
| | 05:30 |
but here's the important thing.
| | 05:32 |
We're not actually going to perform a
defragmentation right now, because it's
| | 05:37 |
scheduled by default.
| | 05:39 |
This is a nice little feature that came
around in Windows Vista, where you could
| | 05:43 |
configure the schedule.
| | 05:45 |
In other words, let Windows handle the
defragmentation on a regular basis in the
| | 05:50 |
background, and in this case, you
can see 1:00 AM every Wednesday.
| | 05:54 |
When I'm fast asleep, my
computer's performance is being improved
| | 05:58 |
through defragmentation.
| | 06:00 |
Now you can configure that schedule by
clicking the Configure Schedule button.
| | 06:05 |
It may take a moment for you to bring
up the actual window where you can choose
| | 06:09 |
the date and the time.
| | 06:11 |
Do you want it to be weekly? I think
weekly is good enough, I'm going to change
| | 06:14 |
the Day though to Sunday night at
1:00 AM and I'm going to click OK.
| | 06:19 |
We'll leave the disks as it is.
| | 06:22 |
This way, the first thing Monday
morning, I'll be running at peak performance.
| | 06:26 |
I'm going to click Close to close that up
and let's go back to the Control panel Home.
| | 06:31 |
So, under System and Security, just
a couple of ways to help improve your
| | 06:35 |
computer's performance
here in the Control panel.
| | 06:38 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Controlling sound device volume settings| 00:00 | In Windows 7, you have full control
over the sounds that you hear coming from
| | 00:04 | your computer or the
sounds going into your computer.
| | 00:07 | That's what we're going
to explore in this lesson.
| | 00:10 | Notice here, in Control panel, we
have a whole category dedicated to
| | 00:14 | Hardware and Sound.
| | 00:15 | So if we click this category, we'll find
the Sound subcategory for adjusting our
| | 00:21 | system volume, changing system sounds,
the actual sounds that we hear when
| | 00:26 | things happen on our screen.
| | 00:27 | Even audio devices like microphones
and speakers can be adjusted from here.
| | 00:32 | But we don't need the Control
panel to get to all of these settings.
| | 00:36 | We can close this up and down on the
bottom right-hand corner on the taskbar
| | 00:40 | you probably noticed that little speaker icon.
| | 00:43 | As you hover over it with your mouse, you'll
notice the current setting for me, it's 100%.
| | 00:49 | To change that, click the speaker
icon and you will see the slider for
| | 00:53 | adjusting your master volume.
| | 00:55 | So as we drag it down you can hear that
little beep, getting fainter and fainter.
| | 01:01 | That's one of the system sounds, as we
move it all the way up to the top, to
| | 01:05 | 100, you hear that beep nice and loud.
| | 01:08 | We can also mute all sounds, choose
Mute Speakers by clicking the speaker icon.
| | 01:13 | It's a toggle button, the No sign now
appears on the button itself, as well as
| | 01:18 | on your taskbar, just to
remind you that everything is muted.
| | 01:21 | If you're wondering while you're playing
a movie at lynda.com and you can't hear
| | 01:24 | it, you might have your speakers muted.
| | 01:27 | So we can unmute by clicking the same
button and we can have further control by
| | 01:32 | accessing the Mixer.
| | 01:34 | So let's click the Mixer.
| | 01:35 | Now depending on what applications you have
opened, you may see different things from me.
| | 01:41 | Right on the left-hand
side is our master volume.
| | 01:43 | That's what we saw by clicking the
speaker icon on the taskbar and we can
| | 01:46 | adjust it from here.
| | 01:47 | Notice it'll affect anything else
that's running over on the right-hand side,
| | 01:51 | nothing can be louder than the master volume.
| | 01:54 | But individual items can be adjusted,
if you don't like hearing that ding, you
| | 01:59 | can move this a little further down so
it's faint, move it up to make it louder.
| | 02:03 | Now as you open up other
applications, they will appear here as well.
| | 02:07 | Let's go down to our Exercise Files,
if you have got them and in the 06_03,
| | 02:12 | sub-folder of Chapter 06,
you'll find one called FinalSong.
| | 02:16 | Now this is going to open by default
using the Windows Media Player, we can
| | 02:20 | click Play or just double-click it
and as it opens up, it starts to play.
| | 02:25 | Let's just click Pause, so you can hear what
I'm saying and we will switch back to our Mixer.
| | 02:33 | Notice it now appears on
the list Windows Media Player.
| | 02:36 | We can adjust it as well.
| | 02:39 | We can also choose to play our music and
mute out other things like System Sounds.
| | 02:43 | That's the beauty of using the Mixer.
| | 02:45 | Now the System Sounds
themselves can be altered as well.
| | 02:50 | So when you hear that Windows ding,
when you click something that you can't
| | 02:54 | click, for example, or when you start up
Windows and you hear that music, all of
| | 02:59 | those things can be controlled as well.
| | 03:01 | So let's go to the Close button and close
up the Mixer and go back down to the speaker.
| | 03:06 | Again, we can access this from Control
panel, but a shortcut, right-click the
| | 03:10 | speaker and you're going to see there
is the Volume Mixer again, but we also
| | 03:14 | have three items grouped together:
| | 03:17 | Playback devices, Recording devices and Sounds.
| | 03:20 | And all three of these appear in the same place.
| | 03:22 | So it doesn't matter what you choose here.
| | 03:24 | But if you want to go directly to
your System Sounds, click Sounds.
| | 03:28 | So this opens up the Sound window
and you can see those different tabs:
| | 03:32 | Playback, Recording, Sounds and a new
one to Window 7 called Communications.
| | 03:36 | Let's just start with our Sounds though.
| | 03:38 | You can see the scheme being used by
default is the Windows Default scheme and
| | 03:43 | down below, you'll see each of the sounds
that are being used for each of those items.
| | 03:49 | For example, let's say you got a new fax.
| | 03:51 | Click New Fax Notification and
down below you'll see it's the Windows
| | 03:55 | Notify sound that plays.
| | 03:57 | And if you want to hear
that, click the Test button.
| | 04:01 | Your Mail Notification
uses the exact same sound.
| | 04:05 | So if you wanted to change that, so you
knew the difference, click this button
| | 04:09 | and choose something else.
| | 04:10 | Now, you can choose from some of the
window sounds that have actual information,
| | 04:15 | next to them as to what event is
taking place or you can scroll up, you will
| | 04:20 | find things like chimes, for example.
| | 04:22 | You can test that, a little bit
different than the fax notification.
| | 04:28 | Notice the speaker turned yellow,
indicating this has been modified.
| | 04:31 | Also, the word modified appears,
next, to our Windows Default scheme.
| | 04:35 | I have made a change and if I want
to save this as my own scheme, I could
| | 04:39 | use the Save As button.
| | 04:41 | The other thing you can do is
browse for your own wav files.
| | 04:45 | In this case, you'll need an actual wav sound.
| | 04:48 | So a sound that ends with .wav and you
can use your own sounds for any of the
| | 04:54 | things that are happening here in Windows 7.
| | 04:57 | For example, the Default Beep is a Windows ding.
| | 05:02 | You could browse to your
own and make it your own.
| | 05:04 | Now let's go up to Playback.
| | 05:07 | Here, you'll see Speakers, mine are
high definition audio speakers, also
| | 05:11 | Headphones and a Digital
Audio device all selected here.
| | 05:14 | All can be configured, if for example, I
want to go to my Speakers, I can adjust
| | 05:20 | the Properties of those
speakers, Change the Icon.
| | 05:24 | Notice the Jack Information.
| | 05:25 | We can get very technical with our sound devices.
| | 05:28 | Let's click Cancel and go up to Recording.
| | 05:31 | And here you can see I am using the Line In.
| | 05:33 | It has the checkmark and as I'm speaking,
you can actually see the sound level
| | 05:38 | that is appearing on the right-hand side.
| | 05:40 | Now here is the new one, Communications.
| | 05:43 | A lot of people these days are using
their computers to place telephone calls or
| | 05:49 | receive telephone calls.
| | 05:50 | So when that happens, you
can set up default occurrences.
| | 05:54 | For example, I want
everything muted when I receive a call.
| | 05:58 | So if I am playing music, it
automatically gets muted, the system sounds they
| | 06:02 | get muted, anything that's
opened, muted by default.
| | 06:05 | If you prefer just to reduce the volume,
you can choose Reduce the volume of
| | 06:10 | other sounds by 80% or do absolutely nothing.
| | 06:14 | So lots of options here, when you
receive a phone call or place a telephone call
| | 06:18 | using your computer.
| | 06:19 | I am going to choose Mute all
other sounds and click Apply.
| | 06:24 | So I'll have silence when I am
using my computer as a telephone.
| | 06:28 | Click OK and that closes it up.
| | 06:30 | I'll just close up our other Windows here,
including the Windows Media Player to
| | 06:35 | return to the desktop.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Uninstalling programs that are no longer used| 00:00 |
Installing programs on your
computer is usually quite simple.
| | 00:03 |
Pop a disc into your drive or download
a program from the Internet, follow the
| | 00:08 |
prompts and you're up and
running with your new program.
| | 00:11 |
But what about those programs that are
taking up space, maybe they are annoying
| | 00:14 |
you with little pop-ups and
you don't use the programs.
| | 00:17 |
You simply want to remove
them from your computer.
| | 00:20 |
Well, in this lesson, we are going to
use Control panel to uninstall a program.
| | 00:24 |
If you have got one ready to
uninstall, follow along with me.
| | 00:27 |
If you don't, you may want to skip
this movie, save it for another time or
| | 00:31 |
sit back and watch.
| | 00:33 |
We are going to go to Control panel
from the Start button and here in the
| | 00:37 |
Programs category you'll see a link
to a sub category or a program here,
| | 00:41 |
Uninstall a program, right there on the
home page, easy access, we'll give it a
| | 00:46 |
click and this is the
default view that presents itself.
| | 00:50 |
Here, we are going to see a list of all
of the programs installed on our computer.
| | 00:54 |
Some obvious, available through the
Start button, others hidden in the
| | 00:59 |
background behind the scenes and
sometimes those are the ones you want to remove.
| | 01:02 |
We can also change the way we view this list.
| | 01:06 |
For example, you will notice that mine
is displayed by default in the order that
| | 01:11 |
they were installed.
| | 01:12 |
So at the very top, I see
the most recent installation.
| | 01:15 |
I can change that by clicking the header.
| | 01:18 |
I can arrange them in alphabetical
order or we can change the view altogether,
| | 01:22 |
just like in Windows Explorer.
| | 01:24 |
We can go to the View button here,
for more options, Details is the current
| | 01:28 |
view, but if you would rather just see a list,
| | 01:30 |
now we can see everything.
| | 01:32 |
If we don't need to know the
details, we just see a list of programs
| | 01:36 |
in alphabetical order.
| | 01:37 |
Now it's just a matter of selecting
the one that you want to uninstall.
| | 01:41 |
So for me, I have actually got
one here that I want to remove.
| | 01:44 |
It's called OfficePrinter 2.0.
| | 01:46 |
Now this is a program for
creating business cards.
| | 01:49 |
It's a trial version, I am not going to use it,
I don't want to upgrade to the full version.
| | 01:54 |
So, I simply want to
uninstall it from my computer.
| | 01:57 |
Well, how easy is this?
| | 01:58 |
With it selected, I see on the
toolbar now an Uninstall button.
| | 02:03 |
I click the button and a little window
pops open showing that the wizard will
| | 02:08 |
uninstall this program from my computer.
| | 02:10 |
I need to confirm that I want to do
that by clicking the Uninstall button.
| | 02:15 |
You can see it didn't take very long.
| | 02:17 |
It's completed already.
| | 02:18 |
If I want to see details of the
uninstall, there are quite a number of files
| | 02:22 |
that were removed from my computer
including number of Help files, Templates and so on.
| | 02:28 |
So I click Finish, I'm back to my list.
| | 02:31 |
The program has been removed, I freed up
some space on my hard drive and I won't
| | 02:35 |
be annoyed by those little
reminders from that program.
| | 02:39 |
Close up Control panel and
we are back to the desktop.
| | 02:42 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Setting default programs| 00:00 | Different types of files will be opened
by different types of programs, usually
| | 00:04 | by the program that it was created in.
| | 00:06 | For example, if you create a Microsoft
Word document in Microsoft Word, that's
| | 00:11 | the program that's going to open up the
document when you go to access it again.
| | 00:15 | However, there are times when you
might want to override the default program.
| | 00:19 | For example, if you've received a
Microsoft Word document, but you haven't
| | 00:24 | installed Microsoft Word you can
still view it in another program.
| | 00:28 | Here is where we talk about choosing a
default program for different file types
| | 00:32 | and there is a number of
different ways to do this.
| | 00:35 | We are going to start with Control panel.
| | 00:37 | Here, on the Home screen, you will
notice the category Programs, so we'll select
| | 00:41 | that and the sub category Default
Programs is where we are going to go.
| | 00:45 | There is two different ways to tackle this.
| | 00:48 | We can make a file type always open in
a specific program, so we'll get a list
| | 00:53 | of file types and we get to choose the
program or if you prefer, see a list of
| | 00:57 | programs and choose the
file types that they can open.
| | 01:00 | So let's start with Make a file type always
open in a specific program. So we select that.
| | 01:06 | It takes a moment to list all of the
different file types and there is a very long list.
| | 01:11 | And what you're going to see is the
file type, the extension on the left-hand
| | 01:15 | side, a description and then the actual
default program that opens up that type of file.
| | 01:21 | So let's say every time that we go
to open up a txt file, we want to use
| | 01:26 | WordPad instead of Notepad.
| | 01:28 | So let's scroll all the way down to
the Ts until we see the txt file, a Text
| | 01:33 | Document and you can see the
default program is indeed Notepad.
| | 01:37 | But we want to change that, so we
click Change program and there's another
| | 01:41 | option here, which is WordPad.
| | 01:43 | So we can select it and choose OK.
| | 01:47 | So that's just one way to change a file
type's protocol, in this case, selecting
| | 01:52 | the file type and choosing the program.
| | 01:54 | Let's close this up, which takes us
back to Control panel and try the other
| | 01:59 | method, which is to set your default programs.
| | 02:02 | Now in this case, you are going to
see your programs on the left-hand side
| | 02:06 | and let's say that we want to use WordPad
to open up Microsoft Word documents as well.
| | 02:11 | In that case, choose WordPad and you
will notice over here on the right-hand
| | 02:15 | side, a brief description of what
WordPad is, down below we can set this program
| | 02:20 | as the default to open all file types
and protocols it can open by default,
| | 02:26 | which it already does.
| | 02:27 | We can also Choose defaults for
this program, so I'll select that.
| | 02:31 | Notice that txt has a check mark in it.
| | 02:33 | Now this didn't appear until we
made that change a moment ago.
| | 02:37 | But we can also have Microsoft Word
documents open up in WordPad, so we can
| | 02:42 | select that checkbox or if we know we
are not going to have Microsoft Word
| | 02:46 | installed, we can choose it to open up
every one of these by clicking the Select
| | 02:50 | All checkbox and then saving
that change by clicking Save.
| | 02:55 | So now, we are going to
test this out. Let's click OK.
| | 02:58 | You can see it's has taken us back to
Choose the programs that Windows uses by default.
| | 03:03 | This is part of Control panel, we are
going to close it up though and we are
| | 03:06 | going to go to the Exercise Files.
| | 03:08 | You can use any files you like but here
in the 06_05 sub folder of the Chapter
| | 03:13 | 06 folder, in our exercise files, we do
have some different types of documents.
| | 03:18 | Now our Annual Report on Revenues was
actually a Microsoft Word document and you
| | 03:23 | will notice over here, the type is
changed when we changed the actual program to
| | 03:27 | an Office Open XML Document.
| | 03:29 | So when I double-click
this you can see what happens.
| | 03:32 | It opens up in WordPad. Perfect.
| | 03:36 | Now WordPad doesn't support all of
the features of this document's format.
| | 03:40 | So some things may not appear
perfectly formatted for you.
| | 03:43 | It depends on the complexity of
the Word document you're opening.
| | 03:46 | But you can close that message and continue
working in WordPad, on your Word Document.
| | 03:51 | Let's close it up.
| | 03:52 | Now the other thing here is a text
document, which typically would open with
| | 03:58 | Notepad, but we changed that as well.
| | 04:00 | So, if we select it you will notice up
here under Open, it's the icon for WordPad.
| | 04:06 | So double-clicking is the same as
clicking the Open button right here and you
| | 04:10 | can see again, we are in WordPad. All right.
| | 04:12 | Let's close it up.
| | 04:13 | There is still one more
way to change the default.
| | 04:16 | Let's work with our image, which is
called Otters, so you can see it's a JPG image.
| | 04:21 | With it selected, you can see there is a
Preview program that's going to be used to view this.
| | 04:27 | But if we click the little dropdown,
we can choose a different program for
| | 04:31 | this one time only.
| | 04:32 | Or if we want to change the default,
we can do it from here as well.
| | 04:36 | Click Choose default program and let's
say if you've got Windows Live Essentials
| | 04:41 | installed, you have got the
Windows Live Photo Gallery.
| | 04:43 | So you might want to select that one.
| | 04:46 | Now, when we click OK, every time we go
to view this particular image it's going
| | 04:52 | to open up in Photo Gallery and this
gives us a whole bunch of options for
| | 04:56 | working with the file, fixing it up,
sending it off via e-mail and so on.
| | 05:01 | So that's the new default
and that was very simple.
| | 05:03 | So we'll close it up and we'll close
up our Exercise Files and that's how you
| | 05:07 | set up Default Programs.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Exploring accessibility options| 00:00 | Over the years, Microsoft has made some
nice improvements in the area of accessibility.
| | 00:05 | So we are going to explore the ease of
Ease of Access Center in this lesson and
| | 00:09 | we'll start by opening up a document
from the 06_06 folder of the Chapter 06
| | 00:14 | folder in the Exercise Files if you've
got them, or any other document for that
| | 00:17 | matter, if you want to follow along.
| | 00:20 | So with the document opened on our
screen, we may have difficulty reading this
| | 00:24 | document because of accessibility issues.
| | 00:27 | So we are going to explore the Ease
of Access Center, which we can access
| | 00:31 | from the Control panel.
| | 00:32 | We'll click the Windows Orb and choose
Control panel and now for the Ease of
| | 00:37 | Access Center, we go to
the bottom right-hand corner.
| | 00:39 | We've some options here, we can
access Ease of Access by clicking the
| | 00:44 | category heading or go directly to
letting Windows suggest settings or
| | 00:48 | optimize your visual display.
| | 00:50 | Well, let's go to Ease of Access and click
there to see all of the different options.
| | 00:55 | Under the Ease of Access Center, you'll
notice that we can let Windows suggest
| | 00:59 | our settings from here.
| | 01:00 | Optimize our visual display from here
as well, but there is also replacing
| | 01:04 | sounds with visual cues.
| | 01:06 | So if you're not going to hear the
sounds, you might want visual cues instead.
| | 01:09 | Let's start there with a click, I will
turn that on and then down below, we can
| | 01:14 | choose what visual warning we want.
| | 01:17 | So, in this case, it's going to flash
the active caption bar, if you'd rather
| | 01:21 | have the entire window flash,
you can choose that radio button.
| | 01:24 | We can also turn on text captions
for spoken dialog when it's available.
| | 01:29 | So we'll click Apply and let's go
back with the Back button. All right.
| | 01:34 | We can also change how the mouse works,
select that link and down below you'll
| | 01:39 | notice for most pointers we
can change the color and size.
| | 01:42 | So if you're having difficulty seeing
it, we can increase it from our regular
| | 01:46 | white pointer and I Beam to something larger.
| | 01:49 | You can also change to black,
even to an inverted color.
| | 01:53 | Another option is to turn on
mouse keys. As we scroll down,
| | 01:57 | you can see you can use the Numeric
Keypad on your keyboard to move the mouse
| | 02:00 | around the screen, as
opposed to grabbing the mouse.
| | 02:04 | Let's click OK here.
| | 02:05 | (automated voice)
| | 02:08 | And you may hear some voices in the background.
| | 02:10 | Notice that from the Ease of Access
Center here, there is two check boxes.
| | 02:14 | Always read this section aloud.
| | 02:16 | That's what's happening
and Always scan this section.
| | 02:19 | So you might see each of these items
get selected and you'll hear a narrator
| | 02:23 | reading out what's
actually been highlighted there.
| | 02:26 | (automated voice: start magnifier.)
| | 02:27 | The magnifier for example.
| | 02:29 | And that's where we're going to go next,
the Magnifier is a brand-new feature
| | 02:33 | here in Windows 7, so let's give it
a click, and now there are different
| | 02:37 | views to choose from.
| | 02:39 | So let's go back to our document.
| | 02:41 | Let me just move down to the
Taskbar and you can notice as we move down
| | 02:45 | everything is kind of magnified for us.
| | 02:47 | So I am going to switch to the Word document.
| | 02:50 | And this particular view is actually
kind of like taking a magnifying glass and
| | 02:54 | moving it across our document,
making a little bit easier to read.
| | 02:59 | But this may not be comfortable for you,
so you can go to a Magnifying Glass
| | 03:02 | that appears in the top-left corner,
click those double arrows and the
| | 03:06 | Magnifier Window opens up.
| | 03:08 | So here we can adjust the zoom level.
| | 03:10 | Right now it's set to 300% for me.
| | 03:12 | Yours might be at 200, but
we can knock it down or up.
| | 03:15 | I am going to go down to 200, we can
change the views, this is called Lens
| | 03:21 | view, but if you wanted a full
screen view, choose Full screen and now
| | 03:26 | everything is magnified.
| | 03:29 | So you just move your mouse to the right
and you are going to see the right-hand
| | 03:33 | side of your screen, move it up.
| | 03:36 | It's as if you've just
magnified your entire monitor.
| | 03:39 | Let's go back to the Magnifying Glass and click.
| | 03:42 | Again, we can change the level for that view.
| | 03:45 | Let's go back to Views and choose Docked.
| | 03:48 | This is another option where you've
got a little window that can be floated
| | 03:52 | around or docked to a portion of
your screen such as at the top.
| | 03:56 | Now as we move our mouse down across
the document, we see it zoomed in at the
| | 04:01 | top, if that's where you have docked
it and you can click and start working
| | 04:05 | in any of those areas.
| | 04:06 | Let's go back to our Magnifying Glass
and change our view back to Full screen.
| | 04:15 | Magnifier itself is a little tiny
window that when we're done with, we can
| | 04:19 | just simply close it up by clicking the Close
button and everything returns back to normal.
| | 04:25 | So that's all from the Control panel in the
Ease of Access Center, we'll go back there.
| | 04:29 | I am going to deselect these check
boxes, so nobody is talking while I am and
| | 04:33 | we'll just examine some of
the other options here as well.
| | 04:36 | Notice down below we do have a number of
different settings that relate to accessibility.
| | 04:41 | We can actually use our computer
without a display, optimizing it for blindness
| | 04:46 | or Make the computer easier to see,
something we just did with the magnifier.
| | 04:50 | We can optimize our visual
display from here as well.
| | 04:53 | Use the computer without the mouse or
a keyboard, vice-versa, Make the mouse
| | 04:57 | easier to use, the keyboard easier to use.
| | 05:00 | Let's check out making
the keyboard easier to use.
| | 05:02 | There's something here called Mouse Keys
that we talked about already, allows us
| | 05:07 | to control the mouse, using the
Numeric Keypad, but down below we also have
| | 05:11 | things called Sticky Keys.
| | 05:13 | So for example, keyboard shortcuts
like Ctrl+Alt+Delete is one key at a time.
| | 05:19 | You have to hold down all three.
| | 05:21 | And so when you press the first one,
it's as if you are holding it down.
| | 05:24 | Its sticky if you turn this on.
| | 05:27 | We can turn on Filter Keys as well, so
you would ignore or slow down at least
| | 05:32 | brief or repeated keystrokes and
adjust the keyboard repeat rates.
| | 05:35 | So if people have trouble pressing a
key and letting go fast enough, so they
| | 05:39 | don't see repeated characters, we can
adjust the speed of those keystrokes.
| | 05:46 | So lots of options to
explore under Ease of Access.
| | 05:50 | Let's just go back using the Back
button here and scroll down and we'll just
| | 05:57 | look at one more option, which is to
use text or visual alternatives for sound.
| | 06:01 | We've already changed this one, so we are able
to access it directly from the Control panel.
| | 06:06 | I am just going to turn
that back off and click OK.
| | 06:11 | Now we'll close up Control panel,
this returns this to our documents in Normal mode.
| | 06:15 | You can close that up as well.
| | 06:19 | If accessibility is important to you,
it's good to know, Microsoft is on the
| | 06:23 | ball with some nice improvements here to
the Ease of Access Center in Windows 7.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
7. Devices and NetworkingConnecting hardware with Device Stage| 00:00 | We've already learned in a previous
lesson that when you connect a device to
| | 00:03 | your computer, Windows 7 does an
excellent job of locating the driver,
| | 00:07 | installing it if necessary and
getting your device up and running.
| | 00:11 | Well, Windows 7 is going to change the
way you interact with the many devices
| | 00:15 | you might connect to your computer.
| | 00:16 | Of course, we have that one convenient
Devices and Printers location, click
| | 00:20 | the Windows Orb and choose Devices and
Printers, and for here, you can see we
| | 00:25 | can view and configure all of our
devices like printers, cameras, phones and
| | 00:29 | USB drives and so on.
| | 00:31 | But there is a new technology called
Device Stage, and it's going to simplify the
| | 00:35 | process of installing multifunction
devices like Smart Phones, Media Players,
| | 00:39 | multifunction printers.
| | 00:41 | So let's explore that now.
| | 00:43 | I just plugged in a printer, an HP Deskjet 3600.
| | 00:47 | You can see down below I've got this little
icon and it's an actual picture of my printer.
| | 00:52 | This is what the printer looks like,
and with Device Stage, because HP has
| | 00:57 | written a page for Device Stage here in
Windows 7, I can click this to open up
| | 01:03 | the device and get some additional
queues, some additional functionality built
| | 01:09 | into this Window that will
allow me to control this device.
| | 01:11 | For example, I see the picture of
the device here. I've also got the queue
| | 01:16 | showing up, no documents in the queue,
my printer is ready so I see the status
| | 01:19 | right from this window.
| | 01:21 | I can also set up some of the
properties for this printer.
| | 01:24 | For example, Letter, Portrait, if I
click the link, I go into the hp deskjet
| | 01:28 | 3600 series properties that we're
used to seeing in previous versions of
| | 01:32 | Windows, where we go to affect the
properties of a device like this.
| | 01:36 | So it takes me directly there to the
Paper/Quality tab where I can start
| | 01:39 | changing things, such as the
paper size and orientation.
| | 01:43 | I am going to click Cancel.
| | 01:45 | Also down below, you can see HP has
written some functionality into this, where
| | 01:49 | I can see what's printing.
| | 01:51 | So I can view, pause or cancel any print jobs.
| | 01:53 | You can do things like Change color,
layout, and paper settings, customize my
| | 01:57 | printer, double-clicking this will open
up the Properties window again, but this
| | 02:01 | time it's the General tab and you can
see I can create a location, change the
| | 02:05 | name for this printer and so on.
| | 02:07 | So I am going to click Cancel once again.
| | 02:09 | Now that's Device Stage.
| | 02:11 | Now, there is a long list of devices
that you can connect and Device Stage will
| | 02:15 | display a window like this.
| | 02:17 | It all depends on the manufacturers of
those devices if they have provided this
| | 02:21 | type of programming to Microsoft.
| | 02:24 | So the list will continue to grow over time.
| | 02:26 | So as you plug in your devices,
Device Stage may click in and you may see a
| | 02:30 | window like this or it may just do the
automatic installation of the driver and
| | 02:35 | have your device up and running,
like we saw in that previous lesson.
| | 02:39 | So at anytime if we close this up, we
can always go back to the Windows Orb, to
| | 02:44 | Devices and Printers and double-
click a device that uses Device Stage
| | 02:48 | technology to go back to that window
and of course, when you're done, close by
| | 02:53 | clicking the Close button.
| | 02:54 | That's Device Stage.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Create a home network using HomeGroup| 00:00 | These days many households have more
than one computer and to simplify the task
| | 00:05 | of sharing files and printers over a
home network, Microsoft has created a new
| | 00:10 | interface in Windows 7 called HomeGroup,
and this is where you're going to find
| | 00:14 | the most common network based sharing tasks.
| | 00:17 | So the first thing you need to do of
course, is to set up your HomeGroup and
| | 00:20 | that's what we're going to do right now.
| | 00:22 | We do that by clicking the Windows Orb and
then go up to Control panel and select it.
| | 00:28 | Now we could go to Network and Internet
and navigate through the options to find
| | 00:33 | our HomeGroup options, but you'll
notice we've got a quick link right below to
| | 00:38 | choose homegroup and sharing options.
| | 00:40 | When we select this and if it's your
first time, you'll see the same message I
| | 00:44 | am seeing, There is currently
no homegroup on the network.
| | 00:47 | So there is nothing set up for us to connect
to and we haven't set up our own at this point.
| | 00:52 | Notice down below it explains what you
can do with a HomeGroup, exactly what
| | 00:55 | we need to do, we want to share
some files, we want to be able to share
| | 00:58 | printers between the various computers, laptops
etc, that will be connected to this HomeGroup.
| | 01:04 | So before we can get into learning more
about HomeGroups and changing advanced
| | 01:08 | options and starting the
troubleshooter, we need to create a HomeGroup.
| | 01:12 | So we'll click the Create a homegroup
button, and then we'll decide what it is
| | 01:16 | we want to be able to share.
| | 01:18 | You may have noticed in your own User
account, when you go to your Documents,
| | 01:21 | you also have a public version of the
documents, public version of pictures and music.
| | 01:26 | Well, if you have these checked
off, those folders will be shared.
| | 01:31 | The contents of those folders
are determined by the folder name.
| | 01:35 | So we'll see pictures or photos in the
Pictures folder and we'll see music files
| | 01:40 | in the Music folder.
| | 01:41 | We can also include our documents and if
you've got everything selected, you are
| | 01:45 | going to be able to share just about
everything on your computer amongst those
| | 01:49 | other computers on the network.
| | 01:51 | So select whatever you want
and then click the Next button.
| | 01:55 | Now it's going to take a moment, but
before you can access files and printers
| | 01:59 | located on other computers, we have to
add those computers to the HomeGroup.
| | 02:03 | So you would have on that other
computer or laptop in your household, if you've
| | 02:08 | got Windows 7, you will be able to go
in and connect to the HomeGroup and this
| | 02:12 | is the password that you'll need to use.
| | 02:15 | So you might want to
write it down or print it out.
| | 02:17 | You can choose Print password and instructions.
| | 02:20 | It will tell you exactly what to do.
| | 02:22 | I am just going to click this
link, so we can take a peak.
| | 02:24 | So we go to that other computer
that's running Windows 7, click Start and
| | 02:28 | Control panel, under Network and
Internet, just like we saw, we have that link.
| | 02:32 | Choose homegroup and sharing options
and then in that case, we would join now
| | 02:36 | and we would use the password that we see here
to connect to the HomeGroup, as simple as that.
| | 02:41 | The Print this page button allows you to
send it to your printer so you can take
| | 02:45 | it to that other computer.
| | 02:46 | I am going to click Cancel and Finish.
| | 02:50 | So when I do that I've actually
setup the HomeGroup, it's set up on this
| | 02:54 | computer, other computers can join and
you can see everything is being shared here.
| | 02:58 | Of course, I can make changes at any
time, if I really don't want to share my
| | 03:01 | documents, we can deselect that, of
course, anytime you make changes you need to
| | 03:06 | save them by clicking Save
changes and it takes you back out here.
| | 03:10 | You want to make some further changes?
| | 03:12 | Go back to Choose homegroup and sharing
options and down below, notice you also
| | 03:17 | have the ability to share media with devices.
| | 03:20 | So if you wanted to stream pictures,
music and videos to all of the other
| | 03:24 | devices on your home network, select
this check-box, and of course you'll need
| | 03:29 | to save those changes as well.
| | 03:31 | Just before we do that though, we have
some other homegroup actions down below,
| | 03:35 | View or print the homegroup password,
so if you forgot it, you lost that paper
| | 03:40 | you printed out, you can always come
back here, there it is again with the
| | 03:43 | instructions and you can print that page.
| | 03:45 | I am going to click Cancel.
| | 03:47 | You can also change the password,
the password that's given to you can be
| | 03:50 | difficult to remember, click Change
the password and then choose Change the
| | 03:55 | password again and type over what's there.
| | 03:57 | I am going to type the word
password just to make it simple.
| | 04:01 | It's a little bit dangerous.
| | 04:02 | You will want something that's a little
bit more difficult to decipher, but I am
| | 04:06 | going to click Next and that will
change the password for my HomeGroup.
| | 04:10 | It will tell me I can write it down in
case I am going forget, I won't forget
| | 04:13 | that one, so when I click Finish I
come back to the HomeGroup screen.
| | 04:18 | Now if I have any issues with
HomeGroup there is a troubleshooter, we'll talk
| | 04:22 | about that a little bit later.
| | 04:23 | Right now, all we need to do is
click Cancel and we have our HomeGroup.
| | 04:28 | So that means, of course, that I would
take that password, which I just changed
| | 04:32 | to the word password and I'll go to any
of my other computers running Windows 7
| | 04:37 | and be able to join with that password.
| | 04:41 | So sharing your documents, media files,
even your printers on a home network,
| | 04:45 | just got a whole lot
easier with Windows 7 HomeGroup.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Controlling what is shared on a network| 00:00 | When you use HomeGroup to set up your
home network, there are certain defaults
| | 00:04 | that are applied according to the
selections you make while you're setting up
| | 00:08 | your HomeGroup, for example, which
libraries will be shared, pictures, videos,
| | 00:12 | documents and so on.
| | 00:13 | Of course, we can go back and make
changes to those settings but we can take it
| | 00:16 | a step further by choosing the exact folders and
even files we want to share. Let's do that now.
| | 00:22 | We'll start by accessing the
HomeGroup through Windows Explorer.
| | 00:27 | So from the Taskbar, click the
Windows Explorer icon and if you've set up a
| | 00:31 | HomeGroup you'll see it in the Navigation Pane.
| | 00:34 | So click once, and you'll see that there are
no other people in the HomeGroup at this time.
| | 00:39 | So before we can view files from other
people on the network, they need to join
| | 00:43 | the HomeGroup, nobody has done that yet,
but we have set up our own HomeGroup,
| | 00:47 | so if we want to make changes, we can
go to View homegroup settings, click that
| | 00:51 | link, where we can also
make changes for example.
| | 00:53 | If we didn't want to include Videos
and Music, but we do want Pictures,
| | 00:58 | Documents and Printers we leave those
selected, and if we don't want to stream,
| | 01:02 | pictures, we can deselect that check box.
| | 01:05 | So make the selections you want
and make sure you save those changes.
| | 01:09 | But that's just one option.
| | 01:11 | Those are the libraries, the default
selections that we can choose from.
| | 01:15 | What if we wanted to share
our Exercise Files for example?
| | 01:19 | Well, in that case we would
navigate first to the folder.
| | 01:23 | Let's go to our Desktop and we'll double-
click Exercise Files, and this gets us inside.
| | 01:28 | Now if you don't have
Exercise Files, don't worry about it.
| | 01:31 | You can select any folder you like
and we are going to turn the sharing on.
| | 01:35 | Let's do it for a folder
inside our Chapter 07 folder.
| | 01:40 | So we'll double-click
and there you'll see 07_03.
| | 01:43 | Click once to select it, and down
below you'll be able to see if it's been
| | 01:47 | shared, and in this case we see no
information indicating this is being shared
| | 01:51 | with any homegroup or
anyone else for that matter.
| | 01:54 | But right here from the toolbar, choose
Share with and you can see our options.
| | 01:58 | Nobody is the default but we can
share with a homegroup two different ways.
| | 02:02 | We can allow them to see what's in the
folder, but not make changes to it, or
| | 02:07 | we can allow them to go in and have Read/Write
access, which does allow them to make changes.
| | 02:13 | So let's choose Homegroup (Read/Write).
| | 02:15 | Now the moment you do that, that
information appears down below.
| | 02:19 | You can see the State now is Shared
and it's shared with the Homegroup.
| | 02:23 | But if I didn't want to share the entire
folder, maybe just certain files, we
| | 02:27 | can go back to Share with, choose
Nobody and as soon as we do that, the
| | 02:32 | shared information disappears and
let's go inside the folder and select a
| | 02:37 | single file or multiple files. It's up to you.
| | 02:40 | If we select the first image, hold
down Shift and click the last one, all of
| | 02:45 | them will be included, but I am going
to hold down Ctrl and click the middle
| | 02:49 | one, otherwise I would have
just shared the entire folder.
| | 02:51 | In this case, it's only these
two pictures that I want to share.
| | 02:55 | So with those selected, I go up to
Share with, and now I choose Homegroup.
| | 03:00 | I am going to choose Read/Write access.
| | 03:03 | So it's only these items, the two items
that are selected, that are currently shared.
| | 03:07 | If I click Macaws, you'll notice
there is no shared information down below.
| | 03:11 | If I go to either of the other two,
I do see that they are shared.
| | 03:16 | So that's how we customize exactly what
we're going to share and how we're going
| | 03:21 | to share it in Homegroup.
| | 03:23 | We can close that up when we are done.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Troubleshooting a network and HomeGroup| 00:00 | It at anytime you're having issues
with displaying your HomeGroup, maybe it's
| | 00:04 | not a appearing on other computers, or
maybe your having difficulty connecting,
| | 00:09 | there may be a solution, through one of
the troubleshooting options here in the
| | 00:13 | Control panel, and that's what
we are going to explore right now.
| | 00:16 | You can see I have opened up Control panel,
and I am going to go to Network and Internet.
| | 00:20 | Now if you don't have any issues, there
won't be anything to troubleshoot, but I
| | 00:24 | have unplugged my Ethernet cable.
| | 00:27 | So here from Network and Internet, I am
going to go to HomeGroup, because this
| | 00:31 | is the problem I'm having, I can't seem to
connect to my HomeGroup, I can't join in.
| | 00:36 | And you can see when I go to
HomeGroup here, the screen has changed.
| | 00:39 | It belongs to a HomeGroup but it's not
available because you are not connected
| | 00:43 | to the home network.
| | 00:44 | Why am I not connected?
| | 00:45 | Well, I could try to
Connect to an existing network.
| | 00:48 | I have tried that it doesn't work.
| | 00:49 | But you'll notice down at the bottom, I
have the ability to start the HomeGroup
| | 00:53 | Troubleshooter, and when I click that link,
| | 00:55 | you can see the HomeGroup window opens up.
| | 00:57 | Troubleshoot and help prevent
computer problems, and down below home group
| | 01:02 | is what's selected.
| | 01:04 | Down below there is a link to Advanced as well.
| | 01:07 | I just want you to click that link
to see that there's a checkbox here
| | 01:10 | that will automatically
repair issues if they're found.
| | 01:14 | So we'll keep that checked and then choose Next.
| | 01:17 | So now it's busy detecting problems,
and the first message you are going to see
| | 01:21 | is that sometimes when there are
HomeGroup problems they are network-related.
| | 01:24 | And it's recommended that we troubleshoot
the network problems before we continue.
| | 01:29 | Two options include troubleshooting the
network or skipping the step altogether.
| | 01:33 | So if you're pretty sure your network is fine,
it's got to do with HomeGroup you can skip.
| | 01:37 | But we are not sure, so we'll
Troubleshoot network problems.
| | 01:40 | And you can see what's happened. This
has actually opened up a second window.
| | 01:44 | So all we have to do is read what's
going on, in this case it appears an
| | 01:49 | Ethernet cable is not
plugged into this computer.
| | 01:52 | So we go and check our connection,
and I am going to do that right now.
| | 01:55 | I am going to plug it back in, and now
with my Ethernet cable plugged back in,
| | 01:59 | you can see the options down below.
| | 02:01 | Check to see if it's fixed or skip this step.
| | 02:04 | Well I am going to check to
see if this fixes the problem.
| | 02:06 | Now remember this is the
second window that's opened up.
| | 02:09 | And it relates to Windows Network Diagnostics.
| | 02:12 | This is not our HomeGroup diagnostics.
| | 02:14 | So it's verifying that the network
configuration problem is resolved, and if I
| | 02:18 | move this slightly over to the right you
can see actually something has happened
| | 02:21 | in the background in
Control panel under HomeGroup.
| | 02:24 | It appears that I have got all of
settings back, and I am able to view
| | 02:28 | the HomeGroup itself.
| | 02:30 | So it appears to have fixed the problem.
| | 02:32 | You can see it's still analyzing and
running diagnostics on my network, detecting
| | 02:38 | additional problems.
| | 02:39 | In this case, everything seems
to be fine in the background.
| | 02:43 | It says Troubleshooting was unable to
automatically fix all of the issues found,
| | 02:47 | and there is more details down below.
| | 02:49 | Network cable not probably plugged-in
or maybe broken out. It's still busy.
| | 02:52 | Remember we got that other
window running in the background.
| | 02:55 | So we can close this one up and you can
see it's detecting problems waiting for
| | 03:00 | network diagnostics to complete.
| | 03:02 | When we close that up, it's completed.
| | 03:04 | Now it's checking HomeGroup security.
| | 03:06 | Solutions were applied is the problem fixed.
| | 03:08 | Well if we move this out of the way, sure enough,
| | 03:10 | yeah we've got our HomeGroup in the background.
| | 03:13 | Yes the problem is fixed.
| | 03:15 | When we select that, you can see that our
HomeGroup information needs to be refreshed.
| | 03:20 | That was the problem.
| | 03:21 | After the network diagnostics that
was fixed, I can see my green checkmark.
| | 03:25 | So I can close the Troubleshooter.
| | 03:27 | If there are any other issues I
can Explore additional options.
| | 03:30 | But everything is fine so I am going to
click Close. It takes me back to my HomeGroup.
| | 03:35 | Now because the screen is changed I
now have access to my Libraries and
| | 03:38 | Printers, some of the options I
checked or unchecked, and down at the bottom
| | 03:43 | under Other HomeGroup actions, I still
have the ability to start the HomeGroup
| | 03:46 | troubleshooter from here, but I am
done. I am going to click Cancel, close up
| | 03:51 | Control panel and that's how we
troubleshoot our network, as well as any
| | 03:55 | HomeGroup issues you may be having.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Reconnecting quickly with jump lists| 00:00 | If you find yourself connecting to
remote computers or FTP sites and the like on
| | 00:05 | a regular basis, you can actually save a
lot of time and effort by pinning those
| | 00:10 | locations to a jumplist.
| | 00:11 | So you can see here in Windows Explorer,
I have connected to an FTP site, and
| | 00:16 | you can connect to a folder.
| | 00:18 | You can connect to a remote computer or an
FTP site if you would like to follow along.
| | 00:23 | And once you've opened it up in Windows
Explorer and you know what you have to
| | 00:27 | go through manually to connect to that
site, you'll never have to do it again
| | 00:31 | if you pin the location in Windows
Explorer to a jumplist, and that's what we
| | 00:34 | are going to do right now.
| | 00:36 | So if we go down to the taskbar and right
-click, you're going to see some of the
| | 00:41 | recent sites you visited.
| | 00:43 | Now it happens to be there, and it
will stay there until you start visiting
| | 00:47 | other sites and other locations, even
if they're on your own computer, and
| | 00:52 | eventually it gets bumped off the list.
| | 00:55 | So if you want to keep it here, all
you need to do is click the pushpin that
| | 00:58 | appears on the right-hand side.
| | 01:00 | Now when you pin it to the list, it
appears in a new category called Pinned.
| | 01:04 | And it will always stay there, no
matter how many different sites, and
| | 01:08 | locations appear in the Recent section,
and get bumped out, your FTP site, your
| | 01:14 | remote computer, whatever you've pinned, will
always appear here at the top of this pop-up menu.
| | 01:20 | So even if I close up this Windows
Explorer window and go down to my shortcut
| | 01:24 | icon, and right-click,
| | 01:26 | notice I can always access that
particular location on the FTP site by clicking
| | 01:31 | the link on this jumplist.
| | 01:34 | Now at any time if you want to
remove it from the list no problem.
| | 01:37 | Let's go down to recently visited
location, for me you can see it's a folder
| | 01:41 | called Movies, and I've got
the pin on the right-hand side.
| | 01:44 | But you can also right-click there as well.
| | 01:47 | So from here you'll notice you've got
some options like opening up the folder.
| | 01:50 | That's the same as clicking once.
| | 01:52 | We can copy this location.
| | 01:54 | There is the pin, and we can
also remove it from the list.
| | 01:58 | So when we choose Remove from list,
you can see all I have got now is a
| | 02:01 | single pinned item.
| | 02:02 | That will always appear here, on my jumplist.
| | 02:06 | So it's good to know that for remote
desktop connections, specific folders any
| | 02:11 | location you access on a regular
basis, you'll never have to waste time
| | 02:15 | connecting manually with jumplists.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Boosting your computer's memory with ReadyBoost| 00:00 |
If you've noticed the performance
of your PC has started to dwindle,
| | 00:04 |
well, ReadyBoost provides an
affordable and easy way to improve that
| | 00:08 |
performance, by utilizing
external memory as a memory cache.
| | 00:12 |
That's nothing new, but in Window 7
ReadyBoost is greatly improved in a
| | 00:16 |
number of different ways.
| | 00:17 |
We're going to explore it right now.
| | 00:19 |
First thing you'll need to do
is attach some external memory.
| | 00:22 |
So ReadyBoost now, supports multiple
memory devices like USB memory keys. I have
| | 00:27 |
plugged one in myself.
| | 00:28 |
You can see it's been
titled Removable Disk (F:).
| | 00:32 |
it also supports Secure Digital or SD
memory cards, as well as other internal
| | 00:37 |
flash devices, and get this, it also
supports over 40 Gigabytes of storage.
| | 00:43 |
So with my device attached, you can see
AutoPlay automatically opens up this window
| | 00:48 |
full of different options.
| | 00:50 |
There happens to be some
pictures on this device.
| | 00:52 |
So I see some Picture Options.
| | 00:54 |
But down below, where I see General options,
| | 00:57 |
one of them is to speed up my system,
using, here it is, Windows ReadyBoost.
| | 01:03 |
So all I have to do is select this to
open up the Removable Disk Properties window.
| | 01:09 |
Now, if you have already plugged yours in,
| | 01:11 |
and you have closed the
AutoPlay window, no problem.
| | 01:14 |
I am going to click Cancel.
| | 01:15 |
All you need to do is go
down to the Windows Orb.
| | 01:18 |
Go to your Computer by clicking Computer.
| | 01:21 |
You'll find your Removable Disk.
| | 01:24 |
I am going to right-click and you can do the
same from the pop-up menu choose Properties.
| | 01:28 |
It's the exact same window
with a different tab selected.
| | 01:32 |
Notice there is a ReadyBoost
tab over on the right-hand side.
| | 01:35 |
So when we select this, we see those
options that will allow us to use this
| | 01:39 |
device as a way to boost our PC's performance.
| | 01:44 |
So the default is already
selected, Do not use this device.
| | 01:48 |
We could dedicate the entire device to
ReadyBoost or choose how much space we
| | 01:54 |
want to dedicate by selecting Use this device.
| | 01:57 |
That's where I am going, because I
have got other things stored on my device.
| | 02:01 |
So when I choose Use this device, I get
to select the amount of space I want to
| | 02:05 |
dedicate to improving my PC's performance.
| | 02:09 |
You can see, I can type in the value.
| | 02:11 |
I can use the up and down arrows if I
want, or even faster, use the slider.
| | 02:15 |
Now you probably want to leave it
at no less than 1 Gigabyte of space.
| | 02:21 |
If you go below a Gigabyte you're
really not going to help your computer much.
| | 02:25 |
So I am going to go down to around 2500.
| | 02:27 |
Now if you need to, you can
use the arrows to fine tune.
| | 02:31 |
I am going to go right to 2500
exactly, and when I click OK, as long as I
| | 02:37 |
keep that plugged-in,
| | 02:38 |
I am going to notice an improved
performance for my PC as I've got 2.5 Gigabytes
| | 02:45 |
of external memory being used by my
computer to improve that performance.
| | 02:50 |
And you can see all of a sudden, a
lot of the space has been used up.
| | 02:54 |
That's because of what I
just did with ReadyBoost.
| | 02:56 |
Now of course, we can always go back,
if you no longer want to do that,
| | 02:59 |
right-click the same device, go to
Properties, and you'll want to make sure that
| | 03:04 |
you select ReadyBoost.
| | 03:07 |
And at any at any time you can
choose not to use this device, click Apply
| | 03:11 |
or click OK, if you want to apply the
setting and close the window at the same time.
| | 03:17 |
So there we go, I have got lots of
free space now, I'll close up my Computer
| | 03:22 |
window and I am back to the Desktop.
| | 03:24 |
So with more ReadyBoost
options here in Window 7,
| | 03:28 |
you should have an easy time
boosting the performance of your PC whenever
| | 03:32 |
it's needed.
| | 03:34 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
8. Windows SecurityKeeping your PC secure with Windows Update| 00:00 | One of the best ways to ensure the
security of your computer and its contents is
| | 00:05 | to make sure the latest
security updates have been applied.
| | 00:09 | And the best way to do that is through
Windows Update. We are going to explore
| | 00:13 | that now from the Control panel.
| | 00:15 | So if you are following along, open up the
Control panel then click System and Security.
| | 00:21 | Now from here you'll see a
subcategory titled Windows Update.
| | 00:24 | Here's where we can go to turn
automatic updating on or off, to check for the
| | 00:28 | latest updates and view any installed updates.
| | 00:31 | But let's just click Windows
Update to go to that section.
| | 00:34 | Now you may notice or you may not
notice a message and a color-coded bar
| | 00:40 | down the left-hand side.
| | 00:42 | If you see red, there is an important update.
| | 00:44 | If you see yellow there
may be some optional updates.
| | 00:48 | And there may be some issues regarding
your computer security and performance.
| | 00:52 | So down below you are going to see
information about the most recent check for updates.
| | 00:57 | And you're going to see whether
or not updates were installed.
| | 01:00 | You can view the update
history by clicking this link.
| | 01:03 | And you'll also notice your current settings.
| | 01:06 | In my situation, I receive
updates for Windows and other products,
| | 01:09 | from Microsoft Update.
| | 01:11 | So let's click Check for updates.
| | 01:13 | Now this could take a moment, as the
computer is checked over for the latest updates.
| | 01:18 | It's also checking Microsoft to see if
there are any updates that need to be applied.
| | 01:22 | So you can sit back, relax and let
Windows do its thing, and eventually
| | 01:27 | you'll see a message indicating
whether or not you have some important or
| | 01:31 | optional updates to install.
| | 01:34 | On the left-hand side I've got 12
important updates that are available, and down
| | 01:38 | below 46 optional updates as well.
| | 01:41 | Now, only if you see important
updates that are available will you see
| | 01:46 | an Install updates button.
Clicking this button will install the 12
| | 01:50 | important updates in my case.
| | 01:52 | But the optional updates can
also be installed manually.
| | 01:55 | Let's go to this link. If you have got
optional updates go ahead and give it a click.
| | 01:59 | And you can see I've got a number of
checkboxes here, because these are optional
| | 02:04 | I can choose whether or
not I want to install them.
| | 02:06 | A lot of help files here.
| | 02:08 | This is a brand new version of Windows
7, so the help files are always being
| | 02:12 | updated, and a lot of language packs as well.
| | 02:15 | So if I am not going to be using any
of those languages, they are probably not
| | 02:18 | important to me, I don't need to select them.
| | 02:21 | But I am going to go to the top one
here for Windows 7, for Internet Explorer 8,
| | 02:24 | and click OK, and you can see now
I've got 12 important updates, those are the
| | 02:31 | ones that are not optional,
and one optional update selected.
| | 02:35 | Now if you don't want to install
important updates, you can go to this link and
| | 02:40 | you'll notice they are
all checked off by default.
| | 02:42 | And if there is anything you see here
that you don't want to be installed,
| | 02:45 | just simply deselect it by clicking the checkbox.
| | 02:48 | And you can see there is a number
of number Security Updates here.
| | 02:50 | I have got Microsoft Office 2007 installed.
| | 02:53 | You can see an update for Windows
Defender. That's important as well.
| | 02:57 | So all I'm going to do is
leave those as is and click OK.
| | 03:01 | And now it's time to install those updates.
| | 03:04 | To do that click the Install updates button.
| | 03:07 | You need to accept the license terms.
| | 03:09 | You'll read through those click the
I accept radio button and then choose Finish.
| | 03:14 | And you can see it's preparing and
downloading updates, and depending on the
| | 03:18 | number of important and optional
update selected and the type of update
| | 03:22 | this could take some time.
| | 03:24 | At anytime if you need to stop the download,
you can click the Stop download button.
| | 03:28 | But typically you can continue to
work all you need to do is minimize
| | 03:32 | Control panel and you are back to
your desktop, and those updates will take
| | 03:36 | care of themselves.
| | 03:37 | You'll get a message at the end when it's done.
| | 03:39 | And of course, you can view reports
to see what was installed at any time.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Battling spyware with Windows Defender| 00:00 | Spyware are those hidden little programs
that probe around your computer trying
| | 00:04 | to get at your personal information.
| | 00:06 | You can get spyware on your computer
by accessing the Internet, by installing
| | 00:10 | programs or with Windows 7,
| | 00:12 | you can also defend against
spyware with Windows Defender.
| | 00:16 | We are going to check it out now.
| | 00:17 | Let just go down to the
Windows orb and type in defend.
| | 00:21 | That's all you need to type and at the
top under Control panel, that's where
| | 00:25 | we go to find Windows Defender or
Scan right from here, and you will notice
| | 00:30 | the icons are the same.
| | 00:31 | We can go directly to scanning our
computer for spyware and any other unwanted
| | 00:36 | software by selecting this link.
| | 00:37 | But let's go to Windows Defender.
| | 00:39 | It opens up the program.
| | 00:42 | Here you are going to
see some status information.
| | 00:44 | For example, on this computer I am
working with, there are no unwanted or
| | 00:48 | harmful software detected
and it's running normally.
| | 00:52 | Down below I also see the
last time a scan was performed.
| | 00:55 | I can see the current schedule, all of
which I can change of course, whether or
| | 01:00 | not I have real-time protection turned
on or not and my Antispyware definition
| | 01:04 | version and when it was last created.
| | 01:07 | So, I have got a very recent version.
| | 01:09 | So, if you wanted to perform a scan,
| | 01:11 | all you need to do is go up to the
Scan button, click Scan and it starts
| | 01:15 | scanning your computer.
| | 01:17 | And you can see it might take a few minutes
because it's scanning the entire computer.
| | 01:21 | There are options for what
can and cannot be scanned.
| | 01:24 | That's totally up to you.
| | 01:26 | And let's just let this continue
all the way across the progress bar.
| | 01:30 | Of course, we already know
that there are no problems on this
| | 01:33 | particular computer.
| | 01:34 | But we will see the
results of our scan very shortly.
| | 01:39 | Now, the type of scan we just ran,
the default scan is called a Quick scan.
| | 01:43 | You can see when it started, how long
it took, how many resources were scanned
| | 01:47 | and everything looks fine.
| | 01:48 | I have got the green bar across the
top indicating everything is running
| | 01:52 | normally and I have got
updated status down below.
| | 01:57 | Now, how do we change the settings?
| | 01:58 | Well, we just simply go up to the
tools button and from here there's lots
| | 02:02 | of different items.
| | 02:03 | First lets move down to tools here.
| | 02:05 | Quarantined items, these are items that
are removed by the system, placed in a
| | 02:10 | temporary holding area, until you
decide whether or not they should be removed
| | 02:14 | for good or whether or not
they need to be restored.
| | 02:17 | We can access the Windows
Defender website from here.
| | 02:20 | Check out which items are allowed, so view
software that we have chosen not to monitor.
| | 02:25 | Another setting we can adjust. And
Microsoft Malware Protection Center is
| | 02:30 | available, right from this link where you
can get information on malware and so on.
| | 02:34 | Let's go over to Options though.
| | 02:37 | Now here is where we have access to
all of the options that we just saw in
| | 02:41 | action in Windows Defender, starting
with Automatic scanning at the top and
| | 02:45 | this is something I like to leave on.
| | 02:47 | My computer will automatically be
scanned and I can choose how often,
| | 02:51 | the frequency and the time and the type of scan.
| | 02:54 | And you can see for me it's happening daily.
| | 02:56 | If I want to change that to a particular
day of the week, it would become weekly
| | 03:01 | and I can choose the day.
| | 03:02 | I am going to go to Sunday.
| | 03:04 | I am going to leave the time at 2:00 AM
but I could change it to anytime I like.
| | 03:10 | And the type of scan is what
we just witnessed, a Quick scan.
| | 03:13 | But there are full scans as
well and they take longer.
| | 03:16 | I am going to choose Full scan, and I
can also choose whether or not Windows
| | 03:20 | Defender is going to check for
updated definitions before scanning.
| | 03:24 | That's part of my Windows update.
| | 03:25 | I am going to leave it deselected and
run a scan only when my system is idle.
| | 03:29 | Odds are, Sunday morning at 2:00 AM,
this computer will be idle and the full
| | 03:34 | scan will be all to take place.
| | 03:36 | Let's check out Default actions now, in
the Navigation pane on the left hand side.
| | 03:40 | We can choose what actions occur when
spyware or other software is detected.
| | 03:46 | So here we have the different levels.
| | 03:48 | A Severe alert item, obviously this is a
type of program that's getting in there
| | 03:53 | and compromising my
computer security and my privacy.
| | 03:57 | So when I click this dropdown, I could
choose to have severe alerts totally
| | 04:01 | removed or quarantine.
| | 04:03 | The default is Recommend
action based on definition.
| | 04:05 | So I will see a recommendation and I
can choose whether or not to accept or
| | 04:09 | reject that or choose one of these others.
| | 04:12 | So, I will leave it at Recommended.
| | 04:14 | Same goes for the other alerts.
| | 04:15 | I have got High, Medium and Low alerts
and I can choose just to automatically
| | 04:20 | apply the recommended actions by
clicking this checkbox and I won't be prompted.
| | 04:24 | But I like to be prompted.
| | 04:25 | I would like to see what's going on.
| | 04:27 | So, I am going to leave that deselected.
| | 04:29 | Real-time protection is also
something I would like to leave on.
| | 04:33 | So as I am downloading files such as
attachments from an e-mail or as I am
| | 04:39 | running programs on my computer, they
are being scanned in real-time, as it is
| | 04:45 | happening and you can see Use
real-time protection is turned on.
| | 04:48 | It's recommended and down below
you can choose what is being scanned.
| | 04:51 | I am going to leave both of these
downloaded files and attachments as well as programs.
| | 04:55 | We can also choose here which
files and folders we want to exclude.
| | 05:00 | In other words, we don't want them scanned.
| | 05:01 | We know they are safe.
| | 05:02 | Let's go to the Add button and if you
have got the Exercise Files we can add the
| | 05:07 | Exercise Files. We just need
to know how to locate them.
| | 05:09 | Well I am going to go to the C drive here,
down to Users, I am going to go to my
| | 05:16 | Users here and I am going
to go to my own Desktop.
| | 05:19 | I can click the little dropdown and see
the Exercise Files folder right there.
| | 05:23 | I want the entire folder left alone.
| | 05:25 | It won't be scanned. When I click OK,
| | 05:27 | it now appears on the list and
anytime I can remove that from the list by
| | 05:32 | selecting it and clicking Remove.
| | 05:34 | But I am going to save those changes.
| | 05:36 | Now it takes me back out,
so I could have waited.
| | 05:38 | I am going to go back into Options
and go down to Excluded file types.
| | 05:43 | These aren't specific files, but
rather types of files I don't want scanned.
| | 05:48 | For example, you can see up here they
use the JPG format. These are pictures and
| | 05:51 | typically there won't be programs or
spyware embedded in an image like a JPEG image,
| | 05:58 | a digital photo for example.
| | 06:00 | So you can come down here and add as
many as you like and you just them in
| | 06:05 | the field at the top. Notice the
example it uses an *.jpg. So that could be
| | 06:10 | anything in the beginning,
| | 06:12 | that's a wildcard, the
period and then the file type.
| | 06:15 | But I am going to leave this blank.
| | 06:18 | There's also an Advanced section,
where you'll see what can be scanned.
| | 06:22 | Scan archive files, e-mail,
I want my e-mail scanned as well.
| | 06:26 | Removable drives. When I plug-in, for
example, a USB drive, should it be scanned?
| | 06:32 | Select that checkbox if you want it as well.
| | 06:34 | You can see the other
options to choose from here.
| | 06:37 | If you are the administrator of this
computer and you have got full access,
| | 06:41 | you can go to the Administrator
section and there's two options here.
| | 06:46 | So you have got Use this program and
Display items from all users of this computer.
| | 06:50 | If there are many users, for example,
connected to this computer,
| | 06:54 | when Use this program is turned on,
you will be alerted and all the users on
| | 06:59 | this computer will be alerted if
spyware or any other software that could be
| | 07:04 | malicious is running.
| | 07:05 | Now down below is the Administrator.
I want to be able to see what other users
| | 07:10 | are doing in the way of
protecting their computer.
| | 07:13 | So I want be able to see their history,
which items they have chosen to allow
| | 07:18 | or not be scanned, which ones are
quarantined and I need to be the Administrator
| | 07:22 | obviously to view what's going on with all
the other users who might log on to this computer.
| | 07:27 | Again, when you are done, if you have
made changes, you need to click Save.
| | 07:30 | That takes you back out and you can close
Windows Defender to return to your desktop
| | 07:36 | and know that your computer is
going to be safe from malicious spyware.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Controlling access with user accounts| 00:00 |
User accounts allow different users
to login to the same computer but have
| | 00:04 |
access to their own files in
their own personal settings.
| | 00:08 |
As the administrator of the computer,
you have full control over those user
| | 00:12 |
accounts and what they're allowed to do and see.
| | 00:15 |
So, let's explore
managing your user accounts now.
| | 00:18 |
In Control Panel, you can see we've got a
category called User Accounts and Family Safety.
| | 00:23 |
So we'll go there.
| | 00:24 |
Now, at the very top, we have a
subcategory titled User Accounts and from here,
| | 00:29 |
we can do things like add
or remove user accounts.
| | 00:32 |
We could change some of the attributes,
such as pictures and passwords, but
| | 00:36 |
let's go right to the category User Accounts.
| | 00:39 |
Now, here you're going to see your own username.
| | 00:43 |
You'll see the type of privileges you
have as the Administrator, for example,
| | 00:47 |
and Password protected typically shows up
indicating you're using a password to log in.
| | 00:52 |
So, on the left-hand side, you can do
things to your own user account like
| | 00:56 |
change your password, remove it,
change the picture that appears next to your name,
| | 01:00 |
change your account name and your
account type as well, or if you prefer,
| | 01:05 |
go down to Manage another
account. Let's go there.
| | 01:09 |
Now it's from here where we
can create brand new accounts.
| | 01:12 |
For example, if you're using a home
PC, and you've got your own account,
| | 01:17 |
perhaps the children should have their
own login where they can go to see their
| | 01:21 |
own files, allowing you to control the type
of access the children's account will have.
| | 01:27 |
So I've already created this new account,
and you can see it's called Kids, and
| | 01:33 |
to make any changes or adjustments to
this account, we simply click the icon and
| | 01:37 |
we see the same list of
options we saw for our own accounts.
| | 01:41 |
So we can change the password and by
the way, if you change the password for
| | 01:45 |
another user account, you don't
need to know the current password.
| | 01:48 |
You just type in the new password
and a password hint, and off you go.
| | 01:52 |
You can also remove the password, so
the kids don't actually have to enter a
| | 01:56 |
password to login. The problem with
that is, of course, that anyone can
| | 02:00 |
login using that account.
| | 02:02 |
Let's go down to Change the account type.
| | 02:05 |
Now, probably if you're going to have a
separate account for separate users, you
| | 02:09 |
don't want them all to be administrators.
| | 02:11 |
In other words, you can see the two
options here are Standard user and
| | 02:15 |
Administrator, and Administrators like
yourself will have complete access to
| | 02:19 |
the computer and you could
make any changes you want.
| | 02:22 |
You can install programs.
| | 02:24 |
You can remove files, files that might
be important to running the computer, and
| | 02:29 |
this is something that any
administrator account will be able to do.
| | 02:32 |
So for the kids you might choose a
Standard user and it's almost the same as
| | 02:36 |
an administrator, but they're not
going to be able to do those installations.
| | 02:41 |
They're not going to be able to affect other
user accounts, only their own personal settings.
| | 02:45 |
So I'm going to click Change Account
Type and you can see now it's Standard user
| | 02:50 |
and it's Password protected.
| | 02:51 |
Now, at anytime you can also delete the
account, clicking Delete the account,
| | 02:55 |
of course, it's going to
require you to make some choices.
| | 02:59 |
You want to delete the files that
may have been created by this account.
| | 03:04 |
For example, if logging in, in the
Kid's account, Microsoft Word was used to
| | 03:08 |
create greeting cards,
| | 03:09 |
those files could also be deleted.
| | 03:11 |
You can keep the files.
| | 03:13 |
Or just cancel this whole thing altogether.
| | 03:15 |
So I'm going to click Cancel and
we are going to keep that account.
| | 03:18 |
There's one other type of
account that is available in Windows 7.
| | 03:22 |
That's the Guest account.
| | 03:24 |
So, if you have people who come up to
your computer, you've got people over, for
| | 03:28 |
example, who might want to use the
computer, you can create this Guest account.
| | 03:32 |
That's actually created for you.
| | 03:34 |
You can just turn it on or off and you
see here the Guest account is off, which
| | 03:38 |
by the way is the default.
| | 03:40 |
So, when we select Guest, our
only option here is to turn it on.
| | 03:44 |
Notice the information that
appears up top, just before we do that.
| | 03:48 |
If people don't have an account on this
computer they can use the Guest account
| | 03:52 |
to get into the computer, but any
password protected files and folders and any
| | 03:56 |
of your settings that you've set up as the
administrator will not be accessible to guest users.
| | 04:02 |
So they could, for example, open up
Internet Explorer and start browsing the web.
| | 04:07 |
We'll just turn that on so we've that option.
| | 04:09 |
Each time we log in now, we'll be able
to choose from any of these accounts.
| | 04:14 |
When you're done, all you do is close up
Control Panel and you're back to the Desktop.
| | 04:20 |
So, that's one way to keep your
computer secure by modifying the access
| | 04:25 |
that other user accounts have to the
various files, folders, and settings
| | 04:30 |
on the computer.
| | 04:31 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Streamlining passwords in Credential Manager| 00:00 | One big issue these days with regard
to computer security is the number of
| | 00:03 | passwords you may be required to remember.
| | 00:06 | Not only that, you may be required to
periodically change those passwords.
| | 00:11 | So remembering them becomes quite a chore.
| | 00:14 | Well, there's a feature in Windows 7
known as the Credential Manager that lets
| | 00:17 | you save your usernames and passwords
to help you log-on to websites, network
| | 00:22 | computers, and other resources,
automatically without having to type them in.
| | 00:26 | Now the concept is not really new,
but in Windows 7 you can also backup and
| | 00:30 | restore your Vault where
those credentials are stored.
| | 00:34 | So let's take a look at
the Credential Manager now.
| | 00:37 | In the Control panel, which you can
open up from your Windows Orb, click User
| | 00:41 | Accounts and Family Safety,
then click Credential Manager.
| | 00:45 | Now, here you are going to notice
several categories of credentials.
| | 00:48 | If you're using credentials to login to
Windows sites and network computers,
| | 00:53 | you might want to add a Windows Credential.
| | 00:57 | If it's one of those sites that
requires a security certificate, you can create
| | 01:01 | Certificate-Based credentials.
| | 01:03 | And for everything else,
there's Generic Credentials.
| | 01:07 | Let's test this out.
| | 01:08 | We'll click Add a generic credential.
| | 01:10 | You can add whatever you like.
| | 01:11 | If it's a Windows site, for
example, your Windows Live account,
| | 01:15 | home.live.com, you'd try that one.
| | 01:17 | I'm going to use an actual FTP
site that I access on a regular basis.
| | 01:22 | So, I type in the address here, and now
I'll type in the username and password I
| | 01:29 | use to access that site.
| | 01:31 | Once I get the password in here, and
click OK, I'll never have to enter that
| | 01:41 | information again when accessing
that FTP site. That's beautiful.
| | 01:46 | Let's test it out.
| | 01:47 | I'm going to click my Windows Explorer
button, and in the address field,
| | 01:52 | I'm going to type that exact same
address, the dropbox.lynda.com.
| | 01:57 | Typically, I'd be prompted now to enter
my username and my password, but you can
| | 02:02 | see it's actually busy now logging
me in to the FTP site, and eventually
| | 02:08 | depending on your connection to
the Internet, the speed will vary.
| | 02:11 | But I will see the contents of this FTP
site without having to remember or even
| | 02:16 | enter my username and password.
| | 02:19 | That's the beauty of the Credential Manager.
| | 02:22 | Keep in your mind that the Credential
Manager uses Windows Cardspace technology,
| | 02:27 | so when credentials are saved in the
Windows Vault, they can actually be backed
| | 02:31 | up and restored now to encrypted
Managed Information Card Files or MIC Files.
| | 02:36 | So I am going to just close this up.
| | 02:38 | You saw how easy that was.
| | 02:40 | Notice I also have the ability
to backup and restore my Vault.
| | 02:45 | So my Vault has a couple
of credentials in there now.
| | 02:48 | If I want to back that up--
and why would I want to do that?
| | 02:51 | A couple of different reasons.
| | 02:53 | One, I could, and this is the worst-case
scenario, crash my system. I've lost
| | 02:58 | everything, wiped the drive, and I
reinstall Windows 7, I wouldn't want to
| | 03:02 | have to type in all those usernames and
passwords again, I can just restore my card file.
| | 03:08 | So the first thing I need to do is back it up.
| | 03:11 | So Back up to. I click
Browse and I get to choose a location.
| | 03:15 | I am actually going to back it up to a
removable disk, so it's my USB drive,
| | 03:20 | which I can then unplug
and store in a safe location.
| | 03:23 | I'll give it a name.
| | 03:24 | I'm going to call it MyVault.
| | 03:27 | You can see it's a cardfile, and when
I click Save, the path appears here.
| | 03:34 | I click Next. The message is going
to tell me that I need to press down
| | 03:38 | Ctrl+Alt+Delete to continue.
| | 03:41 | So I'll do that now.
| | 03:43 | There we go, the backup was successful,
and I should probably take that USB
| | 03:47 | drive and store it in a safe location.
| | 03:49 | When I click Finish, I'm
back to my Credential Manager.
| | 03:53 | Now if you ever need to make changes,
for example, I'm told that I need to
| | 03:57 | create a new password to login.
| | 03:59 | Well, I can do it right from here.
| | 04:01 | That way I do it once and I
don't have to remember it after that.
| | 04:04 | Go down to my Generic Credentials here.
I can expand this by clicking the little
| | 04:08 | arrow that appears in the right-hand
side and if I need to, I can edit the
| | 04:13 | contents of this credential.
| | 04:15 | The other option is to remove it.
| | 04:17 | If I'm not using it any
longer, click Remove from Vault.
| | 04:20 | You'll need to confirm that by clicking
Yes and that removes it from your Vault.
| | 04:26 | If you like to use the Credential
Manager, Windows 7 now lets you backup
| | 04:30 | and restore your Vault.
| | 04:31 | It's a good option to have,
just in case of an emergency.
| | 04:35 | When you're done, close up your Control Panel.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Using parental controls to block unwanted content| 00:00 | If you have more than one user logging
in to a single computer and any of those
| | 00:05 | users are under the age of majority,
you might want to consider using parental
| | 00:10 | controls to control things like the
amount of time they can spend on the
| | 00:14 | computer, or on a specific program, or
the ratings for the games that they're
| | 00:18 | allowed to access, and so on.
| | 00:20 | They are called Parental Controls, and
we access them from the Control Panel
| | 00:23 | here under User Accounts and Family Safety.
| | 00:27 | Next, we'll click Parental Controls.
| | 00:29 | Now from here, you'll see a list of the
various user accounts on the computer.
| | 00:34 | If you want to set up controls for
someone who's not on this list, you actually
| | 00:37 | have to create a brand new account for them.
| | 00:40 | There's also options down below for
Windows Live Family Safety, something we're
| | 00:45 | going to talk about in the chapter
dealing with Windows Live Essentials.
| | 00:49 | So, if you've installed that, you
might see a little prompt here and there.
| | 00:53 | But let's go to manipulate the
parental controls for our Kids account.
| | 00:58 | If you've got another account that you
can work with and follow along with me,
| | 01:01 | great. Otherwise, sit back
and just watch and learn.
| | 01:05 | Notice this is the window that pops up
for Windows Live Family Safety filter,
| | 01:09 | and if I wanted to, I could login with
my Windows Live ID at this point and get
| | 01:14 | those additional options, but like I said,
we are going to talk about them later on.
| | 01:17 | So we'll just close this window.
| | 01:19 | Well, if you haven't installed Windows
Live Essentials, you won't even see it,
| | 01:22 | and this is the screen
you'll see in Control Panel.
| | 01:25 | Here's where we set up how kids
in this case will use the computer.
| | 01:29 | That's because we selected
the user account called Kids.
| | 01:32 | So the first thing we need to
do is turn-on Parental Controls.
| | 01:35 | That gives us access to the various
Windows Settings as well as these options on
| | 01:40 | the right for Time Limits,
Game Ratings, and Program Limits.
| | 01:44 | Let's start with Time limits.
| | 01:45 | We want to limit the amount of time or
when they can actually login to the computer.
| | 01:50 | So we'll choose Off by clicking it.
| | 01:53 | If you see a message dealing with FAT
drives, that's because you've got a drive
| | 01:59 | that's been formatted using this type of
partition, and if you wanted to control
| | 02:04 | any the games installed on a FAT
partition, you actually have to convert it to
| | 02:09 | NTFS but if you don't see that, great.
| | 02:12 | Otherwise, just keep that in
mind when it comes to Game Ratings.
| | 02:15 | Right now, we're just talking about when the
kids are going to be allowed to use this computer.
| | 02:20 | So right now, the white blocks that we
see across the board means that they are
| | 02:24 | allowed to use it at any time.
| | 02:27 | Well let's go in and block some time.
| | 02:29 | Perhaps, they should be doing
homework from 07:00 until 08:00 on weekdays.
| | 02:34 | So we'll go over here to the right-
hand side in PM, and we'll click next to
| | 02:38 | Monday between 7 and 8, we'll do
the same for the rest of the weekdays.
| | 02:43 | So, now they are blocked from logging in.
| | 02:44 | If they try to login during those
times, they'll be denied access.
| | 02:49 | And if there's any other time that you
want to make sure they're not logging in,
| | 02:55 | so some of these late hours, you can
also just click-and-drag to speed it up.
| | 02:59 | There we go, and when you're done, click OK.
| | 03:03 | And then you've set up the time limits.
| | 03:05 | You'll notice that it now appears as On.
| | 03:08 | Game Ratings, if we click Off,
can kids play games? Yes.
| | 03:14 | We can set Game Ratings by using
this link, and we can choose to block or
| | 03:18 | allow specific games.
| | 03:20 | Now I don't happen to have anything installed
here in the way of games, so it doesn't apply.
| | 03:24 | But here's where you go to select the various
games and setup Game Ratings. So, I'll click OK.
| | 03:31 | Program Limits as well, if we click off
here. Kids can use all programs is the default,
| | 03:36 | or you can choose to allow your kids
to only use the programs that you decide on.
| | 03:43 | So you can see it's going to take a
while here to locate all of the different
| | 03:47 | programs that are installed.
| | 03:48 | All you have to do is go through them,
and check off the ones that you think
| | 03:54 | that they should be allowed to use.
| | 03:55 | So, I am just going to scroll down here
to PowerPoint, select it, and OneNote,
| | 04:04 | and Microsoft Access, and click OK.
| | 04:08 | And those are the programs that
can be used, not the ones that can't.
| | 04:11 | Now our status has changed to On and
we've limited the actual programs that
| | 04:16 | they're able to access.
| | 04:18 | So here we got Time limits, Games,
Allow and block, the exact same thing.
| | 04:23 | Clicking these takes you to the
exact same spot as clicking On or Off on
| | 04:27 | the right-hand side.
| | 04:28 | So you can make changes from here as well.
| | 04:30 | I'm going to add some more and click OK.
| | 04:34 | When you're done, click OK and you got
your Parental Controls set up for the
| | 04:38 | selected user account.
| | 04:40 | You can now go to other user accounts,
and repeat the process, or simply close
| | 04:45 | up Control Panel if you're done
working with Parental Controls.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Securing drives with BitLocker Drive Encryption| 00:00 | By far one of the best methods for
securing a data drive is to encrypt it.
| | 00:05 | With encryption you render the drive
inaccessible without some type of access,
| | 00:09 | a password or a smart card, for example.
| | 00:12 | Well, in this lesson, we are going to
talk about BitLocker Drive Encryption
| | 00:15 | that's built into Windows 7 for
encrypting data drives and with BitLocker To Go,
| | 00:20 | now in Windows 7,
| | 00:22 | you can also apply encryption to
portable devices like a USB drive, for example.
| | 00:27 | On my screen here you can see the
BitLocker Drive Encryption window has popped up
| | 00:32 | because I've taken a USB device that
has BitLocker Drive Encryption already
| | 00:37 | built into it and I plugged it into my computer.
| | 00:40 | This shows up automatically.
| | 00:42 | This is the window that I would
use to unlock my particular device.
| | 00:47 | Notice that, in this case,
I would use a password.
| | 00:49 | Type the password to unlock the drive.
| | 00:51 | Then we'll have access to the encrypted drive.
| | 00:54 | It stays encrypted meaning if I unplug
it and take it to another computer, I'd
| | 00:58 | have to do the exact same thing to unlock it.
| | 01:01 | And then decrypting is a whole other
story that we'll talk about in a moment.
| | 01:05 | For now, I am going to just
take you to the Control Panel.
| | 01:09 | We'll click the Start button or Windows
orb, then Control Panel and under System
| | 01:13 | and Security, you'll find
BitLocker Drive Encryption.
| | 01:17 | We'll select that and here you'll see a
list of the drives on your computer and
| | 01:22 | you'll see the status whereas to whether
BitLocker Drive Encryption is turned on or off.
| | 01:27 | Now you'll see that I do have a drive
down below that has BitLocker turned-on
| | 01:33 | and that's why we see the gold padlock.
| | 01:35 | Not only it is encrypted, but it's
currently locked. I can't access it.
| | 01:39 | To unlock the drive, I could go back to
that window that appeared at the moment
| | 01:42 | I plugged it in or I can access it from here.
| | 01:45 | When you click Unlock Drive,
you'll see the exact same window.
| | 01:49 | So now to access the contents, all I
have to do is type in the password I used
| | 01:53 | when I encrypted it.
| | 01:55 | I have some other options as well.
| | 01:57 | I can show the password characters as
I type them because it's important you
| | 02:00 | remember your password and enter
correctly here so if want to see what you're
| | 02:04 | typing, click this checkbox.
| | 02:06 | I don't mind hiding it in case
someone's looking over my shoulder, and I can
| | 02:10 | also choose to automatically unlock
this particular device every time I use it
| | 02:14 | on this computer from now on.
| | 02:17 | Meaning I won't need the
password to access the files.
| | 02:20 | It'll still be an encrypted drive,
meaning if I take it to another computer,
| | 02:24 | I'll see the screen where I'll need
to enter the password to unlock it.
| | 02:27 | So I am going to choose that.
| | 02:29 | When I click Unlock, it just takes a
moment but you're going to see something
| | 02:33 | happen in the background.
| | 02:35 | That gold lock just turns to silver.
| | 02:37 | It's currently unlocked meaning I
can access it and that's why this
| | 02:40 | little window pops up.
| | 02:41 | All of a sudden it's as if I just plugged
the device in. I can scan the device or
| | 02:46 | continue without scanning and then from
AutoPlay, choose to open up the device
| | 02:50 | to view the files, pictures, etc.
| | 02:52 | But I am going to close that up.
| | 02:54 | You'll notice I have another device
plugged-in here. My device is labeled F:.
| | 02:59 | If you've got a USB drive that you want to
experiment with, go ahead and plug it in.
| | 03:03 | By default, BitLocker is not turned on.
| | 03:06 | So to turn on BitLocker, we actually go
to the right-hand side, select that and
| | 03:12 | depending on the size of the
drive, it could take quite a while.
| | 03:16 | Now I've got a fairly large USB
drive that I've plugged in here.
| | 03:19 | You can see it's busy initializing
the drive and then you're going to see a
| | 03:23 | progress bar telling you how much has
actually been encrypted and it will take
| | 03:28 | quite some time for
larger drives to be encrypted.
| | 03:31 | You might want to run this overnight,
for example, and in the morning you'll
| | 03:35 | have your encrypted drive.
| | 03:36 | Then you can choose how it is you want
to access the drive, whether it be with
| | 03:40 | password or a smart card, for example.
| | 03:42 | So I am going to left run in the
background and then I am going to click my
| | 03:46 | Control Panel to move back.
| | 03:47 | You can see it's still currently turned off.
| | 03:50 | During that progress while it's
initializing an encrypting, it does take a
| | 03:55 | lot of time for large drive, so you can pause
if you need to access the files and then resume.
| | 04:01 | So you're not rendering the
drive totally useless. Okay.
| | 04:04 | So here's the window that does
pop-up once it's been initialized.
| | 04:08 | How do you want to unlock the drive?
| | 04:10 | Well, you can use a password or if
you've got smart card technology built-in to
| | 04:14 | your computer, you can use that.
| | 04:15 | So you'd use a smart card
and a pin to unlock the drive.
| | 04:19 | I don't have that built-in so I am
going to use a password and I am going to
| | 04:23 | enter the password here twice.
| | 04:24 | Now we can't see what we are typing
here, so you need to retype it to ensure
| | 04:29 | you've typed it correctly both times.
| | 04:31 | When you click Next, it's going to take that.
| | 04:34 | Now the recovery key is
where your password is stored.
| | 04:38 | You can save it to a file or you
can print it out or you can do both.
| | 04:41 | You can save it and then later
print it out if you wanted to.
| | 04:44 | So I am going to save
the recovery key to a file.
| | 04:47 | When I select this, I need to choose where.
| | 04:50 | I am just going to put it on my Desktop.
| | 04:51 | You can see the name is quite
extensive here, and when I click Save, I can go
| | 04:56 | back and print again if I want
to have a printed copy as well.
| | 05:00 | You really need to make sure you don't
lose this password because without it
| | 05:04 | you can't access your drive once it's encrypted.
| | 05:06 | So I am going to click Next and then
it asks me if I'm ready to encrypt this drive.
| | 05:10 | I'll be able to unlock
it with the password later on.
| | 05:12 | It might take a while depending on
the size, I know, for a fact, that this
| | 05:16 | particular USB drive is quite large
and it's going to take several hours.
| | 05:21 | And until encryption is complete, your files
will not be protected so keep that in mind.
| | 05:25 | When you click Start Encrypting, there
is the progress bar I was talking about.
| | 05:30 | It's going to show up and in a moment,
| | 05:32 | you'll see that you have the ability to
pause this by clicking the Pause button
| | 05:37 | to access the files.
| | 05:38 | So although this may take hours, I can
actually get in there until it's fully
| | 05:43 | encrypted and access the files by using pause.
| | 05:45 | You don't want to unplug the
device while it's encrypting.
| | 05:48 | That can damage files and
you may lose some of your data.
| | 05:52 | So always use pause before you
remove the drive or access the files.
| | 05:57 | So I just sit here, letting this run.
| | 05:59 | When I go back to Control Panel,
you can see it's busy encrypting.
| | 06:02 | So I see the status right here
from Control Panel and at any time,
| | 06:06 | I can turn-off BitLocker.
| | 06:08 | This is not unlocking.
| | 06:09 | When you choose turn-off BitLocker you
decrypt the drive, meaning it's no longer
| | 06:14 | encrypted and you can take it to any computer.
| | 06:16 | You won't be prompted for a password.
| | 06:19 | So with BitLocker and BitLocker To Go,
you can ensure the security of your data
| | 06:25 | drives and even your
portable drives like a USB drive.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
9. Printing Printing files directly from Windows| 00:00 | When it's time to print a file, we
typically open up that file in its native
| | 00:04 | application and print from there.
| | 00:06 | For example, an Excel spreadsheet we'll
open it up in Microsoft Excel and we'll
| | 00:11 | use the print functionality
built into the menus of Excel.
| | 00:14 | Same thing goes for a Word document.
| | 00:16 | But we can save ourselves some steps by
printing directly from Windows and what
| | 00:21 | Windows 7 will do is temporarily launch
the application to print from there to
| | 00:26 | your default printer.
| | 00:27 | Let's test this out with some sample files.
| | 00:30 | You can see I have got the 09_01
subfolder of the Chap09 folder of the
| | 00:34 | Exercise Files open here.
| | 00:36 | I have got two different types of files.
| | 00:37 | One is a text document, the
other a Microsoft Excel spreadsheet.
| | 00:41 | So instead of opening up maybe Notepad
or WordPad, even Microsoft Word and then
| | 00:46 | opening up this document called VeggieStirfry,
I can print directly from Windows Explorer.
| | 00:52 | With the file selected, all I need to
do is either click the Print button, which
| | 00:57 | appears on the toolbar.
| | 00:58 | Notice the tooltip is saying it's
going to be sent to the printer.
| | 01:02 | It doesn't say default
printer but that's where it's going.
| | 01:04 | Same thing if I click File and choose Print.
| | 01:07 | So you want to be aware of your default printer.
| | 01:10 | To do that, we'll go down to the
Windows orb and select Devices and Printers.
| | 01:15 | So here you'll find a list of all the
devices connected including under the
| | 01:19 | Printers and Faxes section,
| | 01:21 | if you've got a fax, if you've got
multiple printers, you may even see things
| | 01:25 | like an XPS Document Writer, which
isn't a printer at all, but rather converts
| | 01:29 | your document to an XPS file
that can be printed anywhere.
| | 01:33 | And you'll notice for me, I've got my
HP Deskjet appearing with this green
| | 01:37 | circle and the checkmark in it,
meaning it is the default.
| | 01:41 | So to make any printer a default
printer just right-click and choose Set
| | 01:45 | as Default Printer.
| | 01:47 | I wanted to go back to my HP, so I am
going to right-click it and choose to set
| | 01:51 | it as the default printer.
| | 01:53 | So once you got the correct printer
selected, all you need to do is again select
| | 01:58 | the file in Windows Explorer and click Print.
| | 02:01 | Now you may have seen something
happened very quickly on the screen.
| | 02:06 | It looked like Notepad or WordPad
launched very quickly temporarily,
| | 02:11 | the document was sent to the
printer and then everything closed up.
| | 02:13 | So I didn't have to do that.
| | 02:15 | We'll see it better if we try to
print our Microsoft Excel spreadsheet.
| | 02:19 | So I am going to select it.
| | 02:22 | This time I'll go to File and choose Print.
| | 02:25 | That was very fast but our Excel
did launch for a split second and my
| | 02:29 | spreadsheet got sent-off to the printer.
| | 02:31 | Once it was sent, everything
closed up. Very fast and easy.
| | 02:35 | So you can save some time by not having
to open up the application, locate the file,
| | 02:39 | open it up, and then print from
there and then close everything down.
| | 02:43 | Print directly from Windows Explorer and
you'll save yourself a number of steps.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Troubleshooting printer problems| 00:00 | On the occasion when you go to print
a file and it just simply won't work,
| | 00:04 | you need to know how to troubleshoot the
problems and see what's going on with your printer.
| | 00:08 | We are going to explore a
couple of different methods here.
| | 00:11 | First, we're going to try
sending some files to our printer.
| | 00:14 | You can use the Exercise Files if you've got
them in the 09_02 subfolder of the Chap09 folder.
| | 00:20 | We've got a few here.
| | 00:21 | I've already tried to send one.
| | 00:22 | I am going to send the other two.
| | 00:24 | I am going to go to the Excel spreadsheet.
| | 00:26 | Select it by clicking and
then choose Print. Off it goes.
| | 00:31 | Same thing for the Annual
Report, a Word document.
| | 00:33 | It launches Word quickly, closes
it up after it sends to the printer.
| | 00:37 | And everything seems to be working
fine but as I look over to my printer,
| | 00:41 | nothing is coming out.
| | 00:43 | Well, sometimes what you will notice
if you happen to see it in the bottom
| | 00:47 | right-hand corner of your screen is this
little printer icon that appears on the Taskbar.
| | 00:52 | It'll show up there.
| | 00:53 | It'll flash sometimes very quickly and
disappear if everything is working fine.
| | 00:57 | But if everything is not working fine,
it will just stay there and as you hover
| | 01:00 | over it, you can see a little message,
in my case, three documents pending.
| | 01:04 | Well, we can get quick access to the
queue of files waiting to be printed by
| | 01:09 | double-clicking this and there they are.
| | 01:11 | There is the one I started with
before this movie began, my VeggieStirfry.
| | 01:17 | We can change the width of these
columns to see the full names or you can just
| | 01:21 | hover over them to see the full name
but there's the other two that didn't come
| | 01:24 | out because the first one is stuck.
| | 01:27 | Status says it's printing, everything
seems to be okay, except if I look at the
| | 01:31 | title bar my printer seems to be out of paper.
| | 01:35 | Well, we can do things from this queue.
| | 01:37 | For example, if we no longer want to
print the Microsoft Word document, maybe
| | 01:41 | we sent it to another printer
or somebody else printed it.
| | 01:44 | Right-click and you have got some options.
| | 01:46 | From the pop-up menu, you can pause this.
| | 01:49 | You can restart it, cancel it
altogether or access the properties for
| | 01:54 | that particular file.
| | 01:56 | I am going to choose Cancel, which
I'll need to confirm by clicking Yes.
| | 02:00 | It's no longer going to be sent to the printer.
| | 02:02 | It's as if I never
printed it in the first place.
| | 02:05 | Let's say if the other two
in the queue for a moment and explore
| | 02:08 | another way to get printer information.
| | 02:10 | That's from your Devices and Printers.
| | 02:13 | Select the Windows orb and
choose Devices and Printers.
| | 02:18 | Now here you are going to see all your
devices again, including your printers.
| | 02:21 | The printer that was set up as the
default in the previous lesson no longer
| | 02:25 | shows a green circle with a
checkmark but rather this warning sign.
| | 02:29 | As we hover over you can see the status,
there are two documents in the queue in
| | 02:32 | the printer is out of paper.
| | 02:34 | So I see that just by hovering over.
| | 02:35 | And we talked about something in the
previous lesson known as Device Stage.
| | 02:40 | When you plug in a new device,
drivers are automatically searched for by
| | 02:43 | Windows, and installed for you, and
the device should be up and running.
| | 02:47 | Many devices have a device stage interface.
| | 02:50 | In other words, manufacturers have
provided Microsoft with extra tools and
| | 02:56 | a user interface for working with that
device and it just so happens,
| | 02:59 | my HP Deskjet is one of them.
| | 03:01 | So if I was to select this,
I get information down below.
| | 03:05 | If I double-click, I am
going to open up that interface.
| | 03:09 | So here is another way to see what's going on.
| | 03:11 | For example, my printer is out of paper.
| | 03:14 | Now if I select this or where it says
2 document(s) in the queue, I am going
| | 03:19 | to access that same queue I just had a
moment ago that I accessed from my status bar.
| | 03:24 | If I choose Paper out, sure
enough it says out of paper at the top.
| | 03:28 | I need to go fill it up with some paper.
| | 03:30 | I can close that up.
| | 03:31 | We'll see the exact same information from here.
| | 03:34 | Here, I'm going to see some
of the settings for the file.
| | 03:38 | If I choose Letter,Portrait in this case,
you can see I'm taken directly to the
| | 03:42 | Paper/Quality tab of my Printing
Preferences so I can make changes here.
| | 03:47 | For example, I can change it
from Letter to another paper size.
| | 03:51 | This is while it's still waiting to be
printed and that's a nice little feature.
| | 03:55 | I am going to click Cancel.
| | 03:56 | Now down below, we can also access the
queue by choosing See What's Printing.
| | 04:03 | Now one-click only selects it.
| | 04:05 | Double-clicking, it's going
to open up that same queue.
| | 04:09 | Customizing your printer and adjusting
printer options allows you to get into
| | 04:13 | the printer's properties.
| | 04:14 | If I double-click Adjust Print Options,
you can see it's the Paper/Quality tab
| | 04:20 | again that's selected here in my
Printing Preferences. I'll close that up.
| | 04:24 | If I double-click Customize Your
Printer, again, I am at the HP Deskjet
| | 04:29 | properties and the General tab is selected.
| | 04:32 | Here I can change the name of it and I can
go to any one of these other tabs as well.
| | 04:37 | And I am just going to cancel this.
| | 04:39 | We don't really need to
do any of that right now.
| | 04:41 | All right, so now we added
some paper to the printer.
| | 04:44 | You can see what's happening.
| | 04:46 | You can see 2 document(s) in the queue still.
| | 04:48 | Printer is now ready.
| | 04:50 | It's not out of paper.
| | 04:51 | Now we are down to 1 document(s) in
the queue and as my printer continues to
| | 04:55 | print out the various copies of my
files, I'll see the status has changed,
| | 05:00 | right here from the screen and at anytime, I can
access any of those properties and preferences.
| | 05:05 | But when we are done, simply close
it up and we can close up the Windows
| | 05:10 | Explorer with our files and
allow the printer to do its thing.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Printing power tips| 00:00 | In this lesson were going to explore a
couple of printing tips that will help
| | 00:03 | you in a couple of scenarios that come
across on a regular basis in my travels.
| | 00:09 | One is printing offline.
| | 00:11 | Let's say you are traveling, maybe you
are up in an airplane and you have got a
| | 00:15 | document or series of
documents that need to be printed.
| | 00:18 | Of course you are not connected. How
are you going to remember when you get
| | 00:21 | back to the office or back home and connect
your printer, to send those off to your printer?
| | 00:26 | Well, the trick is to print offline.
| | 00:28 | The other scenario are going to explore
is how to print in pure black-and-white.
| | 00:33 | I have seen it happen so many times.
| | 00:35 | Maybe you're printing to a printer that
has two cartridges, a color cartridge and a
| | 00:40 | black cartridge and even though you are
selecting black-and-white, it's trying
| | 00:44 | to use the color cartridge.
| | 00:45 | The color cartridge is running out
of ink and you're getting a faded and
| | 00:49 | blurry looking picture.
| | 00:50 | So, we re going to explore a pure black-and-
white printing, as well as printing offline.
| | 00:54 | Let's go to that first
scenario. We're up in an airplane.
| | 00:57 | We have got a document that we need to print.
| | 00:59 | We're not connected, but we don't
want to forget when we get back and are
| | 01:02 | connected to our printer to print it out.
| | 01:05 | Well, to do that we change
your printer status to offline.
| | 01:08 | So, here I am in Devices and Printers
right from my Windows Start button or
| | 01:13 | Windows orb, and you can choose any link
you like to get to the queue. I m going
| | 01:17 | to choose See what's
printing with a double-click.
| | 01:20 | Nothing is printing of course, but
here's where I go. Click the Printer menu to
| | 01:24 | choose Use Printer Offline.
| | 01:27 | So, I can use the printer as if
I'm connected even though I'm not.
| | 01:31 | So I'll leave the queue open
here and we will go to print a file.
| | 01:35 | Now if you got the Exercise Files,
you can follow along with me in the
| | 01:38 | 09_03 subfolder of Chapter 09 and with the
VeggieStirfry document selected, click Print.
| | 01:46 | So off it goes to the default printer.
We see it now in the queue when we switch over.
| | 01:51 | Look at the status. There's nothing there.
| | 01:53 | When we get back to the office or back
home and plug into our printer and set
| | 01:58 | this back online, so
let's say that's happened now.
| | 02:01 | Fast forward, we click Printer.
| | 02:03 | Turn off the Printer Offline
feature by selecting it again.
| | 02:07 | You can see it's printing, off it
goes to the printer and I am done.
| | 02:10 | I didn't forget that I had
to print that when I got back.
| | 02:13 | Close up the queue. Alright, now we
are going to talk about printing in pure
| | 02:17 | black-and-white. Now this will only
apply to you if you're using an Inkjet type
| | 02:23 | printer that uses a color cartridge
and a black cartridge, and it means
| | 02:27 | selecting the printer's properties.
| | 02:29 | So we are going to close up Windows Explorer
and here where it says Adjust Print Options.
| | 02:34 | You'll notice down below that includes
changing color, layout and paper settings.
| | 02:38 | Color is exactly what we want.
| | 02:40 | So I'm going to double-
click Adjust Printer Options.
| | 02:44 | That's going to take me to this
screen where I do have a Color tab.
| | 02:49 | Now I want to print in pure black-and-white.
| | 02:52 | So if I choose Print in
Grayscale, I have got two options.
| | 02:56 | Here's where most people stop. They click OK.
| | 02:59 | High quality is exactly what they want.
| | 03:01 | There's the preview, they click OK and
off it goes and even though we're not
| | 03:06 | using the color cartridge for our
selections here the printer may try to use
| | 03:12 | the color to create a high-quality
grayscale and the print job comes out
| | 03:17 | looking a little bit shoddy.
| | 03:18 | So the best option is to
choose black print cartridge only.
| | 03:23 | Now all printers are different, so if
you don't have an HP printer your options
| | 03:27 | may be hidden somewhere else under the
Color section, but there should be an
| | 03:31 | option to only use that black print cartridge.
| | 03:34 | Once you have got that
selected, you can click OK.
| | 03:38 | So, with that selected now anything
we print is going to print in pure
| | 03:42 | black-and-white only using the
ink from the black cartridge.
| | 03:45 | When we are done with all of our settings,
we can close up our Control Panel and
| | 03:50 | there is a couple of tips that will
help you in two very popular scenarios when
| | 03:54 | it comes to printing.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Printing to and viewing the XPS file format| 00:00 | When you want to create secure
documents that cannot be changed without special
| | 00:05 | permissions, one option is to save
your document using the XPS format.
| | 00:09 | That stands for XML Paper Specification.
| | 00:13 | You could consider this to be
Microsoft's answer to the PDF,
| | 00:16 | the Portable Document format.
| | 00:18 | While in Windows Vista, you had to use
Internet Explorer to view such a file.
| | 00:22 | Here in Windows 7 not only can you
save your files to the XPS format, but
| | 00:28 | there's also a dedicated XPS viewer
built into Windows 7 for viewing these
| | 00:32 | types of documents.
| | 00:33 | So let's check it out.
| | 00:34 | Here in the 09_04 subfolder of the
Chapter 9 folder of the Exercise Files, if
| | 00:39 | you got them, we have a couple of files.
| | 00:41 | One is a Microsoft Excel file.
| | 00:42 | The other is an XPS document.
| | 00:45 | We can see that in the Type column.
| | 00:47 | So, if we double-click an XPS file,
you'll notice by default the XPS Viewer in
| | 00:53 | Windows 7 is used to display it.
| | 00:56 | So we can scroll down.
| | 00:58 | We can view the contents, but as
soon as we try to click inside and start
| | 01:03 | typing, doesn't work. Double-clicking
zooms us in, moves us around, but
| | 01:08 | we can't make changes to this document.
| | 01:11 | You can see up at the top, we do have
some dropdown buttons, so here if we click File,
| | 01:15 | we can open another file up.
| | 01:18 | We can see this as another format, we
can print it out, we can exit the viewer
| | 01:23 | altogether, we can go to Permissions
to set permissions or view your own
| | 01:27 | permissions, if you've
received this from someone else.
| | 01:30 | You really don't have an option and
signatures is another way to secure document.
| | 01:34 | You can sign it
electronically using the XPS Viewer.
| | 01:37 | Some cool features built right into Windows 7.
| | 01:41 | So, let's close this up.
| | 01:43 | How do we create these now?
| | 01:44 | Well, it's a simple matter of
printing to the XPS Writer. So,
| | 01:49 | we do that by setting up our
default printer to be the XPS Writer.
| | 01:53 | We will go down to Windows orb and
select Devices and Printers and make sure
| | 01:58 | Microsoft XPS Document Writer gets
the green circle with the checkmark.
| | 02:02 | To do that, just right click
and choose Set as default printer.
| | 02:07 | Now when we go to print from Windows,
that's where it's going, to the document writer.
| | 02:11 | Let's go back to Windows Explorer,
select our Excel spreadsheet, which is a
| | 02:16 | hockey schedule, and when we
click Print, watch what happens.
| | 02:20 | It automatically opens up in Microsoft Excel
and it's trying to save it as an XPS document.
| | 02:28 | So, this is what we would had to
be manually without this feature.
| | 02:31 | We will click down below where the
filename appears and just take out the
| | 02:34 | asterisk, the wild card and
type in our own name here.
| | 02:38 | Let's try schedule and click Save.
| | 02:43 | Finishes off the job, closes up Excel
and you can see we have got a new file now
| | 02:47 | in our folder called
Schedule and it's an XPS document.
| | 02:50 | So, double-clicking it allows me to get
into the schedule, but it doesn't allow
| | 02:54 | me to go in and make
alterations to the schedule. Very secure.
| | 03:00 | Close it up and we will close up our
Devices page as well and let's close up
| | 03:05 | Windows Explorer and there's how we
convert to XPS and view XPS type files.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
10. Backing Up and TroubleshootingFinding issues in the Troubleshooting control panel| 00:00 | If you are experiencing any type of
issue with your computer, whether it be
| | 00:03 | software or hardware related,
| | 00:05 | Windows 7 includes a number of
troubleshooting tools to help you find and even
| | 00:09 | fix some of those problems.
| | 00:10 | So let's explore that now.
| | 00:12 | We'll locate it in the Control Panel by
clicking the Windows orb or Start button.
| | 00:17 | And we can go directly to the Control
Panel, but I like to use the Search field.
| | 00:21 | I want to troubleshoot.
| | 00:22 | So I am going to type in the word trouble.
| | 00:24 | Let's see what happens.
| | 00:25 | Well off the top, we have got a
number of troubleshooting options to choose
| | 00:28 | from under the Control Panel heading.
| | 00:30 | And as I scroll down, you will
notice I've got troubleshooting here to
| | 00:34 | troubleshoot and fix common computer problems.
| | 00:36 | That's probably good.
| | 00:37 | First, look at these icons that
look like little flags or pennants and
| | 00:41 | those represent options you'll find in the
Action Center like Fix problems with your computer.
| | 00:46 | We have seen that in a previous lesson.
| | 00:48 | A little further down, I
have got Find and fix problems.
| | 00:52 | The neat thing about this is
when you make a selection,
| | 00:54 | you can go to any of these other
selections from the screen you choose.
| | 00:58 | Watch what happens, for example, if we
go to the Action Center by clicking Fix
| | 01:03 | problems with your computer.
| | 01:05 | Well, I need to setup Windows Update.
| | 01:07 | The red bar indicates this is important.
| | 01:09 | Under Maintenance, I need to set up
some backup options and you can see the
| | 01:12 | yellow bar representing this is not
quite as important but it's still an
| | 01:16 | issue I need to resolve.
| | 01:18 | Anything in green would be fixed.
| | 01:19 | I don't see any of that.
| | 01:21 | But further down, I do see
a link to troubleshooting.
| | 01:24 | There's that Find and fix problems option
I saw a moment ago from the Start menu.
| | 01:28 | So I am going to choose
Troubleshooting from here.
| | 01:30 | Here is where I go to troubleshoot
computer problems, and this is the equivalent
| | 01:34 | of choosing Find and fix problems.
| | 01:37 | And I've got a number of
different categories to choose from.
| | 01:39 | So, if it's a problem with
software, you can see under Programs.
| | 01:43 | If I need to run programs made for
previous versions of Windows, here's where I go.
| | 01:47 | I have got hardware and sound issues,
network and Internet issues. They often pop up.
| | 01:52 | Maybe it is the problem with the
way things appear on my screen.
| | 01:55 | So I can go into any of these
sections or go directly to a subcategory by
| | 02:00 | clicking the link down below.
| | 02:01 | So let's say the scenario is I have
got my headphones plugged in but I don't
| | 02:05 | hear any audio coming through.
| | 02:07 | In this case, I want to go to hardware
and sound, and look at that. I have got a
| | 02:10 | link to take me directly to
troubleshoot audio playbacks.
| | 02:13 | I am going to select that one.
| | 02:14 | It takes me to a little wizard for
playing audio and all I need to do is click
| | 02:18 | Next to go to the first step,
which is detecting problems.
| | 02:21 | The first question is what type of
device do I want to troubleshoot because
| | 02:25 | I have got speakers attached? And you can
see the radio button for that is selected.
| | 02:29 | It also tells me as I hover over it that this
connector appears on the back of my computer.
| | 02:33 | So it knows what I've got.
| | 02:36 | Let's just move away and
hover on that again. Here it is.
| | 02:39 | If I go down below further, Speakers -
High Definition Audio Device. I might
| | 02:43 | have one plugged-in but
there's no jack information for that.
| | 02:46 | And then, down below there is Headphones,
and you can see down below where it says,
| | 02:50 | The connector for this device is
located on the front of the computer.
| | 02:54 | So, it knows my machine and
that's where I'm having the issue.
| | 02:57 | So I'm going to select that
radio button and click Next.
| | 03:00 | Now it starts detecting the
problem and it would appear that I haven't
| | 03:03 | plugged-in the connection, and if I
look at the front of the computer,
| | 03:07 | it looks like I plugged it in.
| | 03:09 | I am going to go and give it an extra
little push to see if it is not all the way in.
| | 03:13 | All right, so it was a little bit
loose, so I gave it a tap and it's pushed
| | 03:17 | all the way in now.
| | 03:18 | So, when I click Next to move on,
it starts detecting again.
| | 03:22 | So, it does another analysis and
you can see the problem was found.
| | 03:27 | It wasn't plugged-in. Now it's fixed.
| | 03:30 | I see the green circle with the check mark.
| | 03:32 | That means everything is good to go.
| | 03:34 | I can click Close and sure enough, I am hearing
all of the audio coming out of the headphones.
| | 03:39 | So, finding and fixing problems with
the troubleshooter is an excellent way to
| | 03:45 | get a lot of help from Windows itself
in not only recognizing the issue, but
| | 03:50 | helping you correct that issue as well.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Sharing issues with the Problem Steps Recorder| 00:00 | On those occasions when you are unable
to resolve a computer issue yourself,
| | 00:04 | you may need to solicit outside help.
| | 00:07 | The most difficult thing is to describe
what's going on on your screen to that third party.
| | 00:11 | So here in Windows 7, we're going to
explore the Problem Steps Recorder that
| | 00:16 | takes screen shots and allows a third
party to see exactly what's going on on
| | 00:20 | your screen to better help you.
| | 00:22 | So let's go to the Control Panel.
| | 00:24 | I've already opened it up and
click Find and fix problems.
| | 00:27 | So we have gone through the typical steps
and we're not able to resolve the issues.
| | 00:31 | So you will notice on the left-hand side
in the Navigation pane here, we've got
| | 00:35 | Get help from a friend.
| | 00:36 | There are some different ways to do that.
| | 00:38 | There is Remote Assistance, but down
below you'll notice that we can record a
| | 00:42 | problem that we are having with this computer.
| | 00:45 | So we click the Problems Steps Recorder link.
| | 00:48 | And all that does is it opens up
little window that has a record button and a
| | 00:52 | couple other options for
adding comments and so on.
| | 00:55 | Well, let's close up the
Troubleshooter and let's say we want to record the
| | 00:57 | issue we are having.
| | 00:58 | We are trying to connect to a
remote Desktop and it's just not working.
| | 01:02 | So we can start right from
here. Click Start Record.
| | 01:06 | Now everything you do is being recorded.
| | 01:08 | So each click displays a new screen shot.
| | 01:11 | So we will click the Start button or
Windows orb, we will go to All Programs and
| | 01:16 | we'll go to Accessories and
there is Remote Desktop Connection.
| | 01:21 | Now at any time we can add a comment.
| | 01:23 | So let's click Remote
Desktop Connection. It shows up.
| | 01:27 | Let's add a comment.
| | 01:30 | When this window opens, I don't
have any preset options to choose from.
| | 01:42 | So I will click OK.
| | 01:43 | The comment has been added.
| | 01:46 | Now I am just going to move the
recorder out the away a little bit here.
| | 01:49 | Click the dropdown and there it is.
| | 01:51 | I have got no options to
choose from and this is my issue.
| | 01:54 | I am trying to get some help here.
| | 01:56 | So I can add another comment or
they have already read the comment that
| | 01:59 | there's nothing here. Click it again.
| | 02:02 | Now I am going to stop the recording.
| | 02:03 | Now as soon as I do that, it's
going to save this as a zip file.
| | 02:08 | So it's easy to send via e-mail for example.
| | 02:10 | We just put it right on the Desktop.
| | 02:12 | If you haven't selected Desktop, go
ahead and do that and the name RemoteIssue
| | 02:18 | and when we click Save, we are going to
see that appear on the Desktop and all
| | 02:23 | we need to do now is attach it to an e-
mail, if we wanted to or just send it off
| | 02:27 | to somebody on the network by copying it over.
| | 02:30 | When they receive it, they double-click,
opens up the zip file and they'll see
| | 02:35 | the problem and the number.
| | 02:36 | Double-clicking this will actually
launch their default browser where they
| | 02:40 | can display the steps.
| | 02:41 | So we double-click and
here's the recorded problem steps.
| | 02:45 | So as I scroll down, you can see
there is our first screen. There is no
| | 02:48 | comment attached to that.
| | 02:50 | So I am going to All Programs.
| | 02:52 | I am going to Accessories > Remote
Desktop Connection, there is the comment and
| | 02:58 | this window opens I don't have
any preset options to choose from.
| | 03:01 | You can see there's me clicking that dropdown.
| | 03:04 | That's what I see and that's the end of it.
| | 03:08 | So the person who is troubleshooting
this, maybe it's a customer service type agent,
| | 03:12 | has a lots of information.
| | 03:14 | You can see all the different clicks
and so on in text format as well as
| | 03:18 | those screen shots above.
| | 03:19 | This is all thanks to the
Problem Steps Recorder.
| | 03:23 | So once they have got this and they
know what is going on, they might be better
| | 03:27 | able to help me out.
| | 03:28 | I am going to close up these windows.
| | 03:30 | I am even going to close up my Remote Desktop.
| | 03:32 | And when you are done with the Problem
Steps Recorder you can click the Close
| | 03:35 | button in the top right-corner.
| | 03:38 | So on those occasions when you need to
get some help from somebody outside, then
| | 03:43 | it might be a good idea to record
what's going on, get those screen shots and
| | 03:48 | add comments where necessary to give
the person helping you the full picture,
| | 03:53 | allowing them to be better able to help you out.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Backing up folders and drives| 00:00 | Windows 7 is an extremely
stable operating system.
| | 00:03 | Nevertheless, anything can happen,
and it may be important to back up your
| | 00:08 | files and your drives.
| | 00:09 | Think about physical
damage for example, like fire.
| | 00:13 | Well, we are going to explore different
ways to back up your individual files,
| | 00:17 | folders, and even entire drives.
| | 00:19 | You can see I've already
opened up Control Panel.
| | 00:21 | So if you would like to follow along.
| | 00:22 | We are going to go to the System and
Security category, where we'll find the
| | 00:26 | link to back-up your computer.
| | 00:28 | Now, when we select that, we're going
to see a number of different options.
| | 00:32 | For example, on the left hand side,
we can create system images and system
| | 00:36 | repair discs and those
are ideal for fatal crashes.
| | 00:39 | We'll talk about that in an upcoming lesson.
| | 00:42 | Over here on the right hand side we
have a Backup and Restore section.
| | 00:46 | Under Backup you'll see whether or
not Windows has already been set up to
| | 00:50 | back up your files.
| | 00:51 | If not, you can access Set up backup
directly from this link on the right-hand side
| | 00:56 | or as we saw in an earlier
lesson from the Action Center.
| | 01:00 | If we go to the Action Center, here
under Security and Maintenance, you'll see a
| | 01:05 | couple of different messages
if you haven't set your backup.
| | 01:07 | For example, under maintenance, Set up
backup shows up with this yellow bar.
| | 01:12 | It's fairly important to set this up
and if its not, it shows up as not a major
| | 01:18 | issue but an issue nonetheless.
| | 01:20 | So here is that button again
that can help us to set up a backup.
| | 01:24 | So when we click this button, we'll
see a little window up here asking us,
| | 01:29 | where do we want to save our backup?
| | 01:31 | And you may have internal drives.
| | 01:33 | You may see network drives if you're
connected to a network and you may also see
| | 01:38 | removable drives, if you've connected them.
| | 01:40 | I am going to choose my removable disk.
| | 01:42 | The only thing with a removable disk,
as you'll see down below, is other people
| | 01:45 | might be able to access
your backup on this location.
| | 01:48 | If you're okay with that, click Next.
| | 01:51 | Now you get to choose the type of backup.
| | 01:54 | One option is to let Windows choose
what's going to happen and it's going
| | 01:58 | to backup your data file and libraries on
the desktop and in default windows folders.
| | 02:04 | And all of these items will be
backed up on a regular schedule.
| | 02:07 | You get to choose the schedule.
| | 02:09 | Or if you need to able to modify what
Windows chooses for you, select the radio
| | 02:14 | button next to Let me choose.
| | 02:16 | That way you can select the libraries and
folders, even a system image if you want it to.
| | 02:21 | So let's go with Let me choose,
so we can see all of the options.
| | 02:24 | When we click Next, you're going to
see checkmarks next to various libraries,
| | 02:28 | folders, and even drives, where you
can choose to select or deselect what's
| | 02:35 | going to be backed up.
| | 02:36 | Now, some of these will be able to
expand. For example, under David's Libraries here,
| | 02:41 | I got a little arrow and when I click that,
| | 02:43 | you can see my Documents, Music, Pictures etc,
all checked off and ready to be backed up.
| | 02:48 | If I choose to back up my entire C
drive, I can click the checkbox there or
| | 02:54 | deselect and just expand, to go
down through the various folders that I
| | 02:58 | might want to back up.
| | 03:00 | Let's say the Exercise Files for example.
| | 03:03 | Then I am going to deselect Kid's
Libraries and I am going to deselect Back up
| | 03:08 | data for newly created users.
| | 03:10 | So user account
information can also be backed up.
| | 03:13 | And I don't need my Videos and Pictures.
| | 03:18 | Let's just leave it with Documents and down
below the Exercise Files to keep it simple.
| | 03:23 | When I click Next, you'll notice a
summary of the things that have been
| | 03:27 | chosen and not chosen.
| | 03:29 | And if you are good with that, you can
save the settings and run your backup.
| | 03:34 | So I am going to choose Save settings
and run backup and you can see I've got
| | 03:39 | a different looking window
here. My backup is in progress.
| | 03:43 | You can see the location where it's
going to, in this case my removable drive,
| | 03:47 | and then down below you can see some
information of about your next backup,
| | 03:52 | last backup, and so on.
| | 03:54 | Now this may take a while to back up
everything to my external drive that I have plugged in.
| | 03:59 | But I can come back to this window, Backup
and Restore, at any time to see the latest.
| | 04:04 | Now, down below you can see the Schedule
set by default to, Every Sunday at 7:00 PM.
| | 04:09 | Now, once this backup has completed we
can go in here and change the settings.
| | 04:13 | For example, if you wanted to change
the day of the week, the time, even the
| | 04:18 | frequency of the backup.
| | 04:20 | So let's give it a moment to finish up
and then we'll check out those settings.
| | 04:24 | All right, so there we go.
| | 04:26 | We can see how much has been backed up,
and what kind of space we have left.
| | 04:31 | You can see the next backup is
scheduled for me on 20th September.
| | 04:36 | You'll see a different date in there for sure.
| | 04:38 | And down below there is Change settings link,
which is now active, and we can select it.
| | 04:42 | So let's go there.
| | 04:43 | All right, so this is the
initial window that we saw originally.
| | 04:47 | Where we got to choose our location, etc.
| | 04:50 | So here we see our different locations.
I am going to choose the Removable Disk.
| | 04:54 | That's fine. I am going to
keep that and click Next.
| | 04:58 | Now I get to again let windows choose
how my files are going to be backed up
| | 05:03 | or I can choose myself.
| | 05:05 | I am going to keep that selected.
| | 05:07 | I get to go in, and maybe add or
remove some of the different locations if I
| | 05:11 | wanted to, and you can see there's
quite a bit to choose from here, everything
| | 05:15 | possible, and I am going
to leave everything as is.
| | 05:17 | Click Next and change this schedule from here.
| | 05:21 | So here you can see, the
backup is run on a schedule.
| | 05:24 | That's the default. How often?
| | 05:25 | Every week and there is
the default day and time.
| | 05:28 | I might want to change that to monthly.
I don't need it every week, and on what
| | 05:32 | day is not available, because it's now monthly.
| | 05:35 | If I click this, I can
choose the day of the month.
| | 05:38 | I am going to choose the last day of the
month. Sometimes it's a 30th, sometimes
| | 05:42 | the 31st, sometimes, 29 or 28.
| | 05:45 | So by choosing Last day, it will always
be the last date of month, and I would
| | 05:48 | rather have this happen when
I am not using the computer.
| | 05:51 | So I am going to choose a time like 2
in the morning, and then when I click OK,
| | 05:57 | those settings will be saved, the
moment I click Save settings and the exit.
| | 06:01 | Notice it doesn't say run, because I
just ran one. It's going to run at the end
| | 06:06 | of the month when I click
Save settings and the exit.
| | 06:10 | So that's the automatic backup options,
where you get to pick and choose what's
| | 06:14 | going to be backed up.
| | 06:15 | You can even choose the frequency,
and when it's going to be backed up.
| | 06:18 | Of course, remember you can always
choose where your files are going to be
| | 06:21 | backed up, and you can change any of
those settings from the Change settings
| | 06:25 | link right here on the Backup
or restore your files page.
| | 06:28 | So once you backed up, if something
does happen, we need to know how to restore
| | 06:33 | our files and that's what we are
going to do in the next lesson.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Restoring files and drives| 00:00 | Once you have set up Windows 7 to
back up your files, folders, even your drives,
| | 00:04 | and at least one backup has been
performed like we did in the previous lesson,
| | 00:09 | you'll then have something to restore in
the event something bad should happened.
| | 00:13 | Now, hopefully you'll never use to your
backup files. But files, folders, even
| | 00:18 | drives can get corrupted, or
it could be physical damage.
| | 00:22 | Let's go through this scenario no,
where maybe a folder full of files has been
| | 00:27 | corrupted somehow and we need to
get back to that folder full of files.
| | 00:31 | In this case, we come back to our
Control Panel under System and Security.
| | 00:35 | We go to the Backup and Restore section.
| | 00:37 | That's where we left off in the previous
lesson, if you were following along with me.
| | 00:42 | Now we're going to the bottom of
this screen to find the Restore section.
| | 00:46 | And the simplest way to start the
restoration of your files or folders is to
| | 00:50 | click the Restore my files button.
| | 00:52 | You've also got links though that
will set up some of the options for you
| | 00:56 | automatically, like Restore all user files.
| | 00:58 | That means everything for all of the
different users, not just you, that were
| | 01:03 | backed up, will be restored, or you can
select another backup to restore files from.
| | 01:07 | Maybe it's a previous backup that
was performed a week ago, a month ago
| | 01:11 | perhaps, and you want to restore to that point.
| | 01:14 | But we can choose those
options from here as well.
| | 01:17 | Let's go to Restore my files.
| | 01:19 | Notice that we can choose a
different date, right up here from the top.
| | 01:22 | Otherwise we are restoring
files from the latest version.
| | 01:26 | But if you want to choose a different date,
click the link, and go back to a previous backup.
| | 01:31 | Once it's selected, you click OK.
| | 01:33 | But I am going to click Cancel.
| | 01:34 | I want the last backup or update to be restored.
| | 01:38 | Now it's just a matter of
choosing what's going to be restored.
| | 01:41 | And if we have chosen all of our user
files, that would have been the default.
| | 01:44 | But notice down below, there is an area here
| | 01:46 | that's just waiting for us to list
the files or folders to be restored.
| | 01:51 | If you want to be able to select
individual files, you'll choose the Browse
| | 01:55 | for files button here.
| | 01:56 | But if you want the entire folders and
you're not concerned with the individual files,
| | 02:00 | choose Browse for folders.
| | 02:02 | That's what I am going to choose.
| | 02:03 | And you can see I've got a folder here,
my Backup of the C drive, and if I
| | 02:07 | double-click that, I can go to specific folders.
| | 02:10 | If I double-click Exercise Files, I've got a
number of folders to choose from here as well.
| | 02:16 | But if I go inside a folder,
let's say the Lesson10 folder,
| | 02:20 | notice that I can't choose individual files.
| | 02:23 | It's just entire folders and down below,
there is a button for adding folders.
| | 02:27 | So we can use the back button to go back
to the level where we want to restore to.
| | 02:32 | I am going to choose just the
Exercise Files. That's the folder that got
| | 02:35 | corrupted let's say, and then
down below I'll click Add folder.
| | 02:40 | It gets added to my list and all I
have to do now is choose some additional
| | 02:44 | folders or files if I need to.
| | 02:46 | But once my list is complete, I can go down to
the Next button to move on to the next step.
| | 02:53 | Where do I want these files or folders to go?
| | 02:55 | They can go to the original location,
which is the default, or if you want to
| | 02:58 | put them somewhere else, you can
choose In the following location and then
| | 03:03 | choose the location.
| | 03:04 | I am going to click Browse and I am
going to put it right to my Desktop.
| | 03:08 | So under the C drive, I am going to go
down to Users, click the little arrow
| | 03:13 | next to my name to expand
that, and choose my Desktop.
| | 03:17 | Notice you can even make a
new folder if you wanted too.
| | 03:19 | I am going to click OK
with the Desktop selected.
| | 03:22 | The other option is do you want the
sub folders included or you want them all
| | 03:25 | piled on to the your desktop?
| | 03:27 | Notice the example down below, of
an individual file being saved in its
| | 03:31 | original file, or the restored file,
which has the new location and the sub-
| | 03:36 | folders containing that file.
| | 03:38 | I would like to keep the sub-folders,
so I am going to click Restore.
| | 03:42 | And then I just have to sit back and wait.
| | 03:44 | Once it's done, notice that my
files have been restored. I can view
| | 03:48 | those restored files.
| | 03:50 | I could do it myself by going to the
Desktop or click this link, which is going
| | 03:54 | to open up my Windows Explorer,
displaying my Desktop, and as I scroll down,
| | 03:59 | look at that, there it is.
| | 04:00 | There is my back up, my C drive, which was
backed up and that's the name of the backup.
| | 04:05 | That's also the name of the restore.
| | 04:07 | So when open it up there's my Exercise
Files and I can get in there and get to
| | 04:11 | my Exercise Files once they've been restored.
| | 04:14 | So even though the entire folder might
have been corrupted, thanks to the backup
| | 04:19 | that was performed and stored on an
external drive, I can restore them, get them
| | 04:23 | back on my computer and get
back to work with those files.
| | 04:27 | When you're done you can click the
Finish button and then close up Control
| | 04:31 | Panel and that's how you restore the
files that you have backed up using
| | 04:36 | Windows 7 Backup and Restore.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Handling an entire system crash| 00:00 | Sometimes backing up files
and folders just isn't enough.
| | 00:04 | What happens when you turn your
computer on and Windows won't even start up?
| | 00:07 | You can't access anything.
| | 00:09 | That's a little more serious and we are
going to look at a couple of options on
| | 00:12 | how to handle that type of error.
| | 00:14 | Here, from the Control Panel we'll go
to Back up your computer under the System
| | 00:18 | and Security section.
| | 00:20 | But we are going to focus on the left-hand
side of our screen in the navigation pane.
| | 00:24 | So a couple of options are here to
handle those serious boot errors, like
| | 00:29 | creating a system image or a system repair disc.
| | 00:33 | Let's start with Create a system image.
| | 00:35 | We'll select that link.
| | 00:36 | Now right away, you're going to see
you're prompted to choose where you want
| | 00:40 | to save the back up.
| | 00:42 | Down below, there are three radio
buttons, On the hard disc and you can see the
| | 00:46 | hard disc that shows up here is called
BOOTCAMP, and down below it appears
| | 00:49 | I can't use this drive, because it's not
formatted using the NTFS which is the
| | 00:54 | file system required for backing up.
| | 00:57 | So if I click this dropdown,
I do seem to have another drive.
| | 01:00 | It's a removable disc.
| | 01:02 | If I select that,
no, it's not formatted properly either.
| | 01:06 | So if you don't have an additional hard
drive, and this is aside from the hard
| | 01:09 | drive containing Windows and
what's going to allow Windows to run,
| | 01:14 | you may have to choose from one of the
other options, such as one or more DVDs.
| | 01:18 | When you select this radio button,
| | 01:20 | you'll need to have a blank DVD on hand
ready to be used for storing this system image.
| | 01:26 | Now the other option is a network location.
| | 01:29 | If you use a network location, be careful.
| | 01:32 | Look what happens down below. Backed up
data can't be securely protected for a
| | 01:36 | network target, meaning people will
have access to that data. That is,
| | 01:40 | other people who can access the network.
| | 01:42 | So let's go back to one or more DVDs.
| | 01:45 | Now depending on your hard drive and the
Windows system, you may need one or more DVDs.
| | 01:50 | Let's click Next.
| | 01:52 | For my particular computer, this back
up could take up to 217 GB of space.
| | 01:59 | That is a lot of DVDs when you
consider a single DVD hold just under 5 GB.
| | 02:06 | So I could be sitting here, popping
in blank DVDs one after the other as I'm
| | 02:10 | prompted, to back up my C
drive that's my entire system.
| | 02:14 | But if that's my only option,
| | 02:16 | I would click Start backup and I
would continue popping in those DVDs.
| | 02:21 | At the end I have a full set of
DVDs that contains my whole system.
| | 02:25 | An image of what I am using right
now when I turn on my computer.
| | 02:29 | That means if there is a fatal crash,
something happens, even if it's physical damage,
| | 02:34 | I can take that image to
another drive and restore it.
| | 02:38 | Off I go working just as
I was before that fatal crash.
| | 02:42 | But I am going to click Cancel
and let's explore another option.
| | 02:45 | Maybe everything is okay.
| | 02:46 | You just can't get into Windows.
| | 02:48 | You can't boot up the system and you
need what's called a system repair disc.
| | 02:53 | That's the third option down
here under our navigation pane.
| | 02:57 | Create a system repair disc.
| | 02:59 | Now here, you need to select a drive
that will contain the CD or DVD. I've got
| | 03:04 | my blank DVD in there already.
| | 03:05 | It's the only drive for me to select from.
| | 03:08 | And when I choose Create disc, I am
going to be creating a repair disc that's
| | 03:13 | going to be used to boot up my computer.
| | 03:15 | So when I turn it on, this is going
have to be in the drive already and
| | 03:19 | my computer is going to use this to boot
up my system and then I'll have access to
| | 03:24 | that hard drive where there
seems be some kind of issue.
| | 03:27 | And the thing here is I am also going
to have some recovery tools on this DVD
| | 03:32 | that will help me recover Windows
from a serious error or even restore my
| | 03:37 | computer from one of those
system images I might have created.
| | 03:39 | So I am going to click Create disc and
I have got my blank DVD in there already.
| | 03:45 | So I am not prompted for it.
| | 03:47 | And you can see it's actually
starting to create the disc.
| | 03:49 | I have this progress bar.
| | 03:51 | It's showing me that it's in the
stage where it's creating the disc and
| | 03:54 | of course it's going to start copying
some of my system information and those
| | 03:58 | tools I was talking about.
| | 03:59 | In the end I'll be left with a DVD that
I can use, should I turn on my computer
| | 04:05 | and not be able to boot it up.
| | 04:06 | If for some reason something has
happened to my C drive, this boot disc will
| | 04:11 | allow me to see what's going on my system disc.
| | 04:14 | So let's let it finish up here.
| | 04:17 | Now, eventually you're going to
see the AutoPlay window open up.
| | 04:21 | Notice that my DVD here has something on it now.
| | 04:24 | It's called a repair disc for Windows
7 and down below, if I want to check out
| | 04:29 | what's on this disc, I can
click Open folder to view files.
| | 04:32 | If you don't care, you can close this window.
| | 04:34 | I am going to take a peak though and
you can see there is a folder called boot,
| | 04:37 | another one called sources, and
there is an actual file here, the bootmgr
| | 04:42 | file that was created.
| | 04:44 | This is the file that's going to
automatically run when I pop this into my drive
| | 04:49 | and turn on my computer,
after some kind of fatal error.
| | 04:52 | So I am going to close up Windows Explorer.
| | 04:55 | The other thing you're going to see is they
Create a system repair disc dialog box here.
| | 05:00 | And it just gives you some
information about using the system repair.
| | 05:03 | You can use it to access the system
recovery options that, of course, will help
| | 05:08 | you to recover your
computer from that serious error.
| | 05:10 | What you should do though
when you pop this out is label it.
| | 05:13 | So you wanted to make sure that it's
clearly labeled as your repair disc and you
| | 05:18 | can see the name, that they are
recommending Repair disc Windows 7 32-bit.
| | 05:22 | If you don't need to see this message
every time you create a repair disc,
| | 05:25 | just click the checkbox before you click Close.
| | 05:27 | I am going to leave it
uncheck, just to remind me.
| | 05:30 | I don't mind being reminded and I can click OK.
| | 05:33 | And now I can go to that drive and eject it,
| | 05:36 | label it properly and if for some
reasons something happens when I turn on my
| | 05:40 | computer and Windows won't
start up, it's like I am stuck,
| | 05:44 | I can pop this into the drive and
restart my computer and I'll have those tools
| | 05:48 | and that information that I need to restore my
system to where it was before the fatal crash.
| | 05:54 | I am going to close this up and that's
another way to backup and restore your system.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
11. Internet Explorer 8Exploring changes to the UI| 00:00 | Internet Explorer 8 ships with Windows 7.
| | 00:03 | And it contains a number of new or
enhanced features that are worth exploring.
| | 00:07 | So let's begin with a quick tour of
the user interface, which by the way is
| | 00:11 | going to simplify your browsing experience.
| | 00:14 | You can access Internet Explorer
directly from the Explorer icon on the taskbar.
| | 00:18 | It's there by default.
| | 00:19 | If you've remove yours though, don't worry
about it. Click the Windows orb and go
| | 00:23 | up to All Programs.
| | 00:25 | You'll find Internet Explorer 8 near
the top left-hand side of the Start menu.
| | 00:28 | All right the first thing you see
when you launch Windows Explorer is the
| | 00:34 | homepage, which is set for you by default.
| | 00:36 | But you can select your own homepage.
| | 00:37 | We'll do that in a moment.
| | 00:39 | The other thing you're probably going to notice,
| | 00:41 | if you've installed Windows Live
Essentials, is a toolbar containing some
| | 00:46 | direct links to some of the features
under Windows Live Essentially, like the
| | 00:50 | Mail program, and Photo gallery, etcetera.
| | 00:53 | Now if you don't see this, it means
you haven't installed Windows Live
| | 00:57 | Essentials or you've turned it off,
disabled this little add-on. To do that,
| | 01:02 | we can click the little X in the top left
corner here next to our Windows Live
| | 01:06 | toolbar and you can see this is going
to disable our Windows Live toolbar.
| | 01:10 | When we click Disable, it disappears.
| | 01:12 | You can bring that back at any time.
When you install Windows Live Essentials,
| | 01:16 | you are going to get that by default
or as an option that you can leave up
| | 01:20 | here in by default.
| | 01:21 | You can turn it off at any
time, and let's bring it back.
| | 01:24 | We'll go to Tools and you'll notice if
we go down to Toolbars, it's one of the
| | 01:28 | options, Windows Live Toolbar.
| | 01:30 | A quicker way is just to right-click
the toolbar anywhere you'll see Windows
| | 01:34 | Live Toolbar not checked off right now.
Select it, re-enable the add-on that
| | 01:40 | displays this toolbar. And there we go.
| | 01:42 | So we have got those quick links
now to some of the Windows Live tools.
| | 01:46 | All right, the other thing that's a nice
little improvement is in the address bar.
| | 01:51 | The search functionality is built
into your address bar up here in the
| | 01:55 | top right-hand corner.
| | 01:56 | So let's say, we wanted to search for lynda.com.
| | 01:59 | We could start typing lynda.
| | 02:00 | You can Bing Suggestions at the top.
| | 02:03 | We have also got History down below.
| | 02:05 | And as we continue to type more, that
list gets filtered, and I am going to type
| | 02:11 | lynda.com, there it is lynda.com training.
| | 02:14 | And there is a whole bunch of
links related to lynda.com training.
| | 02:18 | And there's the one. I want that's
going to take me directly to the homepage.
| | 02:21 | I could have just typed that in the address
bar, if I know that was the actual address.
| | 02:26 | And maybe I would rather have this as
my homepage, the page that appears every
| | 02:30 | time I launch Internet Explorer.
| | 02:31 | Well, in that case, all I have to do is
go over to the little Home button here,
| | 02:36 | click the dropdown, and choose Add or
Change Home Page. Look at this. I can use
| | 02:42 | this webpage as my only home page or
add this webpage to my home page tabs.
| | 02:47 | I can have more than one home page.
| | 02:50 | I am going to choose that and click Yes.
| | 02:52 | And let's just close this up and relaunch it.
| | 02:55 | Just to see you that this worked.
| | 02:58 | Notice now we have got the Microsoft link.
| | 03:01 | And we got another tab
across the top for lynda.com.
| | 03:05 | So I have got both tabs showing up
automatically when I launch Internet Explorer.
| | 03:10 | Another nice improvement with our tabs
to help us stay organized is there are
| | 03:14 | going to be color-coded now.
| | 03:15 | Watch what happens when from the lynda.
com page, we'll just go down to one of
| | 03:20 | the links, where we see
the little finger pointing.
| | 03:23 | We'll right-click and let's
choose to open this in a new tab.
| | 03:27 | And when we choose Open in New Tab,
you'll notice the two tabs are color-coded,
| | 03:31 | in this case, green for me.
| | 03:34 | So this tells me that these two are
related and this one over here kind
| | 03:38 | of stands on its own.
| | 03:39 | And I can flip between these
tabs just by clicking them.
| | 03:43 | When you're ready to close up the tab,
just click the little X next to it.
| | 03:46 | All you have to do is
select it to be able to do that.
| | 03:49 | Notice Ctrl+W is the keyboard shortcut.
| | 03:52 | But we can also move these
around, which is kind of neat.
| | 03:54 | I can move this tab over to the right,
and keep my lynda ones on the left.
| | 03:58 | So it's really helpful with these
tabs, helping you to stay organized.
| | 04:02 | Let's just close up some of these tabs.
| | 04:04 | So we are left with one.
| | 04:06 | If you need to access tabs that
you've already closed, no problem.
| | 04:10 | Here's a cool thing.
| | 04:11 | You can right-click a tab, and notice
down below, you can Reopen Closed Tab
| | 04:16 | or go down to Recently Closed Tabs and
select a specific tab to go right back to it.
| | 04:22 | So don't have to create a new tab and
then try to locate the page you were at.
| | 04:26 | Just right-click any tab
to access those closed tabs.
| | 04:29 | That's a nice feature as well with tabs.
| | 04:32 | So I am going to close up the
lynda.com one and leave the Microsoft one open.
| | 04:37 | And that's just a quick look at some of
the changes to the user interface itself.
| | 04:41 | In the next lesson we'll dig a little
bit deeper into Internet Explorer 8.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Access sites quickly using Favorites and History| 00:00 |
To help you navigate various sites more
efficiently, Internet Explorer 8 allows
| | 00:05 |
you to create favorites and use the
browsing history to go back to pages
| | 00:09 |
you've already visited.
| | 00:10 |
So let's explore that now.
| | 00:12 |
First of all you'll need Internet
Explorer 8 opened up and launched ready to go
| | 00:16 |
if you want along with me.
| | 00:18 |
All we are going to do is go up to
the address field and click once.
| | 00:22 |
Notice the entire address is selected,
no matter what you've got on your screen here.
| | 00:25 |
It selects this so we can type over it.
| | 00:28 |
So we'll type the lynda.com and press
Enter, and it takes us to that page.
| | 00:33 |
Let's click again in the address bar
and try another one like ebay.com.
| | 00:38 |
When we press Return we are taken to that page.
| | 00:41 |
Now you'll notice we have got Back
buttons and a Forward button to move back and
| | 00:45 |
forth through the history.
| | 00:46 |
So we can go back to the original site,
and the Back button is no longer selectable.
| | 00:51 |
But we've also got a button on
the toolbar that says Favorites.
| | 00:54 |
And from here we can also
access feeds and the history.
| | 00:57 |
So we'll click Favorites, and if you
haven't got the Favorites tab selected,
| | 01:02 |
go ahead and click it.
| | 01:03 |
Notice that down below you are going to
see the Favorites that are setup for you
| | 01:07 |
by default in Internet Explorer 8.
| | 01:08 |
So you can go directly to Microsoft
Websites, Windows Live sites, etcetera.
| | 01:14 |
But if you want to add your own
favorites, no problem. All you have to do is
| | 01:18 |
click Add to Favorites, but you
need to get to that site first.
| | 01:21 |
So let's go back here to the History tab
and let's go down to lynda.com, and you
| | 01:28 |
can choose any site you like.
| | 01:29 |
Under the lynda.com heading, you'll see
that there's only here, Tutorials, and
| | 01:34 |
right now I am viewing these links by date.
| | 01:37 |
And we do have the ability to change
it. If we wanted to view them by site,
| | 01:40 |
you can see now they're listed by site,
or you can go by Most Visited or by
| | 01:46 |
Visited Today, or we can go
through the entire history.
| | 01:49 |
So let's go View By Site, and we'll
select lynda.com, and then choose the actual site,
| | 01:55 |
the tutorials at lynda.com.
| | 01:57 |
It takes us directly there, and if
we want to add this to our Favorites, no problem.
| | 02:01 |
We just go up to that Favorites button
again, but this time we are
| | 02:04 |
just going to click Add to Favorites.
| | 02:06 |
Now this little Add to Favorite window opens up.
| | 02:09 |
You can change the name if you don't
like Tutorials - Online Training - lynda.com.
| | 02:13 |
You just wanted to say
lynda.com. Type right over that.
| | 02:16 |
And you can see it's going to my Favorites.
| | 02:19 |
Now it's going to be lumped in
there with all those other folders.
| | 02:21 |
If I wanted to, I can create a new
folder a new category if you will, and this
| | 02:27 |
site will be added to that category.
| | 02:29 |
So I am going to choose New Folder,
and under Favorites I am going to create
| | 02:33 |
one called Learning.
| | 02:34 |
Notice it's created in the Favorites folder.
| | 02:36 |
I could create it inside one of
those other folders if I wanted to, but
| | 02:40 |
I'm creating this new one under
Favorites so it appears there when I click
| | 02:43 |
the Favorites button.
| | 02:45 |
I click Create. Now lynda.com is going
to go in the Learning folder. I click Add
| | 02:50 |
and when I go back to Favorites,
you'll notice that if I click the Favorites tab,
| | 02:55 |
I have got one called Learning. I can
click it to expand and display the one
| | 03:00 |
link that's in there
right now, the lynda.com site.
| | 03:03 |
And of course we can click these
folders to collapse them as well to help us
| | 03:07 |
stay better organized with the various folders.
| | 03:10 |
Now if there's one in there you don't want.
| | 03:12 |
Let's say you never use the Microsoft
Websites for example, you can right-click
| | 03:16 |
and you get a number of options.
| | 03:18 |
Here you can see I've got the option
to delete this, or rename it if I wanted to,
| | 03:23 |
and explore the Properties, but I
am going to click anywhere down here.
| | 03:28 |
I am going to click Learning, and
it's got my lynda site. I am going to
| | 03:32 |
right-click, and I am going to choose
to delete that one. I'll need to confirm
| | 03:35 |
that by clicking Yes.
| | 03:37 |
And now it's removed from my Favorites.
| | 03:39 |
So if there's things in there you no
longer need, remember just right-click
| | 03:42 |
them and choose Delete.
| | 03:45 |
Now let's go back to the History for a moment.
| | 03:47 |
Just because I removed it from my Favorites,
it doesn't mean it's gone from my history.
| | 03:51 |
Internet Explorer 8 is continuing to
keep track of the sites I've visited.
| | 03:55 |
How do I clear that if I don't want
to keep track? I want to clear the
| | 03:59 |
history, and start fresh.
| | 04:01 |
Well we can do that from our
Tools button on the toolbar.
| | 04:04 |
Let's go there and choose Internet Options.
| | 04:07 |
Here you'll notice a Browsing history section.
| | 04:11 |
So we can delete the browsing
history when we exit Internet Explorer 8
| | 04:14 |
by clicking this checkbox or if
you prefer, just deselect that and
| | 04:19 |
delete by clicking the Delete button,
and here you get to choose what's
| | 04:23 |
going to be deleted.
| | 04:24 |
Temporary Internet files, these are web
pages and images that are saved so that
| | 04:29 |
when you go back to those
sites they show up quicker.
| | 04:31 |
Same thing goes for Cookies, and
there's the History right there.
| | 04:35 |
So you can deselect and select the
things you want to delete or not and then
| | 04:40 |
click the Delete button.
| | 04:43 |
You can click Apply if you want or just
click OK to apply and close up that window.
| | 04:47 |
Now if I go up to Favorites,
| | 04:48 |
notice my history is empty. It's fresh.
| | 04:53 |
My Favorites are still there, but
the history has been wiped clean.
| | 04:56 |
So we'll click Favorites again to close that up.
| | 04:59 |
So to save you some time, remember
create your favorites so you can quickly
| | 05:02 |
access them when you need them, and if
you visited a site that's not a part of
| | 05:06 |
your favorites, you can always go
back to that history if you need to and
| | 05:09 |
visit it from there.
| | 05:10 |
Deleting the history clears the cache
so you can start fresh each time you open
| | 05:15 |
up Internet Explorer 8.
| | 05:17 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Connecting to RSS feeds and web slices| 00:00 |
If you've ever needed to track
information on a website, maybe with sports
| | 00:04 |
headlines, auctions, weather or
financials, you typically have to load the
| | 00:09 |
website to view those updates.
| | 00:11 |
Well, with RSS feeds and web slices
in Internet Explorer 8, you can now
| | 00:16 |
automatically subscribe to and receive
those updates from web pages that change
| | 00:20 |
frequently, and even view the updates
without having to load the entire website.
| | 00:25 |
So let's start by exploring RSS feeds.
| | 00:28 |
These are feeds that will display
constantly updating information.
| | 00:33 |
Notice I am at the Microsoft.com
homepage here, and if you want to follow along
| | 00:37 |
with me can come here to Microsoft.com
and on the toolbar, I see this little
| | 00:42 |
icon representing an RSS feed.
| | 00:45 |
Now when I click this button I'll be
able to view the feeds on this page.
| | 00:49 |
If I click the dropdown button next to it,
I can also see that the Microsoft
| | 00:53 |
PressPass, which is information for
journalists, is the feed that I can access here.
| | 00:58 |
So when I click it, look at that.
I get some the updated headlines.
| | 01:02 |
These are stories that are of
special information to journalists.
| | 01:07 |
If I want to subscribe to this feed,
so I'm always getting the latest, notice
| | 01:10 |
there is a link here to subscribe to this feed.
| | 01:13 |
So we click the link.
| | 01:14 |
You can see the name that appears and
then we can change that if we wanted to.
| | 01:18 |
I am just going to leave it at
Microsoft PressPass, so I am going to take out
| | 01:22 |
the rest by highlighting and deleting.
| | 01:24 |
It's going to go into my Feeds section,
so if I click my Favorites button and
| | 01:28 |
then the Feeds tab that's
where I am going to find it.
| | 01:30 |
If I want to create a separate folder
for this type of feed, I can do that,
| | 01:34 |
just like we did for creating Favorites.
| | 01:37 |
We can even add it
directly to the Favorites bar.
| | 01:40 |
So we don't have to access it
through the Favorites button.
| | 01:42 |
Let's do that by clicking
the checkbox and Subscribe.
| | 01:46 |
So when we do this we are now subscribed,
and if I was to go back let's say to
| | 01:52 |
the Microsoft.com page and I want to
access the feeds, I could be it anywhere.
| | 01:56 |
Let's go to the lynda.com site, for example.
| | 01:59 |
Well, I have added it here to my
Favorites toolbar, so you'll notice Microsoft
| | 02:04 |
PressPass and I can click that
to see each of those headlines.
| | 02:10 |
So I don't have to open up
the actual website to get there.
| | 02:13 |
I can go directly to one of
these just by clicking them.
| | 02:16 |
You can see it takes me directly there.
| | 02:18 |
That's the equivalent of clicking the
Favorites button, clicking the Feeds tab,
| | 02:23 |
and then clicking Microsoft PressPass.
| | 02:25 |
Now that does take me to the page
where I can access those different links.
| | 02:30 |
And I am always getting the latest information.
| | 02:33 |
So let's go back with the Back button,
all the way back to, I am going to go to
| | 02:37 |
the lynda.com website and let's talk
about something else, something that's new
| | 02:42 |
here to Internet Explorer called web slices.
| | 02:45 |
In the address field, I am going to
click once and type espn.com. I am into
| | 02:50 |
sports and I always like
to get the latest headlines.
| | 02:53 |
When I go this site, I don't see
an RSS feed icon on the toolbar.
| | 02:58 |
I see a web slice icon.
| | 02:59 |
It looks a little bit different, a
green with a little slice of pie in there.
| | 03:03 |
So if I wanted to, I can click the
dropdown to see RSS feeds or ESPN: Headlines.
| | 03:09 |
And when I click the button, I can
add the web slice to my Favorites.
| | 03:13 |
It's going to go directly to the Favorites bar.
| | 03:16 |
So watch what happens when I click this button.
| | 03:18 |
You can see it just got
added to my Favorites Bar.
| | 03:21 |
It's right there on the toolbar.
| | 03:23 |
So if I am somewhere else looking at
some other information and I want to get
| | 03:26 |
the latest headlines, I just click
the little dropdown, and I don't have to
| | 03:31 |
access the ESPN site. Look it.
I have got these little headlines.
| | 03:34 |
If I wanted to go to one of those
headlines, I simply click to read all about it.
| | 03:39 |
It opens up a brand-new tab for me.
| | 03:42 |
So when I am done reading, I click Close.
| | 03:45 |
And I can go back to the
original site where I was.
| | 03:47 |
So that's the beauty of a web slice.
| | 03:50 |
Now of course there are options for, when
you subscribe to RSS feeds, and web slices.
| | 03:55 |
Let's go to the tools button on the
toolbar and down to Internet Options.
| | 04:01 |
Now we'll select Content. Down below
you'll see a section for Feeds and Web
| | 04:06 |
Slices and a Settings button
where we can manipulate the settings.
| | 04:10 |
For example, how often are the
feeds and web slices updated?
| | 04:14 |
Well, you can see here automatically
everyday is the default, but we can change
| | 04:19 |
that to every half an hour,
four hours a day, or every week.
| | 04:23 |
I am going to change mine to 4 hours so
I've always got the latest information
| | 04:27 |
at my fingertips without bogging
down my system with constant updates.
| | 04:32 |
And you don't even have to have it
automatically check feeds and web slices for updates.
| | 04:36 |
You can turn that off altogether.
| | 04:38 |
But I am going to have a check every four hours.
| | 04:40 |
Down below, Automatically mark
feed as read when reading a feed.
| | 04:44 |
So if I go to any of those feeds that
I've subscribed to, and I read them,
| | 04:48 |
they'll show up as read.
| | 04:49 |
So I know which ones I've
looked at, which ones I haven't.
| | 04:52 |
I like that. I'll leave it on.
| | 04:54 |
Turn on feed reading view so when I
go to an actual feed, I am going to
| | 04:58 |
be reading that feed.
| | 05:00 |
It's an automatic setting.
| | 05:01 |
Do I want to hear sounds when a feed or
a web slice is found for a web page, or
| | 05:06 |
when it's updated? These next two
checkboxes are deselected so I am not hearing sounds,
| | 05:11 |
but if it's a important information
you're tracking, you want to know
| | 05:14 |
when there's an update, you might
want to turn on the sound checkbox for
| | 05:17 |
updating for example, and Turn
on in page Web Slice discovery.
| | 05:23 |
So in this case when you're visiting the
actual page you know as we saw the icon
| | 05:28 |
appear on the toolbar it was discovered.
| | 05:31 |
This is automatically discovering
your RSS feeds and your web slices and
| | 05:35 |
displaying the appropriate icon.
| | 05:36 |
I am going to leave that turned on as
well and click OK to save those changes.
| | 05:40 |
I am going to click OK again.
| | 05:42 |
It's locked in, closes up the window,
and I am back to Internet Explorer.
| | 05:46 |
So just remember if you need to keep an
eye on constantly updating information
| | 05:51 |
on a website, you've got RSS feeds,
but you have also web slices,
| | 05:55 |
and with a web slice you'll never need
to load the entire page to stay informed.
| | 06:00 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Displaying similar sites with Suggested Sites| 00:00 | Suggested Sites is an online experience
designed to show you which websites you
| | 00:04 | visit most often and then provide you
with suggestions of other related websites
| | 00:09 | you might be interested in visiting.
| | 00:10 | With Suggested Sites turned on, your
web browsing history is automatically and
| | 00:14 | periodically sent to Microsoft where
it's saved and compared to a frequently
| | 00:18 | updated list of websites that are
similar to the ones you visit most often.
| | 00:22 | So let's try it out.
| | 00:24 | First step is to turn on Suggested Sites.
| | 00:26 | You'll notice from the
toolbar, a Suggested Sites button.
| | 00:30 | Usually it's the first button, but if
you've added any other sites, maybe it's
| | 00:35 | an RSS feed or other websites
and you don't want those,
| | 00:38 | you can right-click and delete them.
| | 00:40 | That will just remove them from your toolbar.
| | 00:43 | I am going to do that for the two
we added in the previous lesson.
| | 00:48 | And there is my Suggested Sites
button and when I click this button,
| | 00:52 | you'll notice that I haven't
actually turned Suggested Sites on.
| | 00:55 | If I click the button to turn on
Suggested Sites, it will then be turned on.
| | 00:59 | I have to confirm that I want
to do that by clicking Yes.
| | 01:03 | And now all I have to do is visit a site.
| | 01:05 | Let's go to the lynda.com website.
| | 01:07 | I am going to click in the Address
field and just type lynda.com and when I
| | 01:11 | press Enter, I am taken to that site.
| | 01:13 | All right, if I want to see some
Suggested Sites that are related to the
| | 01:17 | lynda.com website, I just go up to
that button and click the dropdown.
| | 01:20 | Because it's turned on, I can now click
See Suggested Sites. And look at that.
| | 01:26 | There's a whole bunch in here:
| | 01:27 | Total Training, Adobe, there's QuickTime.
| | 01:30 | One of the things that I need to view
these movies is Apple QuickTime, so I have
| | 01:34 | a quick link to it right here.
| | 01:36 | And clicking that will take me to the
site where I can download QuickTime to
| | 01:40 | view these movies, really nice.
| | 01:42 | Now Suggested Sites also turns on
automatic background updating for web slices
| | 01:47 | and feeds, so you can receive up-to-date
suggestions in both Suggested Sites and
| | 01:52 | the Suggested Sites web slice.
| | 01:54 | If you want to turn it off, just go up to Tools.
| | 01:57 | You will notice Suggested Sites has a
check mark next to it. Click Suggested
| | 02:02 | Sites and it's now turned off.
| | 02:04 | I am going to close up these tabs,
so I am back to the lynda.com site.
| | 02:08 | And that's how you use Suggested
Sites to go to related sites, to the sites
| | 02:13 | you visit most often.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Browsing without navigating using accelerators| 00:00 | Accelerators are new to Internet
Explorer 8 and they are designed to speed up
| | 00:04 | your web browsing experience.
| | 00:06 | You may do this by providing fast
access to functions that you'd normally take
| | 00:10 | longer to reach through
copying and pasting into other sites.
| | 00:13 | Take for example, an address.
| | 00:15 | Maybe you want to get a
map to a specific address.
| | 00:18 | You find the address on a website, you
highlight it, copy it, open it up in another
| | 00:22 | website like Google Maps or MapQuest, paste
it in there and you catch your map eventually.
| | 00:28 | Well, we can save a lot of time using
an Accelerator, so let's test this out.
| | 00:32 | I am going to use the lynda.com
website if you want to follow along with me.
| | 00:36 | We are going to go over to the About
Us link, and down below click Contact.
| | 00:41 | Now here we do have a mailing address,
so we can highlight the address and all
| | 00:46 | we need is the street address over
here as well as the city, state, and zip.
| | 00:50 | And when you let go after dragging
across that text, you will notice a little
| | 00:54 | Accelerator icon appears.
| | 00:56 | And you can click that to display your
default Accelerators, and these are the
| | 01:00 | ones that actually come with Internet Explorer
8 already installed and set up as your defaults.
| | 01:05 | So you can blog, or you can send e-mails.
| | 01:08 | There is map with Bing right there.
| | 01:10 | And when I hover over Map with Bing,
I actually see a map for that particular
| | 01:16 | selected address, there it is,
right there in front of me.
| | 01:19 | And of course, I can access this site
just by clicking instead of hovering and
| | 01:23 | it's going to open up a new tab and
give me all of the tools that I need for
| | 01:28 | looking up this map.
| | 01:29 | You can see I have got Aerial view,
Bird's eye view, and Traffic, and all kinds
| | 01:33 | of cool tools built into my Maps here at Bing.
| | 01:37 | When I am done, I close the tab, after
I printed the map, lets say, and that
| | 01:42 | might be something I'd use in
trying to get to lynda.com for example.
| | 01:46 | So that's just one Accelerator.
| | 01:48 | Let's try another one.
| | 01:50 | Let's go back to the homepage by
clicking on lynda.com logo and let's highlight
| | 01:54 | some text like this paragraph here.
| | 01:56 | Let's say we want a translate this
and use it in another webpage or in
| | 02:01 | some text, for example.
| | 02:02 | When we select text like this,
there is our Accelerator icon, we click.
| | 02:06 | This time I will go down to Translate
with Bing and this is another one of those
| | 02:10 | Accelerators that gives us a
preview on the right-hand side here.
| | 02:13 | And you can see, English was
automatically detected as the language.
| | 02:16 | Over on the right we get to choose the
language we want to actually translate this to.
| | 02:22 | If English shows up there for you,
| | 02:23 | you probably never use this. Click the
dropdown and you will see a whole list
| | 02:27 | of languages to choose from.
| | 02:29 | Let's try Spanish. Just takes a
minute to translate it into Spanish.
| | 02:34 | Let's go to another language, we will
click the same dropdown and choose French.
| | 02:38 | It takes another second to
translate it into French.
| | 02:41 | So this is just a quick preview
but it gives us the text, helps us
| | 02:45 | understand with reading.
| | 02:46 | If we want more tools of course, we can
go over here back to the list and click
| | 02:50 | Translate with Bing. Opens up the Bing
Translator this time, a brand new tab.
| | 02:55 | There's our originally highlighted
text, there is the translation on the
| | 02:58 | right, and we have got all of the tools at our
fingertips here and the Bing Translator site.
| | 03:04 | Close that up when we are done.
| | 03:06 | So those are just a couple of default
Accelerators, but there's more in the
| | 03:09 | Add-ons gallery and we can
access them from this little icon.
| | 03:13 | When we click the Accelerator icon,
you will notice down below All Accelerators,
| | 03:17 | so it's going to display all of your
defaults here, as well as two links.
| | 03:22 | We can Find More
Accelerators directly from here.
| | 03:25 | It will take us to the gallery.
| | 03:26 | Or we can go to Manage Accelerators,
where we can access some of the features as
| | 03:31 | well as finding more Accelerators from here.
| | 03:33 | So let's go to Manage Accelerators.
| | 03:36 | Here, under Manage Add-ons,
you'll see Accelerators is selected.
| | 03:40 | Over on the right-hand side, you'll see the
actual Accelerators we saw on that pop-up list.
| | 03:45 | And if we want more information about
one of them such as Translate with Bing,
| | 03:50 | select it, and there is information down below.
| | 03:52 | It's Default, available on
Document, Selection, Link.
| | 03:57 | So if we select text, for example, it's
available, if it's in a document or an
| | 04:02 | actual link, we will get to
see this one as available.
| | 04:06 | Notice it is a default because the
button down below here, Remove as default, can
| | 04:11 | change it to just an actual Accelerator.
| | 04:14 | That's not the default for translating if you
have got something else you would like to use.
| | 04:18 | We can disable it, so it's still
on the list, but doesn't appear.
| | 04:21 | Or remove it totally.
| | 04:23 | And as I mentioned, we can access
additional Accelerators from this window too.
| | 04:27 | Here is where we click Find More Accelerators.
| | 04:31 | Now this does open up a new
Explorer window, and we are at the Add-ons
| | 04:35 | Gallery under Accelerators.
| | 04:37 | You can see there's quite a few on this
page and there are many pages to choose from.
| | 04:41 | So let's just scroll down here, take
a look at some of these cool ones and
| | 04:46 | choose how about Google Define,
which will look up definitions for us.
| | 04:50 | We will click the Add to
Internet Explorer button.
| | 04:53 | If we click Add, it gets added, but
we can also make it the default for
| | 04:56 | definitions by clicking the
checkbox so we don't have to go into the
| | 04:59 | Manage window to do that.
| | 05:01 | When we click Add, it becomes our
default for getting definitions.
| | 05:05 | So let's close this window, and we will close
our Manage window, and come back to lynda.com.
| | 05:12 | Let's just double-click any
word here, like competitive.
| | 05:14 | So we got the word selected, we want
definitions for this, we can click the
| | 05:19 | Accelerator icon and now we have got
a new one here, Define with Google.
| | 05:23 | As I hover over this, I don't
get a real-time preview of this.
| | 05:27 | It's one of those where
I have to actually click.
| | 05:29 | It's going to open up a new tab.
| | 05:31 | It's going to display my selected
word and you can see Related phrases is
| | 05:35 | well across the top and there is all my
definitions down below and where they come from.
| | 05:40 | So when we are done, we click the Close
button on the tab to return to our original site.
| | 05:46 | Now, let's go back to Managing.
| | 05:47 | Now sometimes you will want to get
rid of Accelerators. If your list is
| | 05:50 | getting too long and there are some that you
don't use, you need to know how to manage them.
| | 05:54 | I like to just select anything on a page,
click the Accelerator icon, move down
| | 05:59 | to All Accelerators and click Manage from here.
| | 06:02 | It's the fastest way to get there,
and there's my Define with Google.
| | 06:05 | If I want to remove it as the
default, it's no longer my default.
| | 06:10 | It's still enabled.
| | 06:11 | You can see the status but
it's just not my default.
| | 06:15 | And when I select the text,
it becomes available to me.
| | 06:18 | If I want to remove it altogether,
I click Remove and I will need to confirm
| | 06:22 | that I'm taking this Accelerator off my list.
| | 06:25 | And that's how we manage our Accelerators.
| | 06:27 | Click the Close button when you are done.
| | 06:30 | So there you have it. With Accelerators
in Internet Explorer, getting the info
| | 06:33 | you need just got faster.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Keeping your browsing private using InPrivate Browsing and filtering| 00:00 | If you browse the Internet on a shared
computer like a home computer with family
| | 00:04 | members or one at the kiosk or
Internet cafe, you might want to keep your
| | 00:09 | browsing history private.
| | 00:11 | InPrivate Browsing in Internet
Explorer 8 allows you to browse in private by
| | 00:15 | preventing the storage of certain data
on the PC you are using like Cookies,
| | 00:19 | Browsing History, Temporary Files, any
passwords that you type, addresses you
| | 00:24 | enter, form data and queries.
| | 00:27 | So to start InPrivate Browsing,
we go to the Safety button.
| | 00:31 | First so, let's click Safety and
choose Delete Browsing History, notice the
| | 00:35 | shortcut, Ctrl+Shift+Delete will do that.
| | 00:38 | And we'll make sure History, Cookies,
Temporary Files are all selected.
| | 00:42 | When we click Delete, we are
starting with a fresh history.
| | 00:46 | Now we'll turn-on InPrivate
Browsing which actually does two things.
| | 00:50 | We'll click Safety again.
| | 00:52 | Move down to InPrivate Browsing,
Ctrl+Shift+P as in InPrivate.
| | 00:55 | It's the keyboard shortcut.
| | 00:57 | This actually opens up a brand new
window and you'll notice InPrivate appears in
| | 01:02 | the Address bar and down below it's in
information about InPrivate Browsing.
| | 01:08 | So up here where the address should
appear, we've got highlighted text, we can
| | 01:12 | type anything we want.
| | 01:13 | Let's try lynda.com and press Enter.
| | 01:16 | So that takes us to that website.
| | 01:19 | Let's click again in the address
field and let's try another one.
| | 01:22 | Let's try ebay.com.
| | 01:25 | So now we have gone to a couple of sites.
| | 01:27 | Now typically we can view the
history by going to Favorites, and then
| | 01:32 | clicking the History tab.
| | 01:33 | Notice there is no history.
| | 01:35 | Nothing has been tracked here
because of InPrivate Browsing.
| | 01:39 | We'll click Favorites again to close that up.
| | 01:42 | So that takes care of what gets stored
on the computer that you're using but
| | 01:45 | what about the content on your
computer that can be shared with third parties
| | 01:50 | when you access their sites?
| | 01:51 | Information about your visit to their
site could be sent to content providers,
| | 01:56 | which can be helpful at times, but it can
also be an invasion of your privacy as well.
| | 02:00 | For that, Internet Explorer 8 has
InPrivate Filtering and all we do is click
| | 02:05 | Safety and go down to InPrivate Filtering.
| | 02:09 | Now notice here we get some information
about turning-on InPrivate Filtering and
| | 02:13 | what it's going to do. Down
below you've got a couple of options.
| | 02:16 | Block for me, which will prevent
content providers from receiving information
| | 02:20 | about some of the websites you visit,
and then down below, let me choose which
| | 02:25 | providers receive my information gives
you a little more control where you can
| | 02:29 | pick and choose the providers.
| | 02:30 | I am going to just say Block for me.
| | 02:33 | And now all I have to do is continue
browsing and I can know for sure that
| | 02:38 | information about my browsing and
information about where I'm going and what I'm
| | 02:44 | typing is not being shared
with those third parties.
| | 02:46 | With the InPrivate Browsing, I'm also
assured that nothing is being stored on
| | 02:51 | this computer about where I
am going and what I'm typing.
| | 02:54 | Now when you want to turn
these off, simply go to Safety.
| | 02:58 | For InPrivate filtering, we click
again to turn it off, and for InPrivate
| | 03:03 | Browsing, we just close that Internet
Explorer window that opened up when we
| | 03:07 | turned it on or return to our previous
window where InPrivate Browsing is not turned-on.
| | 03:12 | We know that from the address bar.
InPrivate does not appear up there in the top left.
| | 03:18 | So when you want to browse privately,
remember InPrivate Browsing and InPrivate
| | 03:22 | Filtering, both new to Internet Explorer 8.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
12. Windows Live EssentialsSetting up your Windows Live profile| 00:00 | Although Windows Live Essentials is no
longer bundled with Windows 7 operating system,
| | 00:06 | it does complete
the Windows 7 experience.
| | 00:08 | It's a group of applications that you
actually have to download separately now
| | 00:12 | and you can even pick and choose which
apps you want to install as opposed to
| | 00:16 | installing the entire
group when you don't need to.
| | 00:19 | Let's begin by exploring how you
setup your Windows Live ID or Account.
| | 00:24 | Notice I've open up Internet Explorer 8
and I'm at the Windows Live Essentials
| | 00:28 | homepage, the address download.live.com.
| | 00:32 | If you already have a Hotmail e-mail address,
let's say, then you have a Windows Live ID.
| | 00:38 | You can use that address.
| | 00:40 | If you don't have an ID and you'd like
to download using the Download button
| | 00:44 | that appears here, you might
want to setup your profile first.
| | 00:48 | So let's go to the Profile
link that appears on this page.
| | 00:51 | Again, I could sign in if I
already have my ID or I can sign up.
| | 00:56 | When you click the Sign up button you have
a couple of options here at the very top.
| | 01:00 | Use your current e-mail address.
| | 01:02 | Let's say you've got one at hotmail
.com, here's where you type it in.
| | 01:05 | It becomes your Windows Live ID.
| | 01:07 | If you don't have one, you can get
your Windows Live e-mail address by
| | 01:11 | clicking this link.
| | 01:13 | Notice it's going to be @live.com by
default, but you could also make it
| | 01:16 | hotmail if you wanted to.
| | 01:18 | I'm going to add a new one here and I'm
going to check to see if it's available.
| | 01:23 | Let's go with davidr2009.
| | 01:27 | When I click Check availability you'll
notice that it is not available, somebody
| | 01:31 | has already got that, but I do
have some other options here.
| | 01:34 | So Davidr20092009, I like that
one, I'm going to go with it.
| | 01:40 | And that'll become Windows Live
ID as well as my e-mail address.
| | 01:44 | Next, I need to create a password.
| | 01:46 | Notice there's information on the right
about creating strong passwords, where
| | 01:50 | you want to combine letters and numbers,
uppercase and lowercase, even symbols
| | 01:54 | to make it very strong.
| | 01:56 | There's a minimum of six
characters here that are needed and remember
| | 01:59 | it's case-sensitive.
| | 02:00 | You're also going to see over here on
the right-hand side even though you can't
| | 02:06 | see what you're typing, whether or
not your passwords is weak or strong.
| | 02:11 | So as I add more, you can see
it goes from Weak to Medium.
| | 02:15 | Now, you are going to have to retype it.
| | 02:21 | And if you want, down below, you need
to select an alternate e-mail address.
| | 02:26 | So if you forget your
password, where is it going to go?
| | 02:29 | So if you've got one already, you can
enter it here or you can choose a security
| | 02:33 | question for your password,
and that's what I'm going to do.
| | 02:37 | So, I'm going to click here. Select one.
I'm going to select Mother's birthplace
| | 02:42 | and down here type ottawa in lowercase.
| | 02:46 | Five character minimum and it's
not case sensitive in this case.
| | 02:49 | Now some personal information
about yourself. Your First Name.
| | 02:54 | Your Last Name. Your Country.
| | 02:57 | You can click the dropdown, type a letter.
| | 02:59 | I am going to type C as in Canada, which
takes me to the C's so I can select it quickly.
| | 03:04 | Now it's the Province, and I'm in
Ontario. Postal Code instead of a ZIP Code.
| | 03:14 | Gender, Birth Year, and down below,
you have got this group of characters
| | 03:20 | you'll need to enter.
| | 03:21 | It's a security feature.
| | 03:23 | It helps prevent automated
programs for creating accounts.
| | 03:25 | So I'm going to type that in.
| | 03:32 | And now down below, you've got some
information, indicating you're about to
| | 03:36 | agree to the Microsoft service
agreement and privacy statement.
| | 03:39 | When you click I accept,
your new account will be created.
| | 03:43 | So I was busy creating the account.
| | 03:46 | You can see the progress bar down below here.
| | 03:49 | You will eventually arrive at the next
screen which shows you information about
| | 03:55 | your new account, and down below you
can add pictures if you want to customize
| | 03:59 | your profile, or you can
skip this step if you like.
| | 04:04 | And now you're at your Windows
Live homepage and you're signed in.
| | 04:07 | you'll notice here in the top right-
hand corner, here's where you go to
| | 04:10 | sign out, and you'll notice your
own first name showing up in the top
| | 04:14 | right-hand corner as well.
| | 04:16 | So there's lots you can do down here,
setting permissions and options, nothing
| | 04:20 | to show at this point, over on the left,
Details, Photos, etcetera, all dealing
| | 04:24 | with your own profile.
| | 04:26 | Once you've got your profile setup,
you're ready to start working with some of
| | 04:30 | the Windows Live Essentials tools
that you may choose to download.
| | 04:34 | We'll be talking about that next.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Downloading Windows Live Essentials | 00:00 | Once you've created your Windows
Live profile, you are ready to start
| | 00:03 | downloading Windows Live Essentials programs.
| | 00:06 | And the nice thing about Windows Live
Essentials now is it's not bundled with
| | 00:10 | the operating system.
| | 00:11 | You actually get to pick and choose
the applications or programs you want to
| | 00:15 | download, and that way you are not
stuck with the others that you don't need.
| | 00:19 | So, here we are at a different
website now, download.live.com.
| | 00:24 | Here's where we see the Download button
for downloading Windows Live Essentials.
| | 00:28 | I have already installed mine.
| | 00:29 | But if you want to follow
along, click the Download button.
| | 00:33 | You'll need to run the application.
| | 00:35 | You may see a Security Warning.
| | 00:37 | But go ahead and run it.
| | 00:38 | It's from Microsoft.
| | 00:39 | And then you'll see this Welcome to Windows
Live screen, as it prepares the installer.
| | 00:44 | What it's going to show you is what
you've already got installed, what you
| | 00:47 | don't have installed, and you can
pick and choose exactly what you want to
| | 00:51 | download or install.
| | 00:53 | So, you can see for me, I already
have Messenger, Mail, Photo Gallery for
| | 00:59 | organizing, editing and sharing my photos,
Movie Maker for creating home movies.
| | 01:05 | The Windows Live toolbar that will
appear by default in my Internet Explorer 8,
| | 01:10 | giving me quick access to these applications.
| | 01:12 | Writer for writing blogs,
Family Safety options and lots more.
| | 01:17 | So, you'll be able to pick and choose
the ones you want to install, and continue
| | 01:21 | with the installation.
| | 01:22 | For me, I get a Close button
in the bottom right-hand corner.
| | 01:25 | So I am going to close that up.
| | 01:26 | And notice that I can actually create
my Windows Live ID during this process.
| | 01:32 | We did it ahead of time
by setting up our profile.
| | 01:34 | So we don't need this window.
| | 01:36 | You can click Close.
| | 01:37 | So once you have got everything
installed, you're ready to follow along.
| | 01:42 | Let's close this up and
go down to our Windows orb.
| | 01:45 | Now, if you're still waiting for
your programs to install, that's fine.
| | 01:49 | Just sit back and watch.
| | 01:50 | If you have already got them installed, great.
| | 01:52 | Here is where we go to access them.
| | 01:54 | We'll go to All Programs, and you'll
notice a folder called Windows Live.
| | 01:58 | Here is where you are going to see a
list of those apps or programs that
| | 02:02 | you chose to install.
| | 02:04 | For example, Windows Live Mail.
| | 02:06 | You have also got
Messenger for instant messaging.
| | 02:09 | There is Movie Maker, and Photo
Gallery, and Windows Live Writer for
| | 02:13 | creating your blogs.
| | 02:14 | So we are going to explore a number of
these programs or applications as we move
| | 02:20 | through the remaining movies in this chapter.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Tracking dates and events with the Windows Live calendar| 00:00 |
In this movie, we're going to show
you how to work with the Windows Live
| | 00:03 |
Calendar for tracking events and
appointments, and you'll notice that when you
| | 00:07 |
install or download Windows Live
Essentials, many of the apps appear from the
| | 00:12 |
Windows orb or Start button.
| | 00:14 |
If you select All Programs, and then
click the Windows Live folder, you'll see
| | 00:18 |
them all listed here.
| | 00:20 |
What you'll notice though is that the
Windows Live Calendar does not appear on
| | 00:24 |
this list. Some will also appear on
the webpage or the Windows Live toolbar.
| | 00:29 |
If you decide that you are going to
install or download the Windows Live toolbar,
| | 00:33 |
you're going to see some links
to things like Mail, and Photos.
| | 00:37 |
There's Calendar right there, and you'll
also see some buttons that show up by default.
| | 00:42 |
You can also add your own buttons.
| | 00:44 |
If we want to access the Calendar, we can
do it directly from our Windows Live toolbar.
| | 00:49 |
We can also access the Calendar
from the Windows Live homepage.
| | 00:53 |
Once you've signed in, you'll
notice some more option here.
| | 00:56 |
When you click More,
Calendar appears right at the top.
| | 00:59 |
So it's up to you how you
access Calendar. Let's do it now.
| | 01:03 |
You'll see it's loading here, and I see
my Calendar showing my current date, and
| | 01:09 |
down below is where I can go to add an event.
| | 01:12 |
When I click Add an event,
I now move to a new page.
| | 01:15 |
Now the first thing I might
want to do is select my time zone.
| | 01:19 |
If it's not right, and it's not
in this case. It says Pacific Time.
| | 01:23 |
I am going to click the dropdown
and I really want Eastern Time.
| | 01:26 |
So I am going to try to find that one
on this long list, and when I select it
| | 01:31 |
and click Go to your calendar,
I actually see my calendar and it's updated for
| | 01:36 |
the current date and time.
| | 01:37 |
Now, remember, I chose to add an event.
| | 01:40 |
So here's where I get to add that event.
| | 01:43 |
In the What field, I get to
type what this event is all about.
| | 01:46 |
I am going to call it Karen's Birthday, and
now I don't have to fill in the Where field.
| | 01:54 |
The Calendar is going to my calendar.
| | 01:57 |
I can add a charm if I wanted to,
so a little icon that goes with it.
| | 02:01 |
Since it's my wife, I'll
put a little heart next to it.
| | 02:04 |
It's going to be an all day event, and
it's actually not going to be this month.
| | 02:08 |
So when I click in the Start field
here a little monthly calendar pops up.
| | 02:12 |
So I can go to the next month using the arrows.
| | 02:14 |
We've got next and previous months.
| | 02:17 |
And I can click the date.
| | 02:18 |
It's going to end that same day.
| | 02:21 |
If I want to set a Recurrence I could,
choosing Set recurrence allows me to
| | 02:25 |
choose whether or not it's a
daily event, or weekly event.
| | 02:29 |
In this case, I am going to repeat
it every 365 days, how about that?
| | 02:33 |
It's a yearly event.
| | 02:35 |
But easier than that would be to
choose the Occurs dropdown, choose Yearly
| | 02:40 |
on October the 27th.
| | 02:41 |
That way, I don't have to
worry about leap years and so on.
| | 02:45 |
And in this case, I am
going to choose Never ends.
| | 02:47 |
But if I only wanted the next 10 years,
for example, I could have it end after
| | 02:52 |
10 occurrences, or choose a
specific year if I wanted to.
| | 02:56 |
Now, the reminder is set by default to
remind me 12 hours before this event.
| | 03:01 |
So that would actually not give me
enough time to plan something special.
| | 03:05 |
So I am going to choose to be
reminded a full week in advance.
| | 03:09 |
And if I wanted to invite people at this
point, I could, using the Invite people button.
| | 03:14 |
Now, this is going to use my contacts
in Messenger, but I'm not going to do that.
| | 03:18 |
I am going to leave it as it is.
| | 03:20 |
Everything looks good here.
| | 03:22 |
I like what I've got.
| | 03:23 |
So I am going to save all of what I've
entered here into my calendar by going to
| | 03:30 |
the Calendar after I click the Save button.
| | 03:33 |
So, it just takes a moment to
update my own calendar with that event.
| | 03:38 |
Remember we are going to be
creating an occurrence that's going to
| | 03:42 |
repeat itself for 10 years.
| | 03:44 |
So, in this case, it might take a
moment to update 10 years worth of events
| | 03:49 |
here on October 27th, and once it's
done, I will see my calendar with that
| | 03:53 |
updated information.
| | 03:54 |
All right, so here we are back
to our calendar. It showed up.
| | 03:58 |
And if I scroll down, I am able to see
up until a certain point according to the
| | 04:04 |
current date on my calendar.
| | 04:06 |
If I want to move ahead, I can use
the Navigation buttons here, or I can go
| | 04:09 |
over here to the left-hand side in
the Navigation pane, and click that arrow
| | 04:13 |
to go to the next month.
| | 04:15 |
Look at that. On the 27th,
I have got a little icon here.
| | 04:18 |
And as I hover over that,
I see it's Karen's Birthday.
| | 04:21 |
It's a recurring event. I
can tell it from this symbol.
| | 04:24 |
October 27th, All day, and if I need to
make changes to this event, I can edit
| | 04:29 |
it or delete it altogether.
| | 04:31 |
I am going to go the Edit event.
| | 04:33 |
That's going to take me back to an
option where I can edit one occurrence or
| | 04:38 |
edit every occurrence.
| | 04:40 |
I want them all edited.
| | 04:41 |
So I am going to click Open and I am
back where I started when I created this.
| | 04:45 |
This is something I want to make private.
| | 04:47 |
So if I share my calendar with
somebody, they're not going to see this.
| | 04:50 |
Of course, I need to scroll down and
save any changes I make by clicking Save.
| | 04:56 |
And there I am, back to my calendar,
and as I hover over this, I see the little
| | 05:00 |
lock symbol indicating
this is a private occurrence.
| | 05:04 |
Now, over on the left-hand side, you
can also choose which calendars you're
| | 05:07 |
going to look at, all combined into one.
| | 05:10 |
Notice that my calendar, which I'm
looking at by default, also includes a
| | 05:14 |
birthday calendar and a
Canadian holidays calendar.
| | 05:18 |
So they are all combined into one.
| | 05:20 |
If I deselect Canada Holidays,
Remembrance Day disappears from November 11th.
| | 05:26 |
If I select that to put it back, there it is.
| | 05:29 |
And I hover over that.
| | 05:30 |
You'll see some
information about Remembrance Day.
| | 05:33 |
If I deselect the Birthday calendar,
my event that I added, even though
| | 05:37 |
it's birthday, it stays there because
I added it to my calendar as opposed
| | 05:41 |
to the Birthday calendar.
| | 05:42 |
But some people like to keep all
their birthdays separate on a birthday
| | 05:45 |
calendar, so that they can turn it on
and off and just view their own events
| | 05:49 |
versus birthday events and holidays.
| | 05:51 |
You can also add additional calendars
here as well, which is kind of cool.
| | 05:55 |
So you can color code it, and
you can name it whatever you want.
| | 05:58 |
I am going to do Medical Appts.
| | 06:04 |
I am going to choose a color here of yellow and
if I want, I can use a charm as well, a little icon.
| | 06:11 |
In this case, I don't see anything that
applies, so I am going to leave it at None.
| | 06:15 |
And the Description for this calendar,
not any specific event, it's going to be
| | 06:22 |
All medical appointments. There we go.
| | 06:27 |
And when I click Save, notice it now
appears over here on the left-hand side.
| | 06:32 |
I can click Medical Appts to go
back and make any changes if I need to.
| | 06:36 |
I'm going to click Cancel, and if I
want to add a new event, then I can
| | 06:41 |
choose to add it to the Medical Appts
calendar or any one of these other calendars as well.
| | 06:47 |
So that's how you use the Windows Live Calendar.
| | 06:49 |
It's a great little tool for not
just viewing events, but adding events.
| | 06:54 |
Notice you can also do a To-do list here.
| | 06:57 |
You can add to-do list
items and attach dates to them.
| | 07:00 |
You can change the way you view your calendar.
| | 07:02 |
Day, week, month is the default view,
and navigating through the various
| | 07:08 |
calendars throughout the year, and
even throughout your own calendar.
| | 07:12 |
It's very easily done.
| | 07:13 |
It's a handy tool if you need
reminders of things as they're coming up.
| | 07:17 |
I like using the Windows Live
Calendar for just that reason.
| | 07:22 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Free email with Windows Live Mail| 00:00 | When you set up your Windows Live
profile and sign in for the first time, you
| | 00:03 | have access to your free e-mail account.
| | 00:06 | Great for receiving and sending e-mail messages.
| | 00:09 | You can use Calendars as we
saw in the previous lesson.
| | 00:11 | That kind of thing.
| | 00:12 | But with Windows Live Essentials, you
get some added functionality as well.
| | 00:16 | So here, in Internet Explorer, it
really doesn't matter what's on your screen.
| | 00:20 | If you have got the Windows Live
toolbar active, you'll notice a tab to preview
| | 00:25 | your mail and when you click this link
you're getting a preview of your Inbox
| | 00:29 | and it looks like I've got a single
message in here. It came two hours ago.
| | 00:33 | You may see more in your own.
| | 00:35 | You can go directly to a link that
allows you to create and send a message or
| | 00:39 | you can go to your Inbox and when you
choose go to your Inbox, you are actually
| | 00:43 | going to see your Inbox in Internet Explorer 8.
| | 00:45 | All of this is happening online.
| | 00:48 | Now there's some added functionality by
going down to the Windows orb, clicking
| | 00:52 | All Programs, choosing Windows Live and
selecting Windows Live Mail from here.
| | 00:59 | When you select this you may be asked
to set up an e-mail account but basically
| | 01:04 | what you're going to see in the screen
is a navigation pane down the left-hand side,
| | 01:08 | where you can go to look at
unread e-mail, unread from your contacts,
| | 01:12 | you can link into your
contacts directly from here.
| | 01:15 | Notice the links down below as well.
| | 01:17 | You have got your calendar and contacts
down here, RSS feeds and newsgroups that
| | 01:22 | you may have subscribed to, and over
here in the top right-hand corner you'll
| | 01:26 | see the Sign In button.
| | 01:28 | So here you can sign into Windows Live
directly and when you do that, you'll be
| | 01:32 | using the same contact list
as your Windows Live website.
| | 01:35 | You will be able to see when senders
are online in Messenger and you will be
| | 01:39 | able to synchronize with your Windows
Live Calendar that's on the Web, so your
| | 01:42 | calendar here in Windows Live
Essentials will be synced up.
| | 01:46 | So let's go ahead and do that. If you've
already created your profile, you will
| | 01:50 | be able to click the dropdown arrow
and select your e-mail address. You will
| | 01:54 | need to type in your password and if
you want to remember your password,
| | 02:01 | in other words, you don't have to
type in every time on this computer,
| | 02:03 | you can click this checkbox
before you click the Sign In button.
| | 02:07 | So this actually sign you into Windows
Live Mail and this creates a different view.
| | 02:12 | First of all on the left-hand side
in the navigation pane you'll see your
| | 02:15 | profile and your user name.
| | 02:18 | Up here at the top Windows Live Mail
needs to download the folders before you
| | 02:22 | can read the messages in this
accounts, so if you've got anything in your
| | 02:25 | Windows Live Account, click the
Download button and then just wait a minute and
| | 02:29 | you'll see what happens here.
| | 02:30 | Now I am accessing from Windows Live
Essential Windows Live Mail, my messages
| | 02:35 | that I saw online by logging in
from a website. So, here it is.
| | 02:40 | There's my one message, there's a preview
on the right-hand side, so I can view it.
| | 02:44 | You'll notice over here on the
left now, I have got my Inbox here.
| | 02:47 | I have got access to it.
| | 02:49 | When I start creating messages
before I send them, they will be drafts.
| | 02:53 | I can look at items I've sent, junk
e-mail, deleted items, just like any
| | 02:57 | full-fledged e-mail application.
| | 03:00 | Now across the top I have got on the
toolbar, the New button for creating a
| | 03:04 | new e-mail message. If you click the
dropdown, you can do photo e-mails,
| | 03:08 | create new events in your calendar,
news messages, create a new contact,
| | 03:13 | a new folder if you want to keep your
e-mail messages separated and organized.
| | 03:18 | You have got the Reply button.
| | 03:19 | These are all buttons you're
used to seeing if you use any other
| | 03:22 | e-mail application now.
| | 03:24 | So, with Windows Live Mail you get
some additional functionality you don't
| | 03:29 | get with just using your Windows Live
Account and accessing your free mail
| | 03:34 | account through that.
| | 03:35 | So, I really like this feature.
| | 03:37 | Let's create a brand new message.
| | 03:38 | We will click the New button.
| | 03:40 | You can see we get a separate window.
| | 03:42 | It's really like we have got a
full-fledged e-mail application.
| | 03:45 | I have got all kinds of options for
changing my stationary, the look and feel of
| | 03:50 | the text with fonts and font
sizes and attributes here as well.
| | 03:54 | I can get quite fancy with
bulleted and formatted lists.
| | 03:58 | I have got indenting for paragraphs, a spell
checker built in, a button for adding photos.
| | 04:04 | Let's try creating a message here. I am
going to send one to myself at another
| | 04:08 | account and I will put in the subject,
Live Mail, and I am going to choose the
| | 04:16 | Stationary. Choose More Stationary.
How about Color Stripe? Click OK and you can
| | 04:23 | see that puts that down the left-hand side.
| | 04:26 | This is a test of Windows Live Mail
and all I have to do now to send it off is
| | 04:35 | click the Send button that appears
inside this Window and off it goes.
| | 04:39 | Now you will notice sometimes this will
happen. Please enter the characters you
| | 04:42 | see or hear and it's to help prevent
automated programs from sending spam out.
| | 04:48 | So, you have got the little speaker icon.
| | 04:50 | You can refresh this if you're having
difficulty reading the characters that appear here.
| | 04:55 | If you prefer to hear them, click the speaker.
| | 04:58 | However you get those characters,
| | 05:00 | you'll need to duplicate them
down here in the Characters field.
| | 05:03 | So I am going to type
them in, the way I see them.
| | 05:08 | Don't worry about case.
| | 05:10 | I'm going to click OK.
| | 05:12 | That just allows you to send off the
message and Windows Live Mail knows it's
| | 05:16 | not an automated message or spam.
| | 05:18 | So, now if I go over to my Sent items,
I should be able to see the message I sent.
| | 05:22 | There it is and this person at
lynda.com should be receiving your
| | 05:27 | mail message and they will see it just
like they would if it came from Outlook
| | 05:30 | or some other e-mail application.
| | 05:32 | If you want to add in additional
account, you can click Add e-mail account.
| | 05:37 | So you can add another e-mail address.
| | 05:39 | So you would have your e-mail address,
your password and the display name.
| | 05:43 | This way you can have multiple
accounts and access them all from the same
| | 05:46 | location right here in Windows Live Mail.
| | 05:50 | So, I don't at this time but you could
create a new one if you wanted to, such
| | 05:53 | as a Hotmail account and use it from here.
| | 05:55 | I am going to click Cancel
and confirm by clicking Yes.
| | 05:59 | When you are done you just simply go up
to the top right-hand corner and close
| | 06:03 | it up and you can see we are back to
Internet Explorer 8 and I am synced up with
| | 06:07 | my Windows Live account here, the mail
feature that's online under Windows Live.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Texting live with Windows Live Messenger| 00:00 | Instant messaging has become
extremely popular over the years.
| | 00:04 | Live chatting allows you to hold live
conversations with other people via the keyboard.
| | 00:10 | While Windows Live Essentials includes
Windows Live Messenger, which is a great
| | 00:13 | tool for accomplishing just that.
| | 00:16 | You going to have live
conversations without picking up the phone.
| | 00:18 | You can do up while you're working
on other things in your computer.
| | 00:21 | So let's explore it now, we will
click the Windows orb and All Programs.
| | 00:25 | Under Windows Live, that's where
you'll find Windows Live Messenger.
| | 00:29 | Now clicking this opens up the
window but does not sign you in.
| | 00:32 | There's a couple of things
you can do before you sign in.
| | 00:35 | First of all, you can choose your profile.
| | 00:38 | You can see the one I set up in a
previous lesson here shows up by default, but
| | 00:42 | you might have multiple profiles and
you can login by clicking the dropdown and
| | 00:46 | choosing something different.
| | 00:48 | I am going to keep my default.
| | 00:50 | I also chose when I set up Windows Live
Essentials to login on this computer and
| | 00:55 | remember my password.
| | 00:56 | So it's remembered here as well.
I don't have to type in my password.
| | 00:59 | All I have to do is click Sign In, but
just before I do, something interesting
| | 01:04 | here is you choose what status
should be displayed when you sign in.
| | 01:08 | If I leave it at Available, the moment
I sign in, anyone who is on my contact list
| | 01:13 | who has chatted with me or has
made up a contact using my profile will
| | 01:18 | see that I've logged in and
might start messaging me right away.
| | 01:22 | If you don't want that to happen,
change the status, click the dropdown button,
| | 01:26 | show yourself as Busy, Away or even to
appear offline even when you're online,
| | 01:32 | you can do that, so when you login
you are not inundated with messages.
| | 01:36 | But I am going to choose Available.
| | 01:38 | That's okay and click Sign In.
| | 01:40 | Now, when you sign in,
additional information is going to pop up.
| | 01:43 | First of all, you're going to see
this window show up over here on the
| | 01:46 | right-hand side. It gives you quick access
to your mail, there's the Windows Live,
| | 01:50 | Home, Bing, etcetera.
| | 01:53 | But you can close that up if you're not
interested, no problem and over here you
| | 01:57 | can see a list of your contacts.
| | 01:59 | If this is your first time logging in like
it is for me, you won't see any contacts.
| | 02:03 | You'll see some buttons though.
| | 02:06 | For example, up at the top, your own
photo can appear here, but it's also a
| | 02:09 | button that allows you to go in, change
your profile, add a photo to show up up here
| | 02:14 | and view online files for
example in your contact cards.
| | 02:18 | So, all you have to do is hover
over that button to make those changes.
| | 02:21 | Over here you'll notice the little
envelopes to go directly to your e-mail box
| | 02:25 | and down below we have got some buttons.
| | 02:27 | Here's where we can go to add a
contact or a group of contacts.
| | 02:30 | We can change the list,
layout, the way it appears.
| | 02:34 | We will need to see some contacts
before we explore that any further.
| | 02:37 | We can also show the menu bar.
| | 02:39 | So, here if I wanted to see what's on
the File menu, I have got things like
| | 02:43 | signing out, and go to, sending files,
and this is very similar to a menu bar that
| | 02:49 | might show up across the top of a window.
| | 02:50 | Here you have got your
categories and your subcategories.
| | 02:54 | For example, if I to want to go to my
Windows Live Messenger Options, I could
| | 02:58 | do it right from here.
| | 02:59 | You can see I can type the name that I
want others to see, if I don't want just
| | 03:03 | see my profile or e-mail address. I could
type something else in here like David R.
| | 03:09 | I could also add a personal
message directly from here.
| | 03:12 | I am just going to click OK to
save that and close up the window.
| | 03:16 | You can see my name's changed at the top.
| | 03:18 | Still my Windows Live Profile that's been
used to login, but this is what people will see.
| | 03:23 | All right, time to add a contact. We
can do it by clicking the Add a contact or
| | 03:27 | group button or we can do it right here
from our Welcome To Messenger message.
| | 03:31 | Click Add a contact in you
will see the exact same thing.
| | 03:34 | Now we just need the address and hopefully
they've got Windows Live Messenger as well.
| | 03:38 | So I am going to use somebody I know who does.
| | 03:41 | That's me, using a different account.
| | 03:43 | Just another dummy account I set up
and I can add some additional information
| | 03:49 | like a number and a category,
but I am going to click Next.
| | 03:52 | If I wanted to, I can include a
message to go to this person right now, also
| | 03:57 | send them an e-mail in case they don't
have Messenger, but I am going to just
| | 04:00 | send the invitation.
| | 04:02 | Let's just type something quickly.
| | 04:04 | Will you chat with me?
| | 04:08 | All right, when we click Send invitation,
off it goes to that e-mail address if
| | 04:12 | they got Windows Live Messenger.
| | 04:14 | You will be able to add them as a
contact and just before we click Close,
| | 04:18 | you will notice we can also add this person
to our online profile page, if you have
| | 04:21 | got your Windows Live account set up
on your profile page, you can have them
| | 04:25 | show up there as well when you login.
| | 04:27 | So, I am going to do that.
| | 04:29 | You can see it opens up Internet Explorer.
| | 04:30 | It's going to take me to that page.
Here I can confirm my name. I am going to
| | 04:35 | click Save and the invitation
goes out to Rave Divers, so this is a
| | 04:41 | different screen now.
| | 04:42 | So I can send the invitation from here
as well and you can see it's busy sending
| | 04:47 | out that invitation and there we go.
| | 04:49 | So I am going to close up this for now.
| | 04:52 | It's going to take me back to my
Windows Live Messenger window and now you can see,
| | 04:56 | I have got here under offline, David.
| | 05:00 | So I've actually got this person on my
contact list and I can click that name to
| | 05:06 | send an offline instant message, if I
wanted to. That means when they log in,
| | 05:10 | they will get my message, send them
an e-mail, I can do lots from here.
| | 05:13 | I am going to send an offline message.
| | 05:15 | Here you can see a little bit of
information about how that works and next
| | 05:19 | time they sign in, they will get
your message, click OK and David Rivers
| | 05:22 | appears to be offline. That's OK.
| | 05:24 | Here's where we go to type in our
message and notice there is some information here.
| | 05:29 | If you have never used this before,
you shouldn't be including information
| | 05:32 | like your own passwords and credit card
numbers in an instant message like this.
| | 05:37 | So let's just come back down here
where we were typing our message. We will
| | 05:40 | see it appear up here.
| | 05:41 | Hi Dave, call me when you get this message.
| | 05:50 | Maybe I want to add a little
emoticon, a little smiley face at the end.
| | 05:55 | All I do here is Enter or Return on
a keyboard and the message is sent.
| | 06:00 | Now it couldn't be delivered to all recipients.
| | 06:02 | That's because the other guy is not
online, but when he logs in, he will get it.
| | 06:06 | So that's how instant messaging works
and when we close this window we are still
| | 06:11 | going to be logged in.
| | 06:12 | we can save all of our text conversations.
| | 06:14 | That's something else that's important
to know and when you log out or close
| | 06:18 | up a window like this,
| | 06:19 | you have the options to save your
messages on this computer or not save your
| | 06:24 | messages and that's the default.
| | 06:26 | When you click OK, conversation is
gone and you're back to your Windows
| | 06:30 | Live Messenger window.
| | 06:32 | So, here you can start to build up your
contact list. Remember if you chose to
| | 06:36 | have those appear on your profile page,
you will see the same contacts when you
| | 06:40 | log into your Windows Live account
and when you're done, just closing this
| | 06:44 | window is not enough.
| | 06:46 | Notice when I close, it still appears
down hear on my taskbar and it looks like
| | 06:51 | I am still available. I have just
closed it up from my desktop, but if you
| | 06:55 | right-click down here, you'll see some
other options like, Close the window.
| | 07:01 | When you close the window from here you
will actually exit Messenger and you'll
| | 07:05 | appear offline because you
are offline at this point.
| | 07:09 | So, that's instant messaging
with Windows Live Messenger.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Organizing and sharing photos in Photo Gallery| 00:00 | If you've downloaded Windows Live
Essentials and you chose to install
| | 00:04 | the Live Photo Gallery, you have a great
tool for organizing, fixing photos, even
| | 00:10 | sharing them with others.
| | 00:11 | So we are going to explore that now.
| | 00:13 | Let's go down to the Windows orb and
under All Programs, we'll click Windows Live,
| | 00:17 | and choose the Windows Live Photo Gallery.
| | 00:20 | Now this is going to open up our Photo
Gallery and automatically it's going to
| | 00:26 | try to locate all of the photos on our system.
| | 00:30 | So if you are logged in and if you are
on the network, and you've got pictures
| | 00:35 | that are public, and your own pictures,
they may show up here on the screen.
| | 00:39 | First though, you are going to see this
little window pop-up asking you, do you
| | 00:42 | want to start using Windows Live
Photo Gallery to open the various types of
| | 00:47 | picture files like JPEGs TIFFs, PNGs and so on?
| | 00:51 | If you answer Yes, every time you
double-click a file, let's say, in Windows
| | 00:55 | Explorer that ends with JPG, it's
going to be Windows Live Photo Gallery that
| | 01:00 | opens up and displays that as opposed
to the Preview application that simply
| | 01:05 | shows you that image.
| | 01:06 | So I am going to choose Yes, but
before I do that, I don't want to see
| | 01:09 | this message again.
| | 01:10 | I am going to choose Yes, and now
it's going to be my default program for
| | 01:14 | viewing those types of
graphic files. So here I am.
| | 01:18 | On my left-hand-side, I
have got my Navigation Pane.
| | 01:20 | You see My Pictures, for example.
When I click that, I've only got one.
| | 01:24 | Under Public Pictures, you can see
all of those images that come with your
| | 01:29 | Windows 7 installation.
| | 01:31 | If you want to add some of your own,
you can start putting pictures into your My
| | 01:36 | Pictures folder they'll automatically
appear here, or you might want to add your
| | 01:40 | own folder, and that's what
we are going to do right now.
| | 01:43 | When you click the File button
dropdown, you'll notice you can include a
| | 01:47 | folder in the gallery.
| | 01:49 | You can even import from a camera if
you've got it connected, or a scanner.
| | 01:53 | We want to include a folder, and in
this case we are going to grab a folder
| | 01:58 | from our Exercise Files.
| | 02:00 | So we'll click the little arrow
next to Exercise Files to expand that.
| | 02:04 | Go down to the Chap12 folder, and click
the triangle next to it, and under the
| | 02:10 | 12_06 folder, we have some images.
| | 02:13 | So we are going to select that folder.
| | 02:14 | There is no sub-folders there, and
click OK, and when we do, you'll notice it
| | 02:19 | gets added over in the left-
hand side in the Navigation Pane.
| | 02:22 | It says here the folder has been added.
| | 02:25 | Now it may run slower while the files
are being added, but there's not too many
| | 02:28 | in there so that's okay.
| | 02:29 | I don't want to see that message again,
and I'll click OK, and there they are there.
| | 02:34 | There is the three that exists in the 12
_06 folder that just have been added to our
| | 02:38 | Windows Live Photo Gallery, just like that.
| | 02:41 | Now with a number of photos whether
you've got Public Pictures in there,
| | 02:45 | Sample Pictures, you can see
the ones that come with Windows 7.
| | 02:47 | We have also got videos.
| | 02:50 | We have also got ways to organize
these, if you want to see them by the
| | 02:53 | date they were taken.
| | 02:54 | You can see they are
categorized now by their dates.
| | 02:57 | We can expand and collapse these if we want to.
| | 02:59 | There is a video down below
that comes with Windows 7.
| | 03:03 | And if you want to, you can go to
specific dates like in this case a month, or a
| | 03:08 | specific day in that month.
| | 03:10 | You can see here I have got February.
| | 03:12 | I have got different dates in February.
| | 03:14 | I want to see all the February ones, no problem.
| | 03:17 | So this is just another way to organize.
| | 03:20 | Down below, if you've got a Windows
Live account, you setup Windows Messenger
| | 03:25 | and you decided you want your contacts to
appear in your Windows Live account as well,
| | 03:29 | you might be able to see People tags down here.
| | 03:32 | Using People tags, you might have
tagged photos, using these People tags and
| | 03:38 | those photos will show up.
| | 03:39 | Now in this case we haven't done any of that.
| | 03:41 | So we might want to add a new
tag, or view other contacts.
| | 03:45 | If we do that, you can see photos tagged
with David Rivers is one for me, and
| | 03:50 | it depends on who your contacts are.
| | 03:52 | You can see I have got a
whole bunch over here as well.
| | 03:55 | So if you've got a contact, click
their name, you might be able to see photos
| | 03:58 | that were tagged with their name.
| | 04:01 | So let's go back up to our photos.
| | 04:03 | Let's go to the 12_06
folder, and select a photo.
| | 04:06 | We'll select the one under April 2008.
| | 04:09 | As you hover that, you will notice a
little checkbox appears and we get a larger
| | 04:14 | view of it with some information.
| | 04:16 | So if we wanted to tag this, let's go
down to our tags, down below we've got
| | 04:21 | People tags, and this isn't really a
person, but maybe it's a person's car.
| | 04:26 | On this case we might want to take
their name and just tag them with this.
| | 04:30 | So we'll drag it down to
their name and apply the tag.
| | 04:35 | When you let go, click that tag you are
going to see in this case this one and
| | 04:40 | the other ones that were already tagged.
| | 04:42 | We can also go back.
| | 04:44 | Let's go up to the top, and select
that folder, and we'll select the Otter.
| | 04:48 | Here we go we have got those otters.
| | 04:51 | If we want a descriptive tag, we
can use a different tag down the left.
| | 04:55 | Now in this case, we do have one called Animal.
| | 04:57 | You can add as many tags as you want.
| | 05:00 | When you click Enter a tag here to
create a new tag, you just simply type over
| | 05:04 | the text that's there.
| | 05:06 | Let's go with Water mammals and press Return.
| | 05:11 | Now we've got that additional tag.
| | 05:14 | So we can drag it down to Water mammals.
| | 05:17 | When we let go, nothing really seems to
have changed, we are still viewing the
| | 05:21 | content of that contents of that
folder but if we want to go look at just our
| | 05:23 | Water mammals, well we have got
one that was tagged that way.
| | 05:26 | You can use the Back
button instead of scrolling up.
| | 05:29 | Go back to the previous view, which
was our 12_06 Exercise Files folder, and
| | 05:35 | that's how we can use Windows
Live Photo gallery to stay organized.
| | 05:38 | But you'll also notice, we have got
a number of options across the top.
| | 05:42 | I have got a nice little toolbar.
| | 05:43 | So if there's an image we want to
fix, for example, we can do that.
| | 05:46 | Let's go to this one.
| | 05:48 | It kind of looks like a bird.
| | 05:49 | It's hard to tell, as we hover over it,
we'll just let it display the larger
| | 05:53 | preview, and it is indeed.
| | 05:55 | It's called Macaws. It's a JPEG file.
| | 05:58 | We might fix up one up a little bit.
| | 06:00 | So let's click Fix.
| | 06:01 | When we do that and we see the
image, it's turned on its side here.
| | 06:05 | So the first thing we might
want to do is just rotate it.
| | 06:08 | Now down below we've got some Rotate
buttons to rotate counterclockwise or clockwise.
| | 06:13 | This one needs to go counterclockwise.
| | 06:15 | There we go and now it's right side up.
| | 06:17 | And then we have these options down the
right-hand side for adjusting the image itself.
| | 06:22 | If there's any redeye we can
fix it using the Red Eye tool.
| | 06:25 | I don't see any here.
| | 06:26 | So we don't need that one.
| | 06:27 | But Auto adjust at the top is
automatically going to adjust things like
| | 06:32 | exposure, and the color,
maybe even straighten it for us.
| | 06:36 | Let's choose Auto Adjust.
| | 06:37 | You can see it's busy.
| | 06:38 | It does do a little shift.
| | 06:40 | It seems to have straightened up a little bit.
| | 06:42 | When we click Auto Adjust you can
see a little check marks. It's been
| | 06:45 | automatically adjusted.
| | 06:47 | And we also get these sliders now to
adjust the Brightness, Contrast, Shadows,
| | 06:51 | and Highlights, if we want to do it manually.
| | 06:53 | So if we drag the Brightness slider to
the right, you can see it gets brighter.
| | 06:56 | And you can see the
Histogram down below is adjusted.
| | 07:00 | Ideally we don't want to see an uneven set
of mountains down there in our Histogram.
| | 07:06 | So we can use our Contrast
to spread that out a little bit.
| | 07:11 | We can work on the Shadows and the Highlights.
| | 07:14 | So these are the dark parts of the photo.
We can make them darker going to left,
| | 07:17 | and make them lighter going to right.
| | 07:20 | Same thing for the Highlights, the bright
spots in this photo. If they are not bright enough,
| | 07:24 | we can move this slider to the right.
| | 07:25 | If they are too brighten
spots, we can move to the left.
| | 07:28 | You can see how it affects our
Histogram down below. Here we go.
| | 07:33 | All right let's click Auto adjust
again, and you can see everything gets
| | 07:35 | re-adjusted automatically.
| | 07:37 | There is a little arrow at
the top and at the bottom.
| | 07:41 | So you can see we can
move down through the list.
| | 07:45 | Under Color we've got Color Temperature.
| | 07:47 | So we can warm it up, going to the right.
| | 07:50 | Cool it down going to the left. So warm it up.
| | 07:54 | And the Tint can be affected as well.
| | 07:56 | We are going to red to the
right, green to the left.
| | 08:00 | So more near the middle
is pretty good actually.
| | 08:02 | Saturation is the amount of color in his photo.
| | 08:06 | So if we want to turn this into a black-
and-white, drag this slider to the left
| | 08:09 | to remove all the color.
| | 08:11 | And if we go to the right, you can see how it
intensifies the color, almost to the extreme.
| | 08:16 | So somewhere there is a
good level for our Saturation.
| | 08:20 | Straighten the photo.
| | 08:21 | You can see the checkmark that appears here.
| | 08:23 | That was all part of our Auto adjust.
| | 08:25 | So it was shifted slightly, but we can use
this slider to straighten photos ourselves.
| | 08:34 | And then down below we also
have tools for cropping the photo.
| | 08:38 | I just choose Crop Photo.
| | 08:40 | You can move the crop area to
select just the parts we want.
| | 08:44 | I want there and from the left corner
when I see the double arrow, I can change
| | 08:52 | the size of this rectangle.
| | 08:54 | Once I've got what I want, I just simply
click Apply and it has cropped the photo.
| | 08:59 | Perfect. Notice that there are some
effects like black and white effects.
| | 09:02 | You can see the different sepias and black
and white effects, if you wanted to switch this.
| | 09:07 | Anytime you click in effect or fix
something that doesn't come out just right,
| | 09:11 | go down to the Undo button, click Undo
to undo the last thing you did, or click
| | 09:16 | the dropdown to see a whole list of
things you've done, and you can go back undo
| | 09:20 | a whole bunch of them.
| | 09:21 | Undo all sets it
right back to the beginning.
| | 09:25 | So let's scroll all the way back up to the
top now and we'll click Auto adjust again.
| | 09:31 | And I think that's pretty good.
| | 09:33 | It's done a nice little job of touching
up my photo so the colors are more vibrant.
| | 09:39 | It straightened it out a
little bit, adjusted exposure.
| | 09:42 | So if you are in a hurry Auto adjust
is a great way to fix up the photo.
| | 09:45 | Now you are ready to do something
with it, for example up at the top.
| | 09:49 | You might want to publish it.
| | 09:50 | When you click Publish you can go to an
Online album, or Group album, an Event
| | 09:55 | album, and there is More Services.
| | 09:56 | For example if you got a Flickr account,
you can publish it right to Flickr or
| | 10:00 | YouTube if it's a video for
example. Or maybe you prefer to e-mail.
| | 10:05 | Now the E-mail button from here
is going to use Microsoft Outlook.
| | 10:09 | So if I click the E-mail, it's
automatically going to show me the photo size.
| | 10:14 | I can click Attach, and you'll
notice that Microsoft Outlook hasn't been
| | 10:18 | setup on this machine.
| | 10:19 | So if you do use Microsoft Outlook,
and your profile has been setup and
| | 10:23 | everything is working great, you will
have create a brand-new message and your
| | 10:27 | photo attached ready to send off but if
you see this message just click OK, and
| | 10:32 | then go back and setup Outlook accordingly.
| | 10:35 | We also have the ability to print from here.
| | 10:38 | We can Order Prints online if you are connected.
| | 10:40 | Under Make, we can make a movie out of photos.
| | 10:43 | Now this is just a single
photo that we are fixing.
| | 10:45 | If we want to back to the Gallery,
we click Back to gallery and we can select
| | 10:50 | more than one photo.
| | 10:52 | When we click the first one, hold
down Shift and click the last one.
| | 10:55 | They all get selected, and now if we
go up to Make, we can create a panoramic
| | 10:59 | photo if they were supposed to connect together.
| | 11:01 | We can make a movie out of these three.
| | 11:04 | We can burn them to a DVD, or a CD
depending on the type of drive and disks you have.
| | 11:10 | We can even make a blog post directly from here.
| | 11:12 | You want display them in a
slideshow. Click the Slide Show button.
| | 11:15 | Any of your selected photos will
now be displayed in a slide show.
| | 11:19 | So there's the first one. I am
just going to use default settings.
| | 11:22 | You'll see it for a couple of seconds before
it moves on to the next, and then the next.
| | 11:26 | You can press Escape at any time to
exit the slideshow and you are back to your
| | 11:30 | Windows Live Gallery.
| | 11:33 | Under Extras, you'll notice we can
download more photo tools, or we can open
| | 11:38 | these photos with something else, like our
Picture Manager, the Media Center and Movie Maker.
| | 11:43 | PictureViewer was the default for
viewing pictures here in Windows 7, but if you
| | 11:48 | were like me, you may have click the
checkbox to let Windows Live Photo Gallery
| | 11:52 | be the default for viewing pictures.
| | 11:55 | We can even open it up in the Paint application.
| | 11:58 | So when you are done with Windows
Live Photo Gallery, just click the Close button,
| | 12:01 | and another neat thing you can
do with Windows Live Photo Gallery is
| | 12:05 | sync up your folders and files if
you've got photos on your computer as well as
| | 12:10 | photos online and on another
computer, you can sync them all up.
| | 12:14 | I'll show you how to do that next.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Synchronizing photos on two computers with Live Sync| 00:00 |
If you would like to work with the same
photos, but on more than one computer,
| | 00:03 |
you know it could be a real pain
trying to make sure that those photos are
| | 00:07 |
constantly up-to-date on each computer.
| | 00:10 |
Well with Windows Live Sync, you can
synchronize files and folders on more than one computer.
| | 00:16 |
So if you were working with a photo
here on this computer, you would know that
| | 00:20 |
it's automatically
updated on the other computer.
| | 00:23 |
If you added a few photos to the other
computer, you know you'd be able to see
| | 00:27 |
them here on this
computer with Windows Live Sync.
| | 00:30 |
So we are going to work with Windows Live
Photo Gallery here to explore how this works.
| | 00:35 |
And Windows Live Sync is now built
right into Windows Live Photo Gallery, so we
| | 00:39 |
can access it from here.
| | 00:41 |
You have to have Windows Live Sync
downloaded and installed on more than one
| | 00:45 |
machine for this to work of course,
and if you are going to follow along with me,
| | 00:48 |
you are going to need to be signed
in to your Windows Live Photo Gallery
| | 00:52 |
on a second computer.
| | 00:54 |
And by the way, that other computer
could be a Windows XP machine or higher.
| | 00:58 |
It could even be a Mac running OS X.
There are versions of Windows Live Sync for both.
| | 01:03 |
So once they are installed, up and
running, you have got your photo gallery
| | 01:06 |
on the other computer,
| | 01:07 |
it's time now to sync up with this computer.
| | 01:10 |
Now all of the folders you see here
in the navigationpane, the standard
| | 01:13 |
folders, and any folders you might have
added like we did in a previous lesson,
| | 01:17 |
will be synced up with the other computer.
| | 01:19 |
If the other computer doesn't have it,
it will show up once the sync is complete.
| | 01:24 |
For example, if I go up to My
Pictures, notice I don't have any in the My
| | 01:28 |
Pictures folder here.
| | 01:29 |
This is just referencing My
Pictures folder on this computer.
| | 01:32 |
Well there is nothing in there, but if I
go up to File and I click Setup gallery
| | 01:36 |
sync, I might be prompted to enter my
Windows Live Profile ID and password at
| | 01:43 |
this point, but I have set mine up to
automatically accept it on this machine.
| | 01:47 |
That's why I didn't see that.
| | 01:48 |
And now the sync is actually taking place.
| | 01:51 |
I don't really see anything happening
on my screen quite yet, but if I go down
| | 01:54 |
to the notification area in the Taskbar,
there is this little icon, the Sync
| | 01:58 |
icon showing me that the
sync is actually happening.
| | 02:02 |
Now look at this, I have got photos
showing up here in My Pictures folder.
| | 02:06 |
In other words, it's syncing up with the
My Pictures folder on that other computer.
| | 02:11 |
That's pretty cool, and I
can go down to that icon again.
| | 02:15 |
If you can't see it, just click Show
hidden icons and click the Windows Live
| | 02:19 |
Sync icon and you'll be able to see
the individual folders you can sync up.
| | 02:24 |
If you just wanted to sync up
Pictures, you could click it, and you would
| | 02:27 |
actually see the contents of that
other computer and this computer, all
| | 02:30 |
synced up together.
| | 02:32 |
Or I like this one here. Click Activity
and you will actually be able to see
| | 02:35 |
what's going on here.
| | 02:37 |
For example, I had deleted some things.
| | 02:38 |
So they show up as deleted.
| | 02:40 |
Up here, Recently active files. I got a
few different pictures, and when I click
| | 02:44 |
on a picture, you can see I have
got over here on the right-hand side,
| | 02:48 |
information about these pictures as well.
| | 02:51 |
So Received from OFFICE1, the name
of that computer, and it looks like one
| | 02:54 |
was added by OFFICE1.
| | 02:56 |
So some were received and some were added.
| | 02:59 |
In other words, there's couple of
different directions going on here, some are
| | 03:03 |
being sent, some are being received.
| | 03:05 |
But at the end, everything is all synced up.
| | 03:07 |
So I can close this up when I'm
done reviewing the different activity.
| | 03:12 |
And if you leave this running, this
is the nice thing, no matter what I do here,
| | 03:16 |
if I was to, for example, make a
change to this photo, you could click a
| | 03:21 |
photo and you can choose anyone you like, and
go up to Fix, and then just do an Auto adjust.
| | 03:27 |
You can see that's a nice change
there. I will go back to the gallery.
| | 03:33 |
The cool thing is I've made a change
to that, so it's updated here on this machine,
| | 03:36 |
but because Windows Live Sync
is still running in the background, right
| | 03:41 |
from Windows Photo Gallery,
it's updated on the other computer.
| | 03:45 |
If I go to the other computer,
I am going to see this updated photo.
| | 03:49 |
So, now we can rest assured if we
access the photo from another computer,
| | 03:54 |
it will display the changes in this computer.
| | 03:57 |
All thanks to Windows Live Sync.
| | 04:00 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Controlling content and communications with Family Safety| 00:00 | In Windows 7, many of the Windows
Vista integrated parental controls that you
| | 00:04 | may be familiar with have been
stripped out of the core operating system.
| | 00:08 | And to make up for that lost
functionality, Microsoft has added an extensibility
| | 00:13 | framework to Windows 7 so that third
party providers can add on to the parental
| | 00:18 | control features that we
talked about in a previous lesson.
| | 00:22 | So Windows Live Family Safety is one
example of such a provider, though in this case
| | 00:27 | it's made by Microsoft,
and it's not really a third party.
| | 00:30 | Let's check it out.
| | 00:32 | First, we go down to the Windows
orb or the Start button > All Programs
| | 00:37 | and Windows Live here.
| | 00:39 | If you chose during the installation
and download process to include Windows
| | 00:43 | Live Family Safety, here's where it appears.
| | 00:45 | Here's where we sign in
to setup our Family Safety.
| | 00:48 | So, you'll need your Windows Live ID and your
password, and then click the Sign in button.
| | 00:59 | Now, this may take a moment
just to setup your Family Safety.
| | 01:03 | All of your settings will be
accessible through the Internet on the Family
| | 01:07 | Safety webpage at Windows Live.
| | 01:10 | And once you got that set up, you are ready
to start picking who is going to be monitored.
| | 01:15 | So you are going to be monitoring the
accounts that you have on your computer.
| | 01:19 | So here you can see I am the
Administrator, I am password protected and I have
| | 01:24 | got some other accounts here.
| | 01:26 | Notice for the children here, this is
the one I want to monitor, and I don't
| | 01:30 | need to monitor Karen's.
| | 01:32 | So once, I have selected the accounts
that I want to monitor on this computer,
| | 01:36 | and keep in mind if there are other
computers in your household that you'll want
| | 01:39 | to setup Family Safety on
them as well, you click Save.
| | 01:42 | So you can see that it's setting up
Family Safety according to the accounts
| | 01:47 | I have selected through those checkboxes.
| | 01:49 | You can even create new
accounts right from there, by the way.
| | 01:52 | Now, notice a little message pops-up
that some of my Windows accounts don't have
| | 01:56 | passwords and to prevent children from
bypassing the Family Safety, I might want
| | 02:00 | to add a password to each and every account.
| | 02:03 | In this case, my Guest account.
| | 02:04 | So I can do it right from this window.
| | 02:06 | Click Add passwords, and I am going to
click the Guest account here to select it.
| | 02:12 | And in this case, I want to turn it off.
| | 02:14 | So that's one option.
| | 02:15 | I can turn-off the Guest account, and
when I do that, they won't have access to it.
| | 02:20 | Now, I could have gone down here and
setup parental controls, etcetera, for any
| | 02:25 | of these accounts from here.
| | 02:26 | Keep in mind, we are using the
Family Safety add-on from Windows Live.
| | 02:31 | So, let's go back down to our taskbar.
| | 02:34 | We'll go back to the Family Safety, we'll
click Next, and here's the account we selected.
| | 02:39 | In this case, for me, it was children.
| | 02:41 | The Web filtering, you can see by
default it's set to basic, Activity reporting
| | 02:46 | is turned on. Contact management is not.
| | 02:49 | If you don't see everyone here, you
can monitor another Windows account by
| | 02:52 | clicking this link and selecting it.
| | 02:54 | So to customize these settings, like I said,
we are going to go to familysafety.live.com.
| | 03:00 | So we can close this window, but
let's click this link first to open up our
| | 03:03 | default browser to take
us directly to that site.
| | 03:07 | You may have to login, if you're not already.
| | 03:09 | And here you can see my Children account,
and here's where I go to edit settings
| | 03:14 | and view any activity.
| | 03:15 | I am going to click Edit settings.
| | 03:17 | Now, here we have got Web filtering.
| | 03:20 | We know that the default is set to Basic.
| | 03:22 | Only adult content is blocked
with the basic; websites in other
| | 03:25 | categories aren't blocked.
| | 03:26 | So if you want to make a change,
you just click the link Turn on web
| | 03:30 | filtering already selected.
| | 03:32 | And then here's the
different settings we have.
| | 03:34 | Strict: Blocks all websites
except child-friendly sites.
| | 03:37 | So depending on the age of your
children, you might want that one.
| | 03:40 | And then, there's also Custom down
below where you get to select the
| | 03:43 | categories you want to allow.
| | 03:45 | So I am going to go to that one which
opens up the various categories, and here
| | 03:50 | are the ones that I want to allow.
| | 03:51 | So you will notice child-friendly
website already selected. That's allowed.
| | 03:56 | Social networking websites,
I might want to allow those.
| | 04:00 | And if you wanted Web mail, you
might want to select that one as well.
| | 04:03 | So it's really up to you which
categories you select, and then you can click
| | 04:07 | Save to save your changes.
| | 04:09 | Now, those changes appear here, checked off.
| | 04:12 | Notice also down below, under Custom
here, we can choose to allow or block
| | 04:18 | specific websites just by
simply entering your addresses here.
| | 04:22 | So on the left-hand side, you would
enter an address that you want to allow.
| | 04:26 | On the right-hand side, you can see that it
could be for this person only or for everyone.
| | 04:30 | If you enter an address here and click
the Block button, you'll be blocking it
| | 04:35 | for whatever selected here
on the right side as well.
| | 04:37 | So, it could be for this person only
or for everybody, for both allowing
| | 04:41 | and blocking websites.
| | 04:44 | Down below for downloads, Allow
Children to download files online.
| | 04:47 | You can deselect that.
| | 04:49 | Now you have made another change.
You need to save those changes again
| | 04:52 | clicking the Save button.
| | 04:53 | Now, we have got Activity reporting as well.
| | 04:56 | This is all part of Windows Live Family Safety.
| | 05:00 | You'll be able to use this page
to get reports of the activities.
| | 05:04 | So what sites have your children been visiting?
| | 05:08 | Now down below, we have just started
this up so there's really no activity to
| | 05:11 | look at, but you have also got the
ability to choose the date ranges.
| | 05:15 | You can turn it on or off if
it's something you don't use.
| | 05:18 | You might want to turn off Activity reporting.
| | 05:20 | But when you're ready, just click Show
activity, and of course, we are not going
| | 05:23 | to see anything right now. A 0 appears here.
| | 05:26 | Other Internet activity and computer
activity can also be monitored with this report.
| | 05:32 | So here we see the family members down
in the left, and you can change family
| | 05:36 | members right from here on this page.
| | 05:37 | It's a great little site.
| | 05:39 | And if you really want to control
what your children or family members are
| | 05:44 | accessing on the Internet, it's a
great add-on to the parental controls
| | 05:47 | we talked about in a previous lesson.
| | 05:50 | All right, so when you're done you can sign
out or just simply close up to stay signed in.
| | 05:55 | We can close that window now, and here we
are back to our family safety user accounts.
| | 06:01 | A little message may pop up.
| | 06:03 | You may see Windows Live Family
Safety Settings have been updated.
| | 06:07 | You can close that message
by clicking the Close button.
| | 06:10 | So at any time you can go back to that
website to edit your settings, monitor
| | 06:14 | reports and read them, check them out,
lots of cool features, and with Windows
| | 06:19 | Live Family Safety you can feel
confident and in control over what can be
| | 06:23 | accessed by family members.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Keeping a blog with Windows Live Writer| 00:00 | Brand new to Windows Live Essentials is
Windows Live Writer, a very strong blog editor.
| | 00:05 | Now, it will of course
work with Windows Live Spaces.
| | 00:08 | That's Microsoft's blogging service.
| | 00:10 | That's what I have up
here on my screen right now.
| | 00:12 | But it also works well with pretty
much every competing blog service
| | 00:16 | available out there.
| | 00:17 | You can easily post photos and video
with Windows Live Writer, and through the
| | 00:21 | use of add-ons it integrates well with
a number of related services like Digg,
| | 00:25 | Facebook, Flickr, and even Twitter.
| | 00:27 | So to access Windows Live Writer, of course,
you will have had to have installed it.
| | 00:31 | You will have had to chosen it during the
Windows Live Essentials download and installation.
| | 00:37 | And if so, you can click the Windows
orb, go to All Programs, and in Windows Live,
| | 00:42 | you'll see Windows Live Writer.
| | 00:44 | And your very first time launching this
you'll be prompted for information, such
| | 00:48 | as the blog service you want to use.
| | 00:50 | I choose Windows Live Spaces.
| | 00:53 | You'll also be prompted for some
personal information and once you have set up
| | 00:56 | your connection to whatever blog service,
this is what appears on your screen,
| | 01:00 | your first blog entry or post.
| | 01:02 | So, now we are ready to start typing.
| | 01:05 | Right at the very top, it
says Enter a post title.
| | 01:07 | I am going to click there
and type California Trip.
| | 01:12 | Now down below, I have got this empty
space for adding text and inserting all
| | 01:18 | kinds of other things as well.
| | 01:19 | You'll notice on the right-hand side,
in the Insert section you can insert
| | 01:23 | hyperlinks, pictures, entire photo
albums, there's video down there.
| | 01:27 | So let's try out some of this.
| | 01:31 | 'Here's some wildlife I saw in Santa
Barbara,' and I'll just hit Enter, and
| | 01:40 | I'm going to add a picture.
| | 01:41 | So, I go over to the right-hand side,
click Picture and now I can start
| | 01:44 | browsing my computer for pictures.
| | 01:47 | Now if you have got the Exercise
Files, you can follow along with me.
| | 01:50 | Mine are on the desktop, but any
picture will do here if you are
| | 01:53 | just experimenting.
| | 01:54 | I am going to double-click my Exercise
Files, double-click the Chap12 folder,
| | 01:59 | and in the 12_09 sub-folder,
I've got these otters.
| | 02:02 | So one click selects, I click Open,
and it gets added to my blog post.
| | 02:07 | Notice it appears here selected.
| | 02:09 | You can see the handles around the outside.
| | 02:11 | So, I can do things like go to a
corner when a double-arrow appears.
| | 02:14 | I can adjust the size.
| | 02:16 | If you want to just stretch it out,
adjusting the width, more of the height.
| | 02:20 | You can do that as well.
| | 02:21 | And on the right-hand side,
you'll notice some options as well.
| | 02:25 | Text wrapping is set by default to Inline.
| | 02:27 | So if I tried to move this, I really couldn't.
| | 02:30 | The only way to move it is to
add some more text in front of it.
| | 02:33 | It's treated like any other
character, unless I change this.
| | 02:36 | I can click the dropdown and say I
always want it on the left side, the right
| | 02:40 | side or the center of my post.
| | 02:42 | I am going to choose Center and you
can see it moves over there and those
| | 02:45 | handles still appear.
| | 02:46 | But they are really not
selectable until I click the image itself.
| | 02:50 | Now I can resize, if I wanted to.
| | 02:51 | It stays centered though.
| | 02:52 | All right, I am going to click just
after it, and you'll notice I've got my
| | 02:56 | flashing cursor on the left.
| | 02:57 | I'll hit Return just to dropdown a little bit
further. '...and here's the pier in Santa Barbara.'
| | 03:09 | And I'll hit Return again and
this time I'll insert some video.
| | 03:12 | Now inserting video is a little bit trickier.
| | 03:14 | You'll have to have a video URL.
| | 03:16 | And in that case, you would have to know
the address, but you have got some other tabs.
| | 03:20 | You can choose From File.
| | 03:22 | You are going to be posting this to a
YouTube account though, so you need to
| | 03:25 | have a YouTube account set up or some
other service like you'd see YouTube here,
| | 03:29 | where we can login and
access videos from our YouTube account.
| | 03:33 | But mine is on my computer.
| | 03:35 | So I am going to go From File.
| | 03:36 | If you have got the Exercise Files, you
have got one on your computer as well,
| | 03:40 | and I am going to browse on to those Exercise
Files again, just like we did for the picture.
| | 03:44 | We are going to go to the Chap12 folder,
12_09 sub-folder to find that video of
| | 03:50 | the Santa Barbara pier.
| | 03:52 | One click, and then Open.
| | 03:54 | It takes us to the screen
where the entire path will appear.
| | 03:57 | A title and description are entered for
us based on the name of this video, but
| | 04:01 | we can change those if we
wanted to. Same thing for the tags.
| | 04:05 | We need to select a category.
| | 04:07 | So, click the Categories button.
| | 04:08 | I am going to choose Blogs.
| | 04:10 | Permissions, if you have set them up in
YouTube, you can select them from here
| | 04:13 | but Public is the default, and
you must agree to the Terms of Use.
| | 04:17 | And when you click Insert, you'll be
forced to login to your YouTube account.
| | 04:21 | So, I am going to do that now, and
when you click OK, it just takes a moment.
| | 04:33 | You'll see that it's actually being
posted at your YouTube account and it's
| | 04:37 | uploading the video right into your blog entry.
| | 04:40 | So depending on the length of the
video and the quality or resolution,
| | 04:43 | this could take a while but it
will get added to your blog post.
| | 04:49 | So that's a fairly simple blog
post based on California trip.
| | 04:54 | I have to have a title and I
have got some content down below.
| | 04:57 | Now it's time to actually publish this to--
in this case for me, my Windows Live Spaces.
| | 05:03 | That's the service I
decided to use for blogging.
| | 05:06 | All I do is go up to the Publish button.
| | 05:10 | Now before you do that you can go up
to File, if you're not done with it for
| | 05:13 | example, you could Save local draft.
| | 05:16 | That means it's going to be saved on
your computer, or you could post the
| | 05:19 | draft to your blog.
| | 05:20 | People would be able to see it then.
| | 05:22 | And when you're ready actually publish it.
| | 05:24 | I am just going to Save local draft
and you can see it's being saved to the
| | 05:28 | default folder over here.
| | 05:30 | It's called California Trip, so I can
access it at any time right from here.
| | 05:35 | I have also got this little
Delete button if I want to delete it.
| | 05:38 | I have got an untitled one that I
didn't finish that I am going to delete.
| | 05:41 | I'll confirm that by clicking Yes.
| | 05:43 | And now I am going to go
to go up here to Publish.
| | 05:45 | When you're ready to publish, you click
the Publish button, and you can see it's
| | 05:48 | waiting for videos to finish
publishing, but once the video has finished
| | 05:52 | publishing and everything is set,
I am going to be posting this blog to my
| | 05:56 | Windows Live Spaces.
| | 05:58 | So I am going to switch
over to Internet Explorer.
| | 06:02 | And here I am at Windows Live Spaces.
| | 06:04 | I can view my space right from here.
| | 06:08 | And of course, it's going to take some
time for that video to upload but here's
| | 06:12 | where I am going to see some blogs.
If I click the Blog button, I'll be able to
| | 06:16 | see my post. Right now,
there aren't any entries.
| | 06:19 | I can add them right from here, but
with Windows Live Writer, I have all of
| | 06:22 | those extra tools that will allow me
to post my blog entries right here to my
| | 06:27 | Windows Live Spaces.
| | 06:29 | So depending on how much you've added
to your blog post, if you have added video,
| | 06:33 | sometimes video files can be
quite large and they take a while to upload.
| | 06:38 | Eventually I'll see that here, and I can go
in and view the contents of that blog entry.
| | 06:42 | So, if you are into blogging, Windows
Live Writer can simplify the process of
| | 06:46 | posting content including photos and video.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Accessing free online storage with SkyDrive| 00:00 | With Windows Live SkyDrive, you
can back up or store files online
| | 00:04 | and even share files with other people.
| | 00:06 | All you need is a Windows Live ID
and you get 25 GB of free space, so
| | 00:11 | let's check it out.
| | 00:12 | Of course, the first thing you will need to
do is sign in to your Windows Live homepage.
| | 00:17 | You can see I'm still signed in, from
the previous lesson where we used Windows
| | 00:21 | Live Writer to create a blog post.
| | 00:23 | So here I am in Windows Live.
| | 00:25 | It really doesn't matter if you're
at the homepage or any other page.
| | 00:28 | But you will see this option, More.
| | 00:31 | Click the More button and you'll
notice SkyDrive is the third option down.
| | 00:36 | Select SkyDrive and it will
take you to your SkyDrive space.
| | 00:39 | If you have already added files here,
you're going to see Recent folders.
| | 00:43 | Blog images are the images that just got
added here when I created my blog post.
| | 00:49 | So that was automatic, but you have
also got a folder called My Documents and
| | 00:53 | Favorites and you can
create your own folders as well.
| | 00:56 | On the right-hand side you are going
to see how much space you have available
| | 00:59 | out of that 25 GB of free space.
| | 01:02 | When you're ready to add files,
| | 01:04 | well, just click the Add files link at
the top and you get to select the folder
| | 01:09 | where you want to store those files.
| | 01:11 | If you don't want to use one of the
existing folders you can create a new folder.
| | 01:15 | I am going to click New folder.
| | 01:17 | I get to give it a name now. I am
going to call it California and I can
| | 01:22 | share that with Just me.
| | 01:23 | So I have backup storage online.
| | 01:26 | I am the only one who has
access or I can make them public.
| | 01:29 | Just My network or I can
select people from my contact list.
| | 01:33 | I am going to leave it
at Just me and click Next.
| | 01:36 | So, all I have to do is drop
files here. Where are those files?
| | 01:40 | Well, if you have got the exercise
files you can follow along with me, or you
| | 01:43 | can experiment with any of your own files.
| | 01:46 | So I am going to go down to Windows
Explorer and I am going to go to the
| | 01:50 | Exercise Files that I have got on the Desktop.
| | 01:53 | And in the Chapter12 folder
after double-clicking, I am going to
| | 01:56 | double-click the 12_10 folder.
| | 01:58 | And here you can see I have
actually got two different types of files.
| | 02:01 | I have an image and I have got a video here.
| | 02:04 | And all I have to do is drag it into that
location where it says Drop files here.
| | 02:08 | Watch what happens when I take
Otters and just drop it right there.
| | 02:12 | You can see it's about to
be copied when I let go.
| | 02:15 | It's copied there and now to drop the next
file I have to go down here to Drop more files.
| | 02:21 | So I am going to do that with my
santa barbara pier video file.
| | 02:24 | I am going to drop it right there,
and it says Copy. When I let go,
| | 02:28 | it gets added to the list. I can use
this little delete button, if I want to
| | 02:32 | remove any of these from the list.
| | 02:33 | I am going to remove the video file,
because it's quite large, just to save some time.
| | 02:37 | I can go back to my Windows Explorer and
start adding more just dropping them down below.
| | 02:42 | But when I am done, I'll close that up
and I am ready to upload these files,
| | 02:46 | in this case one image.
| | 02:48 | I am going to click Upload and you can
see if I had that video file, it might
| | 02:52 | take a little bit longer.
| | 02:54 | I can stop at any time, but
once it's done, it's done.
| | 02:57 | I have created the album called California.
| | 02:59 | I have got it in there.
| | 03:00 | There's the image that I was just
copying over or backing up if you will.
| | 03:04 | I still have it on my hard
drive in the Exercise Files folder.
| | 03:07 | But thanks to SkyDrive I
have got a backup copy of this.
| | 03:10 | And if I want, I can share it with
people now. Even though I chose not to
| | 03:14 | originally, I can click Let people
know by clicking here and I can add e-mail
| | 03:19 | addresses here to invite people to view this.
| | 03:22 | I can add a message down below.
| | 03:24 | I am not going to do that now.
| | 03:26 | But send is what you do when you're done.
| | 03:27 | I am going to click Cancel.
| | 03:29 | In this way they're not going to get a
link to this particular file. I am going
| | 03:33 | to be sharing it with just me.
| | 03:36 | I can always go back to SkyDrive.
Notice the link for my Windows Live account.
| | 03:40 | David, there is SkyDrive there and I click that.
| | 03:44 | You are going to see all of my folders
and you are going to see I have got that
| | 03:47 | new one called California.
| | 03:48 | That little padlock means I'm the
only one who's got access to this.
| | 03:52 | It's kind of locked out to everybody else.
| | 03:54 | So I could have added to
one of the existing folders.
| | 03:58 | I have got photos you can see that were added,
when I wrote a blog, the ones I just added.
| | 04:03 | And at any time I can go back in
here and add more files if I want to.
| | 04:08 | Create more folders.
| | 04:09 | If you want to remove something, all
you have to do is go to-- I am going to
| | 04:12 | go to California here.
| | 04:14 | You'll notice I can add more photos
to California, create another folder.
| | 04:17 | But I have also got this More dropdown
and from here, I can delete and I'm about
| | 04:24 | to permanently delete California
and all it's contents when I click OK.
| | 04:28 | That's all right. I don't need it any longer.
| | 04:30 | It's gone from my SkyDrive.
| | 04:32 | So don't forget with your Windows
Live ID you get 25 GB of free online
| | 04:37 | storage using SkyDrive and it's a
great way to backup your files online or
| | 04:42 | even share them with others.
| | Collapse this transcript |
| Creating a movie with Windows Live Movie Maker| 00:00 | It's time now to take a look at one of
my favorite programs that's part of the
| | 00:03 | Windows Live Essentials' bundle of
programs and that's Windows Live Movie Maker.
| | 00:08 | If you want to throw together your
photos, video, even music and create cool
| | 00:12 | looking videos to share with others,
this is a simple application to use and
| | 00:16 | it will help you do all of that.
| | 00:18 | Now Windows Movie Maker has been around
for quite some time but here in Windows
| | 00:23 | Live Essentials, in
Windows 7, it's newly designed.
| | 00:26 | It's got a fresh new look,
so let's take a peek now.
| | 00:29 | We are going to be using the contents
of the 12_11 sub-folder of the Chap12
| | 00:33 | folder of the Exercise Files.
| | 00:36 | We have got some photos, we have got a
video, even a song here that we can use
| | 00:40 | as we create our video.
| | 00:42 | If you have got your own and you
want to try this out, that's fine.
| | 00:44 | If you have got the Exercise Files,
you can follow along with me by going down
| | 00:48 | to the Windows orb, selecting All
Programs, then Windows Live, and of course
| | 00:53 | when you install it or download Windows
Live Essentials, you got to have to make
| | 00:56 | sure that Movie Maker was one of
the programs that was being installed.
| | 01:01 | And when you select it here, we see
that fresh, new, simple looking user
| | 01:06 | interface, broken up into
three main areas really.
| | 01:08 | I have got the Ribbon across the top
with all of our commands, and you can see
| | 01:11 | there are different tabs here.
| | 01:14 | We have our Preview screen where we
will be able to see what's going on as we
| | 01:18 | create it and over here on the right-
hand side, an area for dragging in content,
| | 01:23 | videos, and photos, for example.
| | 01:24 | And we can just drag them in here from
a folder, or if you would prefer you can
| | 01:29 | click to browse for them, so it's
totally up to you how you do to this.
| | 01:33 | I like to have it filling my entire
screen, so instead of going to Windows
| | 01:38 | Explorer, moving this around and
trying to drag things in, I prefer just to
| | 01:43 | browse for them from this window.
| | 01:45 | So I am going to close up Windows Explorer.
| | 01:47 | And before I even start dragging in
content, I am going to go up here and make sure
| | 01:51 | the Home tab is selected.
| | 01:53 | If you have got a video camera or a
camera and you want to be able to add video
| | 01:58 | from that, in other words
you need to import the content,
| | 02:01 | you are going to go just left of the
Home tab here and you are going to click
| | 02:05 | the Application button, and here you
will notice you have the ability to
| | 02:08 | import from a device.
| | 02:10 | Of course, you would
have the plug-in the device.
| | 02:12 | If it's a video camera,
you plug it in probably with a USB cable.
| | 02:16 | And to begin making a movie with
Windows Live Movie Maker, you will select your
| | 02:20 | photos and videos that you would want to use.
| | 02:23 | You don't need to see this message
every time, click OK and off you go.
| | 02:27 | Now, if your camera is plugged in,
it's going to be recognized here.
| | 02:30 | You'll see the device.
| | 02:31 | If you simply select it and then whatever
you do on your camera you will actually
| | 02:34 | see in the Preview screen here.
| | 02:36 | You can import with the Import button.
| | 02:39 | We've already got all of our content, so
in that case we are going to go back to
| | 02:43 | our Home tab here on the Ribbon and
start to add videos and photos from here.
| | 02:48 | Something called AutoMovie is really cool.
| | 02:51 | Once you have got your content, you can
have Movie Maker create the movie for you.
| | 02:55 | And what it's going to do is
automatically create a title.
| | 02:58 | Let's go to Title here, and click.
| | 02:59 | This allows us to add a title.
| | 03:01 | You can see the content was added.
| | 03:03 | We get to enter our text now.
| | 03:05 | Let's just type in
something like California Cool.
| | 03:09 | I am going to hit Return,
by D. Rivers. There we go.
| | 03:15 | Now this is the default formatting, we
got a black background, we have got white text,
| | 03:19 | but all of this stuff can be changed.
| | 03:20 | You will notice as soon as we started
typing, we got our Format tab selected on
| | 03:25 | the Ribbon. We have got Text
tools and Video tools to choose from.
| | 03:28 | Right now we're looking at the Text tools.
| | 03:30 | You can see the color-coded border
around the outside of the Ribbon.
| | 03:34 | So for example, if I want to make this little
bit bigger, I could do that right from here.
| | 03:38 | If I want to change the font to
something else, go ahead and change the font.
| | 03:43 | If you want to add some attributes,
change the font size, center, left, or right,
| | 03:48 | add transparency, even go inside
to edit the text, which we are already
| | 03:52 | inside editing, if we wanted
to make changes, no problem.
| | 03:55 | Let's just change the background color,
we will click the Background color and
| | 03:58 | choose a nice dark blue.
| | 04:01 | And for the text itself, the text
color, we can go to this button and let's
| | 04:07 | choose bright yellow, there we go.
| | 04:09 | We can also choose the duration, so how much
time are we going to be looking at this title.
| | 04:14 | I can see the duration is set to
5 seconds, but we can change that.
| | 04:18 | Let's just shorten it to 2
seconds for the sake of this movie.
| | 04:21 | I will just click in the screen in the
background, so you can see your text.
| | 04:25 | Click again and you will notice that
nothing seems to be appearing here.
| | 04:28 | But if we click the Play button, you are going
see the default effect that was applied here.
| | 04:34 | So you can play that back at
any time just to preview it.
| | 04:38 | And if you want to change
that effect, you can, no problem.
| | 04:43 | So we can't see it right now, we will
just go back to the beginning and you
| | 04:47 | could see we have got this
slider here as well. Here it is.
| | 04:50 | There is our text.
| | 04:51 | Click anywhere on the text itself and
choose a different effect if you want.
| | 04:55 | As you hover over these effects you are
going to see what actually happens here.
| | 04:58 | I like this one here.
Zoom in if you want to see more.
| | 05:02 | Click the little dropdown.
| | 05:03 | We have lots to choose from here,
maybe that one, Spin in. Let's use that.
| | 05:07 | We have also got this bar that we can
move across back and forth to preview
| | 05:11 | what's going on as well. Okay.
| | 05:14 | Let's get some more stuff in here.
| | 05:16 | Let's add some video and photos.
| | 05:18 | And we click this button, here
we go, we can start browsing.
| | 05:21 | We will go to the 12_11 sub-folder of Chap12.
| | 05:25 | If we just want to bring all of this
stuff in, let's bring all the photos in,
| | 05:29 | click the first one, hold down
Shift, click the last one and let's just
| | 05:32 | leave this video out of the picture.
| | 05:34 | Hold down Ctrl while you
click that to deselect it.
| | 05:38 | When you click Open, you can see
everything got added, and that's the same order
| | 05:42 | that they appeared in our folder.
| | 05:44 | We can change the order up.
| | 05:46 | Now they are all selected right
now, so there's nothing to move.
| | 05:49 | So you need to deselect and just
click one, for example. Notice the
| | 05:53 | border around the outside.
| | 05:55 | Now you can move it. When you
let go, it's dropped in place.
| | 05:58 | I am going to move the
otters over here. There we go.
| | 06:02 | So you can move a group or
you can move individual images.
| | 06:05 | In this case we are using photos.
| | 06:07 | So you can choose how you want
them to appear and in the right order.
| | 06:11 | Let's bring in that video now.
| | 06:12 | We will go to Add Videos and Photos again,
but this time we just want the video.
| | 06:17 | This way we get to pick its
location or maybe we just import it.
| | 06:20 | It's automatically added to the end
and you can see how it's broken up.
| | 06:24 | You can also see the
duration when you hover over.
| | 06:26 | It's 40 seconds worth.
| | 06:27 | I am going to move that just up here
before the Rocks, so you can see now it
| | 06:33 | wraps around onto the second line.
| | 06:36 | And with video you have a number
of different options to choose from.
| | 06:38 | With this frame selected, you'll notice
up at the top, we have got Video tools.
| | 06:43 | So we can do things like let's go down to
Edit, have it fade in and out. I like this.
| | 06:49 | The Trim tool allows us to trim the video,
any unwanted parts that we don't need.
| | 06:55 | So to really see where we want it to
start, for example, we can click and
| | 06:58 | drag this border over.
| | 07:01 | And I actually don't want any of this
right here, so I am going to leave it
| | 07:05 | right there at the end.
| | 07:06 | I am going to split it.
| | 07:08 | When I do that now,
it's like I have got two videos.
| | 07:10 | In this one, I am going to select it and
press Delete on my keyboard. It's gone.
| | 07:15 | Now the video starts here.
| | 07:16 | As I scroll over, you can
see that's good, I like that.
| | 07:19 | All right, I am going to split again
and I am going to move across all the way
| | 07:26 | to there and I am going to split.
| | 07:29 | Now I have got it split into three and this
little section here I don't want. Trimming.
| | 07:33 | You are going to use just
for your start and end points.
| | 07:36 | So for example, if I drag this across,
maybe right there is where I want it
| | 07:44 | to end. I am going to set that as my
endpoint and you can see it's really
| | 07:47 | gotten shortened up here.
| | 07:49 | So as I hover over this little clip,
you can see it's 6 seconds. It's trimmed.
| | 07:53 | It also tells me that this one is 8.
| | 07:55 | All right so, now we have got all of that in.
| | 07:58 | Let's add some credits at the end.
| | 08:00 | Go back to the Home tab
and we will add some credits.
| | 08:04 | You can see they get added
to the end. Enter name here.
| | 08:06 | I am actually going to type in a bunch
of words here. Created by David Rivers.
| | 08:13 | You can type in your own information.
| | 08:15 | Again, we have got all of our Text tools
here as well as effects if you want.
| | 08:19 | By default, it's going to scroll up.
| | 08:21 | And we can change the duration here.
| | 08:23 | I am going to bump it up to about 8
seconds, and now I've got everything I need.
| | 08:29 | The only thing missing might be
some cool transitions in between.
| | 08:33 | So if I select the first frame, hold
down Shift and click the last frame, which
| | 08:37 | is my Credits. I have got
all of them selected again.
| | 08:41 | And now, let's go up to Animations
and you will see Transitions here.
| | 08:45 | As we hover over these, we see a
preview happen. Some cool transitions.
| | 08:51 | We also have some pan and zoom options.
| | 08:53 | So if you want your images to be panned
across, for example, going from left to
| | 08:57 | right, right to left, you got
a whole bunch to choose from.
| | 09:00 | It's almost as if the still pictures are moving.
| | 09:03 | So I am going to choose one of these.
| | 09:05 | Let's go down to Zoom in top.
| | 09:08 | Remember everything is selected, so
it's being applied to everything and
| | 09:10 | let's choose a cool transition here.
| | 09:13 | Choose the Diagonal - box out.
| | 09:15 | You can also choose the duration for
these things, how long it takes for the
| | 09:18 | transition to start and end.
| | 09:20 | In this case, a second, and that's going
to affect the entire length of our video.
| | 09:24 | And you can see the total
length here is 53 seconds.
| | 09:28 | Back to the Home tab.
| | 09:29 | Now this is cool, we can add some music to this.
| | 09:32 | Our video actually has some sound, so if
I click the video clip, hold down Shift
| | 09:37 | and click the second one,
I want these both selected.
| | 09:40 | I might not want to hear any of the audio
here, so I need to access those options.
| | 09:45 | And you can see under Video tools,
I have got Edit, or the Edit tab.
| | 09:50 | I will go to Video volume. I am going to
drag this slider all the way to the left,
| | 09:54 | which is the equivalent of
muting it. Okay, perfect.
| | 09:57 | Now we will go back to
the Home tab and add music.
| | 10:00 | When we click Add music, it could be at
the current point or just add it to the
| | 10:05 | entire movie. I want to
add it to the entire movie.
| | 10:07 | I am going to go back to my 12_11
sub-folder of the Chap12 folder in the
| | 10:11 | Exercise Files, and I've got
an MP3 song in there, FinalSong.
| | 10:15 | Click Open, and you can
see it gets added, beautiful.
| | 10:19 | And I have got some options.
Music tools for example.
| | 10:22 | If I go down to Options, I can fade
the music in, but I want it to fade out
| | 10:27 | slowly, there we go.
| | 10:29 | We can also adjust the volume for our music.
| | 10:31 | I am going to just bring it down a little bit.
| | 10:33 | Now you can see the music
track across the top here.
| | 10:37 | It's actually over 3 minutes long, so I
don't have enough content to fill up the
| | 10:42 | entire song and it gets cut off at the end.
| | 10:44 | And that's why fading out is a good idea.
| | 10:47 | Another option though might be
to have it automatically fit.
| | 10:50 | Let's go to the Home tab.
I kind of like this feature.
| | 10:54 | When you click Fit to music,
automatically your photos and your video are going
| | 10:59 | to be stretched out so it fits the
length of the music, and you can see
| | 11:03 | everything just got stretched out.
| | 11:04 | It's as if we added duplicates of all of
our photos and that's actually going to
| | 11:09 | fit the entire song.
| | 11:10 | The new length of my movie
is 3 minutes and 6 seconds.
| | 11:14 | I can press play just to take a
peek at what that's going to look like.
| | 11:17 | (Music playing.)
| | 11:24 | I will just press Pause right there.
| | 11:27 | So once you have assembled all of this,
and by the way clicking AutoMovie would
| | 11:31 | have done everything we just did:
| | 11:32 | added the titles, the credits, the
effects in between, the panning and
| | 11:37 | zooming that we added.
| | 11:38 | And it would have, with our song,
made everything fit to the music.
| | 11:42 | We just did it all manually, but you know
what? It was a lot more fun having full control.
| | 11:47 | If you are in a rush though,
AutoMovie is a great option.
| | 11:50 | Now it's time to save this up, so
let's just click the Save button and I am
| | 11:55 | going to save it to my Desktop.
It's called My Movie by default.
| | 11:59 | You can call it whatever you want.
| | 12:00 | I am going to type in CaliCool, and
notice this is going to be saved as a
| | 12:06 | Movie Maker Project.
| | 12:08 | So when you click Save, you just go
back to your project any time you want
| | 12:12 | to make adjustments.
| | 12:13 | When you're ready to share though,
you have got some sharing options.
| | 12:16 | I am going to click this
little dropdown to see them all.
| | 12:18 | YouTube is an option.
| | 12:20 | It will publish right to your YouTube
account and then you can see we have got
| | 12:23 | some common settings, high-definition
settings, or in this case we can burn to a
| | 12:27 | DVD, and we have got these
other options down below.
| | 12:31 | If you have a portable device like a
mobile phone or if you want to send it via
| | 12:35 | e-mail, you can do that from here as well.
| | 12:38 | Also if we go up to the Application
button, you can see we've got the Save movie.
| | 12:43 | We have got these options here and
you can choose different definitions.
| | 12:47 | We have also got Publish movie, and
there is our YouTube option from here.
| | 12:51 | So it's totally up to you
how you want to save it.
| | 12:53 | I am going to choose Save.
I am going to click Widescreen.
| | 12:56 | And in this case, it's going to
be saved as a Windows Media video.
| | 13:00 | That's my only option when I choose Widescreen.
| | 13:02 | It's going to have the same name.
I am going to click Save and now I've got
| | 13:05 | that option as well.
| | 13:06 | Now when we actually publish or save
to a format that we can use to play the movie,
| | 13:12 | not just a project, it could take
a while depending on how much video and
| | 13:16 | how many photographs are
in there, the music, etc.
| | 13:18 | So you can see with Windows Live Movie Maker,
I have got the progress bar going across.
| | 13:23 | At the end, I will be able to play this movie.
| | 13:26 | So let's let this complete and then we'll
take a look at the finished product. All right.
| | 13:31 | It's done.
We see this little message here.
| | 13:33 | So our movie called
CaliCool, WMV format is complete.
| | 13:37 | So we have the ability now, if I want to
go and play that, click the Play button.
| | 13:42 | You can see it's opening up
here in Windows Media Player.
| | 13:44 | (Music playing.)
| | 13:52 | I am just going to bring the volume
down and you can see the progress bar in
| | 13:56 | the Media Player here moving across.
| | 13:58 | You can see that slight pan and zoom,
the moving in, one of the special effects.
| | 14:02 | And when we move from one photo to
the next photo, we are going to see that
| | 14:06 | transition effect as well, there it is,
and some more panning and zooming.
| | 14:11 | Of course, everything got stretched out
so it could fit this song and that's why
| | 14:14 | it's moving so slowly.
| | 14:16 | But we've got a finished product and it
took us literally minutes to throw our
| | 14:20 | photos, video, and music together.
| | 14:22 | I am going to close this up and
I am going to close up Movie Maker.
| | 14:26 | I have saved the project.
| | 14:27 | There is my file right there on the
Desktop any time I need to play it.
| | 14:32 | So keep in mind, there is a newly
redesigned Movie Maker built in to Windows
| | 14:36 | Live Essentials. It makes it really easy
for sharing video that you create based on
| | 14:41 | photos, video, even music.
| | 14:43 | Windows Live Movie Maker.
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
ConclusionGoodbye| 00:00 |
Hey, congratulations!
| | 00:01 |
You've reached the end of Windows 7
Essential Training with me, David Rivers.
| | 00:06 |
You should be feeling comfortable now
with much of the basic to intermediate
| | 00:09 |
functionality of Windows 7. I would
like to thank you for watching and I hope
| | 00:13 |
to see you again in another title
brought to you by www.lynda.com.
| | 00:18 |
| | Collapse this transcript |
|
|
